MERCURY Outboard 40-50-60 4 Stroke Service Manual

Service Manual Outline
Section 1 - Important Information

Important Information
1
A - Specifications
B - Maintenance
C - General Information
D - Outboard Motor Installation
Electrical
2
Section 2 - Electrical
A - Ignition
B - Charging & Starting System
C - Timing,Synchronizing & Adjusting
Electronic Fuel
Injection 3
Section 3 - Electronic Fuel Injection
A - Theory of Operation
B - Diagnostics and Troubleshooting
C - Service Procedures
Powerhead
4
D - Emissions
Section 4 - Powerhead
A - Cylinder Head
B - Cylinder Block/Crankcase
Mid-Section
5
C - Lubrication
Section 5 - Mid-Section
A - Clamp/Swivel Brackets & Drive Shaft Housing
Lower Unit
6
B - Power Trim
C - Manual Tilt Assist
Section 6 - Lower Unit
A - Non-Bigfoot Gear Housing
Attachments/
Control Linkage 7
B - Bigfoot Gear Housing
Section 7 - Attachments/Control Linkage
A - Throttle/Shift Linkage
B - Tiller Handle
Color Diagrams
8
Section 8 - Color Diagrams
90-883065 APRIL 2001 Page iii

https://www.boat-manuals.com/
Notice
Throughout this publication, “Dangers”, “Warnings” and “Cautions” (accompanied by the In-
ternational HAZARD Symbol ) are used to alert the mechanic to special instructions con-
cerning a particular service or operation that may be hazardous if performed incorrectly or
carelessly. OBSERVE THEM CAREFULLY!
These “Safety Alerts” alone cannot eliminate the hazards that they signal. Strict compliance
to these special instructions when performing the service, plus “Common Sense” operation,
are major accident prevention measures.
DANGER
DANGER - Immediate hazards which WILL result in severe personal injury or death.
WARNING
WARNING - Hazards or unsafe practices which COULD result in severe personal in-
jury or death.
CAUTION
Hazards or unsafe practices which could result in minor personal injury or product
or property damage.
Notice to Users of This Manual

This service manual has been written and published by the Service Department of Mercury
Marine to aid our dealers’ mechanics and company service personnel when servicing the
products described herein.
It is assumed that these personnel are familiar with the servicing procedures of these prod-
ucts, or like or similar products manufactured and marketed by Mercury Marine, that they
have been trained in the recommended servicing procedures of these products which in-
cludes the use of mechanics’ common hand tools and the special Mercury Marine or recom-
mended tools from other suppliers.
We could not possibly know of and advise the service trade of all conceivable procedures
by which a service might be performed and of the possible hazards and/or results of each
method. We have not undertaken any such wide evaluation. Therefore, anyone who uses
a service procedure and/or tool, which is not recommended by the manufacturer, first must
completely satisfy himself that neither his nor the products safety will be endangered by the
service procedure selected.
All information, illustrations and specifications contained in this manual are based on the
latest product information available at the time of publication. As required, revisions to this
manual will be sent to all dealers contracted by us to sell and/or service these products.
It should be kept in mind, while working on the product, that the electrical system and ignition
system are capable of violent and damaging short circuits or severe electrical shocks. When
performing any work where electrical terminals could possibly be grounded or touched by
the mechanic, the battery cables should be disconnected at the battery.
Any time the intake or exhaust openings are exposed during service they should be covered
to protect against accidental entrance of foreign material which could enter the cylinders and
cause extensive internal damage when the engine is started.
90-883065 APRIL 2001 Page i

It is important to note, during any maintenance procedure replacement fasteners must have
the same measurements and strength as those removed. Numbers on the heads of the met-
ric bolts and on the surfaces of metric nuts indicate their strength. American bolts use radial
lines for this purpose, while most American nuts do not have strength markings. Mis-
matched or incorrect fasteners can result in damage or malfunction, or possibly personal
injury. Therefore, fasteners removed should be saved for reuse in the same locations when-
ever possible. Where the fasteners are not satisfactory for re-use, care should be taken to
select a replacement that matches the original.
Cleanliness and Care of Outboard Motor

A marine power product is a combination of many machined, honed, polished and lapped
surfaces with tolerances that are measured in the ten thousands of an inch/mm. When any
product component is serviced, care and cleanliness are important. Throughout this manu-
al, it should be understood that proper cleaning, and protection of machined surfaces and
friction areas is a part of the repair procedure. This is considered standard shop practice
even if not specifically stated.
Whenever components are removed for service, they should be retained in order. At the
time of installation, they should be installed in the same locations and with the same mating
surfaces as when removed.
Personnel should not work on or under an outboard which is suspended. Outboards should
be attached to work stands, or lowered to ground as soon as possible.
We reserve the right to make changes to this manual without prior notification.
Refer to dealer service bulletins for other pertinent information concerning the products de-
scribed in this manual.
EXAMPLE:
90-826148R1 JANUARY 1996 PAGE 6A-7
Revision No. 1
Month of Printing Section Number
Year of Printing Part of Section Letter
Page Number
Page ii 90-883065 APRIL 2001
SPECIFICATIONS
IMPORTANT INFORMATION 1
Section 1A - Specifications A
Table of Contents
Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1A-1 Propeller Information Charts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1A-8
Specifications
Models 40/50/60 EFI (4-Stroke)

Model 40 40 hp (29.8 Kw) @ 5750 rpm
HORSEPOWER
Model 50 50 hp (37.7 Kw) @ 5750 rpm
(kW)
Model 60 60 hp (44.7 Kw) @ 5750 rpm
Electric
OUTBOARD
40/50/60 ELPT 248 lb (112.7 kg)
WEIGHT
40/50/60 ELPT BIGFOOT 264 lb (119.9 kg)
RECOMMENDED GASOLINE Automotive Unleaded
FUEL with a Minimum Pump Posted
Octane Rating of 87
OIL FILTER p/n 35-822626A2
OIL FILTER WRENCH p/n 91-802653Q1
ENGINE OIL CAPACITY Either 3 Quarts or 3 Liters
ENGINE OIL SAE 10W-30 viscosity oil is recom-
mended for use in all temperatures.
SAE SAE SAE 25W-40 viscosity oil may be used at
F° C° 25W-40 10W-30 temperatures above 40° F (4° C).
+100 +38 Use Quicksilver 4-Cycle Marine Oil with

+80 +27 the proper viscosity for the expected
OIL temperature in your area (see range
+60 +16 thermometer on left). If not available, use
+40 +4 a premium quality 4-cycle engine oil, cer-
tified to meet or exceed anyone of the
+20 –7 following American Petroleum Institute
–18 (API) service classifications SH, SG, SF,
0
CF-4, CE, CD, CDll.
90-883065 APRIL 2001 Page 1A-1

SPECIFICATIONS
Type Capacitor Discharge Ignition

Spark Plug:
Type Champion RA8HC
Gap 0.040 in. (1.0 mm)
Hex Size 5/8 in. (16 mm)
Torque 150 lb-in. (17 Nm)
Hole Size 12 mm
Firing Order 1-3-4-2
Ignition Timing:
@Idle Controlled by ECM
@1500-1800 14° B.T.D.C
@ WOT (6000 rpm) 28° B.T.D.C
Stator Resistance 0.20 - 0.30 Ω (YEL-YEL)
Crank Position Sensor (CPS)
Resistance 300 - 350 Ω (RED - WHT)
Ignition Coil Resistance:
Internal Shielding 0 - 10.0 KΩ (Pin A - Mounting Bracket)
Electronic Spark Trigger (EST) 8.5 - 12KΩ (Pin B - Pin C)
Secondary 3.0 - 7.0 kΩ (Pin A - Coil Tower)
IGNITION High Tension Lead/Boot
SYSTEM Resistance 0.600 - 1.100 KΩ
Readings taken @ ECM Engine Speed Limiter
68°F (20°C). Fuel/Spark Cut-out on Cylinders
#2 and #3 6225 rpm
Fuel/Spark Cut-out on All
Cylinders 6350 rpm
ECM Overheat Speed Control Guardian System is activated. Power
limit will vary with level of overheat.
ECM Low Oil Pressure Speed Control Guardian System is activated. Engine
power is limited to 10% of maximum
(Approximately 2000 RPM)
MAT/ECT Temperature Sensor See Graph Section 3B - EFI
Manifold Absolute Pressure (MAP)
Sensor Resistance See Table Section 3B - EFI
Fuel Injector Resistance 10.0 - 13.5Ω
Main Power Relay 81-99 Ω (Pin 85 - Pin 86)
Idle Air Control (IAC) 24-30 Ω (Between Pins)
Throttle Position Sensor Typical
Range
Output Voltage @Idle 0.39-1.00 Volts
Output Voltage @WOT (6000) 3.66-4.80 Volts
Alternator Type: Single Phase (12 Pole)
CHARGING
20 Amp. Electric Alternator Output 12.6 V-20 Amps. (252 Watts)
SYSTEM
(Rectified/Regulated)
Readings taken @
Stator Resistance 0.20 - 0.30 Ohms (YEL-YEL)
68°F (20°C).
Quicksilver Tachometer Setting “6P” or “4”
Electric Start:
Starter Type Bendix
STARTING Output 1.1 kW
SYSTEM Ampere Draw Under:
(Load) 174.0 Amps
(No Load) 23.7 Amps
Page 1A-2 90-883065 APRIL 2001

SPECIFICATIONS
Battery Rating
Minimum Requirement 465 Marine Cranking Amps (MCA)
or 350 Cold Cranking Amps (CCA)
For operation below 32° F (0° C) 1000 Marine Cranking Amps (MCA) or
BATTERY 775 Cold Cranking Amps (CCA)
Ampere-Hours (Ah) Minimum
For operation above 32° F (0° C) 70
For operation below 32° F (0° C) 105
Fuel Pump Type Mechanical Water Cooled
(Plunger/Diaphragm)
FUEL
Fuel Pump:
SYSTEM
Pressure 3-6 psi
Fuel Tank Capacity Accessory
Fuel Injector System Batch (1 & 4) - (2 & 3)
Idle rpm (Out Of Gear) 725 ± 25 rpm
Idle rpm (In Forward Gear) 725 ± 25 rpm
FUEL INJECTION
Wide Open Throttle rpm (WOT)
Range 5500–6000
Fuel Pump Pressure - Electric 42-44 psi (290-303 kPa)
Type 4 Stroke Cycle – Over Head Camshaft
CYLINDER
Displacement 60.8 cu. in. (995 cc)
BLOCK
Number of Cylinders 4
STROKE Length 2.953 in. (75 mm)
Diameter
Standard 2.5591 in. (65 mm)
CYLINDER Oversize-0.010 in. (0.25 mm) 2.5689 in. (65.25 mm)
BORE Oversize-0.020 in. (0.50 mm) 2.5787 in. (65.5 mm)
Taper/Out of Round Maximum 0.003 in. (0.08 mm)
Bore Type Cast Iron
Piston Type Aluminum
O.D. at Skirt
PISTON Standard 2.5570 - 2.5578 in. (64.950 - 64.965 mm)
Oversize-0.010 in. (0.25 mm) 2.5669 - 2.5675 in. (65.2 - 65.215 mm)
PISTON Piston to Cylinder Clearance 0.0014 - .0026 in. (0.035 - 0.065 mm)
CLEARANCE
Ring End Gap (Installed)
Top 0.006 - 0.012 in. (0.15 - 0.03 mm)
Middle 0.012 - 0.020 in. (0.30 - 0.50 mm)
RINGS Bottom (Oil Ring) 0.008 - 0.028 in. (0.20 - 0.70 mm)
Side Clearance:
Top 0.0008 - 0.0024 in. (0.02 - 0.06 mm)
Middle 0.0008 - 0.0024 in. (0.02 - 0.06 mm)
Compression Ratio 9.7:1
COMPRESSION Cylinder Compression* 180 - 210 psi (Peak)
RATIO (Electric Models Only, Cold Engine @
W.O.T.)
PISTON PIN Piston Pin Diameter 0.6285 - 0.6287 in. (15.965 - 15.970 mm)
CONNECTING Oil Clearance (Big End) 0.0008 - 0.0020 in. (0.020 - 0.052 mm)
ROD Small End Inside Diameter 0.6293 - 0.6298 in. (15.985 - 15.998 mm)
90-883065 APRIL 2001 Page 1A-3

SPECIFICATIONS
Main Bearing Clearance 0.0005 - 0.0017 in. (0.012 - 0.044 mm)

CRANKSHAFT
Crankshaft Run-out 0.0018 in. (0.046 mm)
Camshaft Dimensions
Intake “A” 1.214 - 1.222 in. (30.83 - 31.03 mm)
Exhaust “A” A 1.214 - 1.222 in. (30.83 - 31.03 mm)
Intake “B” 1.020 - 1.028 in. (25.90 - 26.10 mm)
Exhaust “B” 1.020 - 1.028 in. (25.90 - 26.10 mm)
Run-out Limit B 0.0039 in. (0.1 mm)

Camshaft Bearing Diameter “b” 1.4541 - 1.4549 in.
(36.935 - 36.955 mm)
CAMSHAFT
b
b
b
b
Free Length “a” 1.491-1.569 in. (37.85-39.85 mm)

Tilt Limit “b” Less than 0.060 in. (1.7 mm)
bb
aa
VALVE SPRING
Compressed Pressure (Installed)

Intake 19.8 - 22.0 lbs. (9.0 - 10.0 kg)
Exhaust 19.8 - 22.0 lbs. (9.0 - 10.0 kg)
Tilt Limit (Intake & Exhaust) 0.043 in. (1.1 mm)
Dir. of Winding (Intake & Exhaust) Left Hand
Page 1A-4 90-883065 APRIL 2001

SPECIFICATIONS
Warp Limit 0.004 in. (0.1 mm)
* Lines indicate straight edge measurement

CYLINDER HEAD Camshaft Bore Inside Diameter “a” 1.4567 - 1.4577 in.
(37.000 - 37.025 mm)
a a a a
a
Valve/Valve Seat/Valve Guides:

Valve Clearance (cold)
Intake 0.006 - 0.010 in. (0.15 - 0.25 mm)
Exhaust 0.010 - 0.014 in. (0.25 - 0.35 mm)
Valve Dimensions:
“A” Head Diameter
Intake 1.256 - 1.264 in. (31.9 - 32.1 mm)
Exhaust 1.020 - 1.028 in. (25.9 - 26.1 mm)
“B” Face Width
Intake 0.079 - 0.124 in. (2.00 - 3.14 mm)
Exhaust 0.079 - 0.124 in. (2.00 - 3.14 mm)
“C” Seat Width
Intake 0.035 - 0.043 in. (0.9 - 1.1 mm)
Exhaust 0.035 - 0.043 in. (0.9 - 1.1 mm)
“D” Margin Thickness
VALVES Intake 0.020 - 0.035 in. (0.5 - 0.9 mm)
Exhaust 0.020 - 0.035 in. (0.5 - 0.9 mm)
Stem Outside Diameter
Intake 0.2156 - 0.2161 in. (5.475 - 5.490 mm)
Exhaust 0.2150 - 0.2156 in. (5.460 - 5.475 mm)
Guide Inside Diameter
Intake 0.2165 - 0.2170 in. (5.500 - 5.512 mm)
Exhaust 0.2165 - 0.2170 in. (5.500 - 5.512 mm)
Stem To Guide Clearance
Intake 0.0004 - 0.0015 in. (0.010 - 0.037 mm)
Exhaust 0.0010 - 0.0020 in. (0.025 - 0.052 mm)
Stem Run-out Limit (max.) 0.0006 in. (0.016 mm)
90-883065 APRIL 2001 Page 1A-5

SPECIFICATIONS
Valve Dimensions
“C”
“B”
“D”
“A”
Head Diameter Face Width Seat Width Margin Thickness
Outside Diameter 0.6288 - 0.6296 in.

ROCKER SHAFT
(15.971 - 15.991 mm)
Inside Diameter of Bore 0.6299 - 0.6306 in.
ROCKER ARM
(16.000 - 16.018 mm)
Valve Opening Temperature 118° F - 123° F (48° C - 51° C)
THERMOSTAT
Full Open Temperature 145° F (63° C)
Pump Type Trochoid
Engine Oil Pressure (Warm Engine)
@ 3000 rpm 30-40 psi (207-278 kPa)
Engine Oil Pan Capacity Either 3 Qts. or 3 Liters
Oil Pump:
Outer Rotor to Housing “a” 0.0045 - 0.009 in. (0.11 - 0.23 mm)
Inner Rotor to Outer Rotor “b” 0.005 in. (0.12 mm)
Rotor to Housing “c” 0.0015 - 0.003 in. (0.04 - 0.08 mm)
LUBRICATION a
SYSTEM bb
cc
Transom Height:
Long Shaft 20 in. (51 cm)
Steering Pivot Range:
MID-SECTION Tiller 90°
Remote 60°
Full Tilt Up Angle 71°
Allowable Transom Thickness 2-3/4 in. (69.8 mm)
Page 1A-6 90-883065 APRIL 2001

SPECIFICATIONS
Gear Ratio 1.83:1

Gearcase Capacity 11.5 fl oz (340 mL)
Lubricant Type Quicksilver Gear Lube-Premium Blend
Forward Gear
Number of Teeth 22 Spiral/Bevel
Pinion Gear
Pinion Height 0.025 in. (0.64 mm)
GEAR HOUSING Pinion Gear Locating Tool
(1.83:1) (91-817008A2)
Forward Gear Backlash 0.011-0.017 in. (0.28-0.43 mm)
Backlash Indicator Tool (91-19660--1)
MARK #4 or 0.366 in. (9.3 mm)
Water Pressure (Warm Engine)
@ 800 rpm 1–3 psi (7-21 kPa)
@ 6000 rpm (WOT) 12–25 psi (83-172 kPa)
Leak Test Pressure 10-12 psi (68-83 kPa)
for 5 Minutes
Gear Ratio 2.31:1
Gearcase Capacity 24 fl oz (710 mL)
Forward Gear
Pinion Gear
GEAR HOUSING Pinion Gear Locating Tool 91-12349A2
BIGFOOT Flat Number #8
(2.3:1) Disc Number #3
Backlash Indicating Tool 91-78473
Mark Number #4
Water Pressure
@ 800 rpm (Idle) 2-6 psi (14-41 kPa)
@ 6000 rpm (WOT) 12-25 psi (83-172 kPa)
for 5 Minutes
90-883065 APRIL 2001 Page 1A-7

SPECIFICATIONS
Propeller Information Charts
Mercury/Mariner 40 EFI (4-Stroke) 1.83:1 Non-Bigfoot

Wide Open Throttle RPM : 5500-6000
Recommended Transom Heights : 20”, 22.5”
Right Hand Rotation Standard
Gear Reduction : 1.83:1
Approx. Approx. Speed

No. of Gross Boat Boat Range Propeller
Diameter Pitch Blades Material Wgt. (lbs) Length (mph) Part Number
10” 17” 3 Alum Up to 800 Up to 15’ 43-50 48-73144A40
10” 16” 3 Steel 800-1000 Up to 15’ 39-46 48-91818A5
10” 16” 3 Alum 800-1000 Up to 15’ 39-46 48-73142A40
10-1/8” 15” 3 Steel 900-1200 13-15’ 36-43 48-855862A5
10-1/8” 15” 3 Alum 900-1200 13-15’ 36-43 48-73140A40
10-1/4” 14” 3 Steel 1000-1200 14-16’ 33-39 48-855860A5
10-1/4” 14” 3 Alum 1000-1200 14-16’ 33-39 48-73138A40
10-3/8” 13” 3 Steel 1100-1400 14-17’ 30-35 48-855858A5
10-3/8” 13” 3 Alum 1100-1400 14-17’ 30-35 48-73136A40
10-5/8” 12” 3 Steel 1300-1600 15-17’ 27-32 48-855856A5
10-5/8” 12” 3 Alum 1300-1600 15-17’ 27-32 48-73134A40
11-5/8” 10.5” 3 Steel 1500-1900 16-18’ 24-29 48-823478A5
10-7/8” 11” 3 Alum 1500-1900 16-18’ 24-29 48-85632A40
11-5/8” 10-1/2” 3 Alum 1600-2000 16’ + 21-25 48-827312A10
11-1/4” 10” 3 Alum 1700-2200 17’ + 19-24 48-73132A40
12-1/4” 9” 3 Steel 2000+ pontoon 17-21 48-97868A10
12-1/4” 9” 3 Alum 2000+ pontoon 17-21 48-87818A10
12-1/2” 8” 3 Alum 2500+ Pontoon/ 1-18 48-42738A10
houseboat
12-1/2” 8” Cup 3 Alum pontoon 48-42738A12
Page 1A-8 90-883065 APRIL 2001

SPECIFICATIONS


10” 19” 3 Alum Up to 800 Up to 14’ 49-58 48-73146A40
10” 17” 3 Alum Up to 900 Up to 15’ 43-50 48-73144A40
10” 16” 3 Steel 900-1300 Up to 15’ 39-46 48-91818A5
10” 16” 3 Alum 900-1300 Up to 15’ 39-46 48-73142A40
10-1/8” 15” 3 Steel 1000-1400 13-15’ 36-43 48-855862A5
10-1/8” 15” 3 Alum 1000-1400 13-15’ 36-43 48-73140A40
10-1/4” 14” 3 Steel 1100-1600 14-16’ 33-39 48-855860A5
10-1/4” 14” 3 Alum 1100-1600 14-16’ 33-39 48-73138A40
10-3/8” 13” 3 Steel 1300-1800 14-17’ 30-35 48-855858A5
10-3/8” 13” 3 Alum 1300-1800 14-17’ 30-35 48-73136A40
10-5/8” 12” 3 Steel 1400-2000 15-17’ 27-32 48-855856A5
10-5/8” 12” 3 Alum 1400-2000 15-17’ 27-32 48-73134A40
11-5/8” 11” 3 Steel 1700-2400 16-18’ 24-29 48-823478A5
10-7/8” 11” 3 Alum 1700-2400 16-18’ 24-29 48-85632A40
11-5/8” 10-1/2” 3 Alum 1900-2700 16’ + 21-25 48-827312A10
11-1/4” 10” 3 Alum 2100-3000 17’ + 19-24 48-73132A40
12-1/4” 9” 3 Steel 2500+ pontoon 17-21 48-97868A10
12-1/4” 9” 3 Alum 2500+ pontoon 17-21 48-87818A10
12-1/2” 8” 3 Alum 3000+ Pontoon/ 1-18 48-42738A10
houseboat
90-883065 APRIL 2001 Page 1A-9

SPECIFICATIONS

10” 19” 3 Alum Up to 1000 Up to 14’ 49-58 48-73146A40
10” 17” 3 Alum Up to 1200 Up to 15’ 43-50 48-73144A40
10” 16” 3 Steel 1200-1600 Up to 16’ 39-46 48-91818A5
10” 16” 3 Alum 1200-1600 Up to 16’ 39-42 48-73142A40
10-1/8” 15” 3 Steel 1300-1700 14-16’ 36-43 48-855862A5
10-1/8” 15” 3 Alum 1300-1700 14-16’ 36-43 48-73140A40
10-1/4” 14” 3 Steel 1400-2000 15-17’ 33-39 48-855860A5
10-1/4” 14” 3 Alum 1400-2000 15-17’ 33-39 48-73138A40
10-3/8” 13” 3 Steel 1600-2200 15-18’ 30-35 48-855858A5
10-3/8” 13” 3 Alum 1600-2200 15-18’ 30-35 48-73136A40
10-5/8” 12” 3 Steel 1800-2500 16-18’ 27-32 48-855856A5
10-5/8” 12” 3 Alum 1800-2500 16-18’ 27-32 48-73134A40
11-5/8” 11” 3 Steel 2300-3000 17-19’ 24-29 48-823478A5
10-7/8” 11” 3 Alum 2300-3000 17-19’ 24-29 48-85632A40
11-5/8” 10-1/2” 3 Alum 2500-3300 17’ + 21-25 48-827312A10
11-1/4” 10” 3 Alum 2800-3600 18’ + 19-24 48-73132A40
12-1/4” 9” 3 Steel 3300+ pontoon 17-21 48-97868A10
12-1/4” 9” 3 Alum 3300+ pontoon 17-21 48-87818A10
12-1/2” 8” 3 Alum 4000+ Pontoon/ 1-18 48-42738A10
houseboat
Page 1A-10 90-883065 APRIL 2001

SPECIFICATIONS
Mercury/Mariner 40 EFI (4-Stroke) 2.3:1 Bigfoot

Special soft rubber hub propellers designed to reduce clutch rattle
Wide Open Throttle rpm: 5500-6000
Recommended Transom Heights : 20”, 25”
IMPORTANT: These specially designed rubber hub propellers are rated for 60 horse-
power MAXIMUM.

13-3/4” 15” 3 Alum 1200-1500 14-16’ 27-32 48-77342A33
14” 13” 3 Alum 1500-2000 16-18’ 22-27 48-77340A33
14” 11” 3 Alum 2000-3000 pontoon 17-21 48-77338A33
14” 10” 3 Alum 2500+ pontoon/work 14-19 48-854342A33
14” 9” 3 Alum 3500+ houseboat/ 1-15 48-854340A33
work

power MAXIMUM.

13-3/4” 15” 3 Alum 1500-2000 14-16’ 25-32 48-77342A33
14” 13” 3 Alum 1800-2600 16-18’ 23-27 48-77340A33
14” 11” 3 Alum 2800-4000 pontoon 17-21 48-77338A33
14” 9” 3 Alum 5000+ houseboat/ 1-16 48-854340A33
work
90-883065 APRIL 2001 Page 1A-11

SPECIFICATIONS

power MAXIMUM.

13-3/4” 15” 3 Alum 2000-2500 16-18’ 25-32 48-77342A33
14” 13” 3 Alum 2300-3200 17-20’ 23-27 48-77340A33
14” 11” 3 Alum 3000-4300 pontoon 17-21 48-77338A33
14” 9” 3 Alum 5500+ houseboat/ 1-16 48-854340A33
work
Page 1A-12 90-883065 APRIL 2001

MAINTENANCE
Section 1B - Maintenance B
Table of Contents
Special Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1B-1 Fuel System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1B-13
Quicksilver Lubricant/Sealant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1B-2 Fuel Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1B-13
Inspection And Maintenance Schedule . . . . . . . 1B-4 Fuel Line Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1B-13
Before Each Use . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1B-4 Changing Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1B-14
After Each Use . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1B-5 Oil Changing Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1B-14
Every 100 Hours of Use or Once yearly, Changing Oil Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1B-15
Whichever occurs first . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1B-5 Checking and Adding Engine Oil . . . . . . . . 1B-15
Every 300 Hours of Use or Three Years . . . 1B-5 Changing Gear Case Lubricant . . . . . . . . . . . . 1B-16
Before Periods of Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1B-5 3-1/4 In. (83mm) Diameter Gear Case . . . 1B-16
Flushing the Cooling System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1B-6 4-1/4 In. (108mm) Diameter Gear Case . . 1B-17
Steering Link Rod Fasteners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1B-7 Storage Preparation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1B-18
Corrosion Control Anode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1B-8 Fuel System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1B-19
Spark Plug Inspection and Replacement . . . . . 1B-8 Protecting External Outboard
Battery Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1B-9 Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1B-19
Fuse Replacement – Electric Start Models . . . . 1B-9 Protecting Internal Engine Components . . 1B-19
Timing Belt Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1B-10 Gear Case . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1B-19
Lubrication Points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1B-10 Positioning Outboard for Storage . . . . . . . . 1B-19
Checking Power Trim Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1B-12 Battery Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1B-19
Special Tools
1. Crankcase Oil Pump P/N 90265A5
2. Oil Filter Wrench P/N 91-802653Q1
90-883065 APRIL 2001 Page 1B-1

MAINTENANCE
3. Flushing Attachment P/N 44357A2
Quicksilver Lubricant/Sealant
1. Quicksilver Anti-Corrosion Grease P/N 92-850735A1
2. 2-4-C Marine Lubricant with Teflon P/N 92-850736A1
3. Special Lubricant 101 P/N 92-13872A1
Page 1B-2 90-883065 APRIL 2001

MAINTENANCE
4. Quicksilver Power Trim and Steering Fluid P/N 92-90100A12
5. Quicksilver 4-Stroke Outboard Oil P/N 92-828000A12
6. Gear Lube-Premium Blend P/N 92-850737A1
7. Quicksilver 4-Cycle Marine Engine Oil P/N 92-832111A1
4-CYCLE
MARINE
ENGINE OIL
Premium Blend
SAE 25W-40
NET 32 OZ (1 QT) 946 ml
90-883065 APRIL 2001 Page 1B-3

MAINTENANCE
Inspection And Maintenance Schedule

To keep your outboard in the best operating condition, it is important that your outboard re-
ceive the periodic inspections and maintenance listed in the Inspection and Maintenance
Schedule. We urge you to keep it maintained properly to ensure the safety of you and your
passengers and retain its dependability.
WARNING
Neglected inspection and maintenance service of your outboard or attempting to
perform maintenance or repair on your outboard if you are not familiar with the cor-
rect service and safety procedures could cause personal injury, death, or product
failure.
Before Each Use
1. Check engine oil level.
2. Check that lanyard stop switch stops the engine.
3. Visually inspect the fuel system for deterioration or leaks.
4. Check outboard for tightness on transom.
5. Check steering system for binding or loose components.
6. Visually check steering link rod fasteners for proper tightness.
7. Check propeller blades for damage.
Page 1B-4 90-883065 APRIL 2001

MAINTENANCE
After Each Use

1. Flush out the outboard cooling system if operating in salt or polluted water.
2. If operating in salt water, wash off all salt deposits and flush out the exhaust outlet of the
propeller and gear case with fresh water.
Every 100 Hours of Use or Once yearly, Whichever occurs first
1. Lubricate all lubrication points. Lubricate more frequently when used in salt water.
2. Change engine oil and replace the oil filter. The oil should be changed more often when
the engine is operated under adverse conditions such as extended trolling.
3. Inspect thermostat visually for corrosion, broken spring, and to determine that the valve
is completely closed at room temperature. If questionable, inspect thermostat as out-
lined in Section 4B “Thermostat”.
4. Inspect and clean spark plugs.
5. Check engine fuel filter for contaminants.
6. Check engine timing setup.
7. Check corrosion control anodes. Check more frequently when used in salt water.
8. Drain and replace gear case lubricant.
9. Lubricate splines on the drive shaft.
10. Check and adjust valve clearance, if necessary.
11. Check power trim fluid.
12. Inspect battery.
13. Check control cable adjustments.
14. Inspect timing belt.
15. Remove engine deposits with Quicksilver Power Tune Engine Cleaner.
16. Check tightness of bolts, nuts, and other fasteners.
Every 300 Hours of Use or Three Years
1. Replace water pump impeller (more often if overheating occurs or reduced water pres-
sure is noted).
Before Periods of Storage
1. Refer to Storage procedure (this section).
90-883065 APRIL 2001 Page 1B-5

MAINTENANCE
Flushing the Cooling System

Flush the internal water passages of the outboard with fresh water after each use in salt,
polluted or muddy water. This will help prevent a buildup of deposits from clogging the inter-
nal water passages.
IMPORTANT: The engine must be run during flushing in order to open the thermostat
and circulate water through the water passages.
NOTE: You can have the outboard tilted or in the vertical operating position during flushing.
WARNING
To avoid possible injury when flushing, remove the propeller. Refer to Propeller Re-
placement.
1. Place the outboard in either the operating position (vertical) or in a tilted position.
2. Remove propeller (refer to Propeller Replacement).
3. Thread a water hose into the rear fitting. Partially open the water tap (1/2 maximum).
Do not open the water tap all the way, as this allows a high pressure flow of water.
a - Water Hose Threaded into Rear Fitting
IMPORTANT: Do not run engine above idle when flushing.

4. Shift outboard into neutral. Start the engine and flush the cooling system for at least 5
minutes. Keep engine speed at idle.
5. Stop the engine. Turn off the water and remove hose. Reinstall the propeller.
Page 1B-6 90-883065 APRIL 2001

MAINTENANCE
Steering Link Rod Fasteners

WARNING
Disengagement of a steering link rod can result in the boat taking a full, sudden,
sharp turn. This potentially violent action can cause occupants to be thrown over-
board exposing them to serious injury or death.
IMPORTANT: The steering link rod that connects the steering cable to the engine
must be fastened using special washer head bolt (“a” – Part Number 10-90041) and
self locking nylon insert locknuts (“b” & “c” – Part Number 11-34863). These locknuts
must never be replaced with common nuts (non locking) as they will work loose and
vibrate off, freeing the link rod to disengage.
c
f
d
e
a - Washer Head Bolt (10-90041)

b - Nylon Insert Locknut (11-34863)
c - Nylon Insert Locknut (11-34863)
d - Flat Washers
e - Spacer (12-71970)
f - Link Rod Mount Hole
1. Assemble steering link rod to steering cable with two flat washers (d) and nylon insert
locknut (“b” – Part Number 11-34863). Tighten locknut (b) until it seats, then back nut
off 1/4 turn.
2. Assemble steering link rod to engine with special washer head bolt (“a” – Part Number
10-90041), locknut (“c” – Part Number 11-34863) and spacer (“e” – 12-71970). First
torque bolt (a) to 20 lb. ft. (27 N·m), then torque locknut (c) to 20 lb. ft. (27 N·m).
90-883065 APRIL 2001 Page 1B-7

MAINTENANCE
Corrosion Control Anode

Your outboard has control anodes at different locations. An anode helps protect the out-
board against galvanic corrosion by sacrificing its metal to be slowly eroded instead of the
outboard metals.
Each anode requires periodic inspection especially in salt water which will accelerate the
erosion. To maintain this corrosion protection, always replace the anode before it is com-
pletely eroded. Never paint or apply a protective coating on the anode as this will reduce
effectiveness of the anode.
1. The gear case has two corrosion control anodes. Another anode is installed on the bot-
tom of the transom bracket assembly.
c
a
a - Bottom Anode
b - Trim Tab
c - Side Anodes (Big Foot Models Only)
Spark Plug Inspection and Replacement

Inspect spark plugs at the recommended intervals.
WARNING
Avoid serious injury or death from fire or explosion caused by damaged spark plug
boots. Damaged spark plug boots can emit sparks. Sparks can ignite fuel vapors
under the engine cowl. To avoid damaging spark plug boots, do not use any sharp
object or metal tool such as pliers, screwdriver, etc. to remove spark plug boots.
1. Remove the spark plug leads by twisting the rubber boots slightly and pulling off.
2. Remove the spark plugs to inspect and clean. Replace spark plug if electrode is worn
or the insulator is rough, cracked, broken, blistered or fouled.
3. Set the spark plug gap. See Specification Chart.

4. Before reinstalling spark plugs, clean away dirt on the spark plug seats. Install plugs fin-
ger tight, and tighten 1/4 turn or torque to 12.5 lb-ft (17 Nm).
Page 1B-8 90-883065 APRIL 2001

MAINTENANCE
Battery Inspection
The battery should be inspected at periodic intervals to ensure proper engine starting capa-
bility.
IMPORTANT: Read the safety and maintenance instructions which accompany your
battery.
1. Turn off the engine before servicing the battery.
2. Add water as necessary to keep the battery full.
3. Make sure the battery is secure against movement.
4. Battery cable terminals should be clean, tight, and correctly installed. Positive to positive
and negative to negative.
5. Make sure the battery is equipped with a nonconductive shield to prevent accidental
shorting of battery terminals.
Fuse Replacement – Electric Start Models

IMPORTANT: Always carry spare 20 AMP Fuses.
The electrical wiring circuits on the outboard are protected from overload by fuses in the wir-
ing. If the fuse is blown, try to locate and correct the cause of the overload. If the cause is
not found, the fuse may blow again.
1. Open the fuse holder and look at the silver colored band inside the fuse. If band is broken
replace the fuse. Replace fuse with a new fuse with the same amperage rating.
a c
1 3
15
2 4
b d
a - SmartCraft Data Bus Circuit - 15 AMP Fuse

b - Fuel Pump/Idle Air Control/Fuel Injector Circuits - 20 AMP Fuse
c - Main Relay/Accessories - 20 AMP Fuse
d - Ignition Coil Circuit - 20 AMP Fuse
e - Spare 20 AMP Fuse
90-883065 APRIL 2001 Page 1B-9

MAINTENANCE
Timing Belt Inspection

1. Inspect the timing belt and replace if any of the following conditions are found.
a. Cracks in the back of the belt or in the base of the belt teeth.
b. Excessive wear at the roots of the cogs.
c. Rubber portion swollen by oil.
d. Belt surfaces roughened.
e. Signs of wear on edges or outer surfaces of belt.
a - Timing Belt
Lubrication Points
Lubricate Point 1 with Quicksilver or Mercury Precision Lubricants Anti-Corrosion
Grease or 2-4-C Marine Lubricant with Teflon.
1. Propeller Shaft – Refer to Propeller Replacement for removal and installation of the pro-
peller. Coat the entire propeller shaft with lubricant to prevent the propeller hub from cor-
roding and seizing to the shaft.
Page 1B-10 90-883065 APRIL 2001

MAINTENANCE
Lubricate Points 2 thru 6 with Quicksilver or Mercury Precision Lubricants 2-4-C Ma-
rine Lubricant with Teflon or Special Lubricant 101.
2. Swivel Bracket – Lubricate through fitting.
3. Tilt Support Lever – Lubricate through fitting.
4. Tilt Tube – Lubricate through fitting.
2 4
5. Steering Cable Grease Fitting (If equipped) – Rotate steering wheel to fully retract the
steering cable end into the outboard tilt tube. Lubricate through fitting.
Lubricate Points b with light weight oil.
6. This grease fitting is for lubricating the threaded rod for the co-pilot.
6
a
5
b
a - Steering Cable End
b - Pivot Points
WARNING
The end of the steering cable must be fully retracted into the outboard tilt tube be-
fore adding lubricant. Adding lubricant to steering cable when fully extended could
cause steering cable to become hydraulically locked. An hydraulically locked steer-
ing cable will cause loss of steering control, possibly resulting in serious injury or
death.
90-883065 APRIL 2001 Page 1B-11

MAINTENANCE
Checking Power Trim Fluid

1. Tilt outboard to the full up position and engage the tilt support lock.
a - Tilt Support Lock

2. Remove fill cap and check fluid level. The fluid level should be even with the bottom of
the fill hole. Add Quicksilver Power Trim & Steering Fluid. If not available, use automo-
tive (ATF) automatic transmission fluid.
a - Fill Cap
Page 1B-12 90-883065 APRIL 2001

MAINTENANCE
Fuel System
WARNING
Avoid serious injury or death from gasoline fire or explosion. Carefully follow all
fuel system service instructions. Always stop the engine and DO NOT smoke or
allow open flames or sparks in the area while servicing any part of the fuel system.
Before servicing any part of the fuel system, stop engine and disconnect the battery. Drain
the fuel system completely. Use an approved container to collect and store fuel. Wipe up
any spillage immediately. Material used to contain spillage must be disposed of in an ap-
proved receptacle. Any fuel system service must be performed in a well ventilated area. In-
spect any completed service work for signs of fuel leakage.
Fuel Filter
IMPORTANT: Visually inspect for fuel leakage from the filter by squeezing the primer
bulb until firm, forcing fuel into the filter.
Check the fuel filter for water accumulation or sediment. If water is in the fuel, remove the
sight bowl and drain the water. If the filter appears to be contaminated, remove and replace.
a - Cover
b - Sight Bowl
c - Filter Element
d - O-Ring
REMOVAL
1. Read Fuel System servicing information and Warning on the previous page.
2. Pull out the filter assembly from mount. Hold onto the cover to prevent it from turning
and remove the sight bowl. Empty contents into an approved container.
3. Pull out the filter element and replace it if necessary.
INSTALLATION
4. Push the filter element into the cover.
5. Place the O-Ring seal into it’s proper position on the sight bowl and screw the sight bowl
hand tight into the cover.
6. Push filter assembly back into mount.
Fuel Line Inspection
Visually inspect the fuel line and primer bulb for cracks, swelling, leaks, hardness, or other
signs of deterioration or damage. If any of these conditions are found, the fuel line or primer
bulb must be replaced.
90-883065 APRIL 2001 Page 1B-13

MAINTENANCE
Changing Engine Oil

Oil Changing Procedure
Pump Method
1. Place the outboard in an vertical upright position.
2. Remove dipstick and slide adaptor tube/pump down dipstick tube. Pump out the engine
oil into an appropriate container.
a
90265A5
a - Crankcase Oil Pump
Drain Plug Method

1. Tilt the outboard up to the trailer position.
2. Turn the steering on the outboard so that the drain hole is facing downward. Remove
drain plug and drain engine oil into an appropriate container. Lubricate the seal on the
drain plug with oil and reinstall.
a - Drain Hole
Page 1B-14 90-883065 APRIL 2001

MAINTENANCE
Changing Oil Filter

1. Place a rag or towel below the oil filter to absorb any spilled oil.
2. Unscrew old filter by turning the filter counterclockwise.
3. Clean the mounting base. Apply film of clean oil to filter gasket. Do not use grease.
Screw new filter on until gasket contacts base, then tighten 3/4 to 1 turn.
91-802653Q1
a - Oil Filter
Checking and Adding Engine Oil

IMPORTANT: Do not overfill. Be sure that the outboard is upright (not tilted) when
checking oil.
1. Remove the oil fill cap and add oil to to proper operating level.
2. Idle engine for five minutes and check for leaks. Stop engine and check oil level on dip-
stick. Oil must be between full mark and add mark. Add oil if necessary.
a
b
c
a - Dipstick
b - Oil Fill Cap
c - Full Mark
d - Add Mark
Engine Oil Capacity
3 U.S. Quarts or (3.0 Liters)
90-883065 APRIL 2001 Page 1B-15

MAINTENANCE
Changing Gear Case Lubricant

3-1/4 In. (83mm) Diameter Gear Case
When adding or changing gear case lubricant, visually check for the presence of water in
the lubricant. If water is present, it may have settled to the bottom and will drain out prior
to the lubricant, or it may be mixed with the lubricant, giving it a milky colored appearance.
If water is noticed, have the gear case checked by your dealer. Water in the lubricant may
result in premature bearing failure or, in freezing temperatures, will turn to ice and damage
the gear case.
Examine the drained gear case lubricant for metal particles. A small amount of fine metal
particles indicates normal gear wear. An excessive amount of metal filings or larger particles
(chips) may indicate abnormal gear wear and should be checked by an authorized dealer.
DRAINING GEAR CASE
1. Place outboard in a vertical operating position.
2. Place a drain pan below outboard.
3. Remove vent plugs and fill/drain plug and drain lubricant.
a - Fill/drain Plug
b - Vent Plug
CHECKING GEAR CASE LUBRICANT LEVEL AND REFILLING GEAR CASE
Gear Case Lubricant Capacity

11.5 fl oz (340 ml)
d
b

2. Remove vent plug (a).
3. Place lubricant tube (b) into the fill hole and add lubricant until it appears at the vent hole
(c).
IMPORTANT: Replace sealing washers if damaged.
4. Stop adding lubricant. Install the vent plug and sealing washer (a) before removing the
lubricant tube.
5. Remove lubricant tube and reinstall cleaned fill/drain plug and sealing washer (d).
Page 1B-16 90-883065 APRIL 2001

MAINTENANCE

When adding or changing gear case lubricant, visually check for the presence of water in
the lubricant. If water is present, it may have settled to the bottom and will drain out prior
to the lubricant, or it may be mixed with the lubricant, giving it a milky colored appearance.
If water is noticed, have the gear case checked by your dealer. Water in the lubricant may
result in premature bearing failure or, in freezing temperatures, will turn to ice and damage
the gear case.
Whenever you remove the fill/drain plug, examine the magnetic end for metal particles. A
small amount of metal filings or fine metal particles indicates normal gear wear. An exces-
sive amount of metal filings or larger particles (chips) may indicate abnormal gear wear and
should be checked by an authorized dealer.
DRAINING GEAR CASE
2. Place a drain pan below outboard.
3. Remove vent plugs and fill/drain plug and drain lubricant.
c
b
a
a - Fill/drain Plug
b - Rear Vent Plug
c - Front Vent Plug
90-883065 APRIL 2001 Page 1B-17

MAINTENANCE
CHECKING LUBRICANT LEVEL AND FILLING GEAR CASE
Gear Case Lubricant Capacity

24 fl oz (710 ml)

2. Remove the front vent plug and rear vent plug.
3. Place lubricant tube into the fill hole and add lubricant until it appears at the front vent
hole. At this time install the front vent plug and sealing washer.
4. Continue adding lubricant until it appears at the rear vent hole.
5. Stop adding lubricant. Install the rear vent plug and sealing washer before removing lu-
bricant tube.
6. Remove lubricant tube and reinstall cleaned fill/drain plug and sealing washer.
c b
a - Front Vent Plug d - Rear Vent Hole

b - Rear Vent Plug e - Fill/Drain Plug and Sealing
c - Front Vent Hole Washer
Storage Preparation
The major consideration in preparing your outboard for storage is to protect it from rust, cor-
rosion, and damage caused by freezing of trapped water.
The following storage procedures should be followed to prepare your outboard for out-of-
season storage or prolonged storage (two months or longer).
CAUTION
Never start or run your outboard (even momentarily) without water circulating
through the cooling water intake in the gear case to prevent damage to the water
pump (running dry) or overheating of the engine.
Page 1B-18 90-883065 APRIL 2001

MAINTENANCE
Fuel System
IMPORTANT: Gasoline containing alcohol (ethanol or methanol) can cause a forma-
tion of acid during storage and can damage the fuel system. If the gasoline being
used contains alcohol, it is advisable to drain as much of the remaining gasoline as
possible from the fuel tank, remote fuel line, and engine fuel system.
Fill the fuel tank and engine fuel system with treated (stabilized) fuel to help prevent forma-
tion of varnish and gum. Proceed with following instructions.
1. Portable Fuel Tank – Pour the required amount of Quicksilver Gasoline Stabilizer (follow
instructions on container) into fuel tank. Tip fuel tank back and forth to mix stabilizer with
the fuel.
2. Permanently Installed Fuel Tank – Pour the required amount of Quicksilver Gasoline
Stabilizer (follow instructions on container) into a separate container and mix with
approximately one quart (one liter) of gasoline. Pour this mixture into fuel tank.
3. Remove the fuel filter sight bowl (see “Fuel Filter” above) and empty contents in a suit-
able container. Add 3 cc (1/2 teaspoon) of gasoline stabilizer into the fuel filter sight bowl
and reinstall.
4. Place the outboard in water or connect flushing attachment for circulating cooling water.
Run the engine for 15 minutes to allow treated fuel to fill the engine fuel system.
Protecting External Outboard Components
1. Lubricate all outboard components listed in the Inspection and Maintenance Schedule.
2. Touch up any paint nicks.
3. Spray Quicksilver or Mercury Precision Lubricants Corrosion Guard on external metal
surfaces (except corrosion control anodes).
Protecting Internal Engine Components
1. Remove the spark plugs and inject a small amount of engine oil inside of each cylinder.
2. Rotate the flywheel manually several times to distribute the oil in the cylinders. Reinstall
spark plugs.
3. Change the engine oil.
Gear Case
1. Drain and refill the gear case lubricant (refer to maintenance procedure).
Positioning Outboard for Storage
Store outboard in an upright (vertical) position to allow water to drain out of outboard.
CAUTION
If outboard is stored tilted up in freezing temperature, trapped cooling water or rain
water that may have entered the propeller exhaust outlet in the gear case could
freeze and cause damage to the outboard.
Battery Storage
1. Follow the battery manufacturer’s instructions for storage and recharging.
2. Remove the battery from the boat and check water level. Recharge if necessary.
3. Store the battery in a cool, dry place.
4. Periodically check the water level and recharge the battery during storage.
90-883065 APRIL 2001 Page 1B-19

GENERAL INFORMATION
Section 1C - GENERAL INFORMATION C
Table of Contents
Serial Number Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1C-2 Power Trim System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1C-16
Conditions Affecting Performance . . . . . . . . . 1C-2 General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1C-16
Weather . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1C-2 Power Trim Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1C-16
Boat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1C-3 Trim “In” Angle Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . 1C-17
Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1C-5 Trim Tab Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1C-18
Following Complete Submersion . . . . . . . . . . 1C-6 Compression Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1C-19
Submerged While Running . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1C-6 Cylinder Leakage Testing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1C-20
Salt Water Submersion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1C-6 Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1C-20
Fresh Water Submersion . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1C-6 Water Pressure Measurement . . . . . . . . . . . . 1C-21
Model 50/60 EFI (4-Stroke) Powerhead Views Painting Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1C-22
Front View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1C-8 Cleaning & Painting Aluminum Propellers & Gear
Starboard View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1C-9 Housings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1C-22
Port View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1C-10 Decal Removal/Application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1C-23
Top View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1C-11 Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1C-23
Aft View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1C-12 Instructions for “Wet” Application . . . . . . . 1C-23
Propeller Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1C-13
Propeller Removal/Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . 1C-14
3-1/4 In. (83mm) Diameter Gear Case . . 1C-14
4-1/4 In. (108mm) Diameter Gear Case . 1C-15
90-883065 APRIL 2001 Page 1C-1

GENERAL INFORMATION
Serial Number Location

The Outboard serial number is located on the lower starboard side of the engine block. A
serial number is also located on the top side of the swivel bracket.
a
OGXXXXXX
b
19XX
XXXX c
e
XX d
a - Serial Number
b - Model Year
c - Model Description
d - Year Manufactured
e - Certified Europe Insignia
Conditions Affecting Performance

Weather
Rated hp
Horsepower Loss
Due to Atmosphere
Conditions
Summer hp
Secondary Loss Due to
Propeller Becoming To
Large for Summer
Horsepower
RPM Drop Due

to Weather
ENGINE RPM Rated RPM
It is a known fact that weather conditions exert a profound effect on power output of internal
combustion engines. Therefore, established horsepower ratings refer to the power that the
engine will produce at its rated rpm under a specific combination of weather conditions.
Corporations internationally have settled on adoption of I.S.O. (International Standards Or-
ganization) engine test standards, as set forth in I.S.O. 3046 standardizing the computation
of horsepower from data obtained on the dynamometer. All values are corrected to the pow-
er that the engine will produce at sea level, at 30% relative humidity, at a temperature of 77°
F (25° C) and a barometric pressure of 29.61 inches of mercury.
Page 1C-2 90-883065 APRIL 2001

GENERAL INFORMATION
Summer conditions of high temperature, low barometric pressure and high humidity all com-
bine to reduce the engine power. This, in turn, is reflected in decreased boat speeds--as
much as 2 or 3 miles-per-hour (3 or 5 Km per-hour) in some cases. (Refer to previous chart.)
Nothing will regain this speed for the boater, but the coming of cool, dry weather.
In pointing out the practical consequences of weather effects, an engine--running on a hot,
humid summer day--may encounter a loss of as much as 14% of the horsepower it would
produce on a dry, brisk spring or fall day. The horsepower that any internal combustion en-
gine produces, depends upon the density of the air that it consumes, and in turn, this density
is dependent upon the temperature of the air, its barometric pressure, and water vapor (or
humidity) content.
Accompanying this weather-inspired loss of power is a second but more subtle loss. At rig-
ging time in early spring, the engine was equipped with a propeller that allowed the engine
to turn within its recommended rpm range at full throttle. With the coming of the summer
weather and the consequent drop in available horsepower, this propeller will, in effect, be-
come too large. Consequently, the engine operates at less than its recommended rpm.
Due to the horsepower/rpm characteristics of an engine, this will result in further loss of
horsepower at the propeller with another decrease in boat speed. This secondary loss, how-
ever, can be regained by switching to a smaller pitch propeller that allows the engine to again
run at recommended rpm.
For boaters to realize optimum engine performance under changing weather conditions, it
is essential that the engine have the proper propeller, to allow it to operate at or near the
top end of the recommended maximum rpm range at wide-open-throttle with a normal boat
load.
Not only does this allow the engine to develop full power, but equally important, is the fact
that the engine also will be operating in an rpm range that discourages damaging detona-
tion. This, of course, enhances overall reliability and durability of the engine.
Boat
WEIGHT DISTRIBUTION
1. Proper positioning of the weight inside the boat (persons and gear) has a significant ef-
fect on the boat’s performance, for example:
a. Shifting weight to the rear (stern).
(1.) Generally increases top speed.
(2.) If in excess, can cause the boat to porpoise.
(3.) Can make the bow bounce excessively in choppy water.
(4.) Will increase the danger of the following - wave splashing into the boat when
coming off plane.
b. Shifting weight to the front (bow).
c. Adjusting tilt pin to achieve best performance and handling.
(1.) Improves ease of planing off.
(2.) Generally improves rough water ride.
(3.) If excessive, can make the boat veer left and right (bow steer).
BOTTOM
For maximum speed, a boat bottom should be nearly a flat plane where it contacts the water
and particularly straight and smooth in fore-and-aft direction.
90-883065 APRIL 2001 Page 1C-3

GENERAL INFORMATION
1. Hook: Exists when bottom is concave in fore-and-aft direction when viewed from the
side. When boat is planing, “hook” causes more lift on bottom near transom and allows
bow to drop, thus greatly increasing wetted surface and reducing boat speed. “Hook”
frequently is caused by supporting boat too far ahead of transom while hauling on a
trailer or during storage.
2. Rocker: The reverse of hook and much less common. “Rocker” exists if bottom is con-
vex in fore-and-aft direction when viewed from the side, and boat has strong tendency
to porpoise.
3. Surface Roughness: Moss, barnacles, etc., on boat or corrosion of outboard’s gear
housing increase skin friction and cause speed loss. Clean surfaces when necessary.
WATER ABSORPTION
It is imperative that all through hull fasteners be coated with a quality marine sealer at time
of installation. Water intrusion into the transom core and/or inner hull will result in additional
boat weight (reduced boat performance), hull decay and eventual structural failure.
CAVITATION
Cavitation is caused by water vapor bubbles forming either from a sharp edge or angle on
the gear case, from an irregularity in the propeller blade itself or from improper engine instal-
lation (too high). These vapor bubbles flow back and collapse when striking the surface of
the propeller blade resulting in the erosion of the propeller blade surface. If allowed to contin-
ue, eventual blade failure (breakage) will occur.
Page 1C-4 90-883065 APRIL 2001

GENERAL INFORMATION
Engine
DETONATION
Detonation in a 4-cycle engine resembles the “pinging” heard in an automobile engine. It
can be otherwise described as a tin-like “rattling” or “plinking” sound.
Detonation is an explosion of an unburned portion of the fuel/air charge after the spark plug
has fired. Detonation creates severe shock waves in the engine, and these shock waves
often find or create a weakness: The dome of a piston, cylinder head/gasket, piston rings
or piston ring lands, piston pin and bearings.
A few of the most common causes of detonation in a marine 4-cycle application are as
follows:
• Over-advanced ignition timing.
• Use of low octane gasoline.
• Propeller pitch too high (engine rpm below recommended maximum range).
• Lean fuel mixture at or near wide-open-throttle.
• Spark plugs (heat range too hot - incorrect reach - cross-firing).
• Inadequate engine cooling (deteriorated cooling system).
• Combustion chamber/piston deposits (result in higher compression ratio).
Detonation usually can be prevented if:
1. The engine is correctly set up.
2. Diligent maintenance is applied to combat the detonation causes.
51115
Damaged Piston Resulting from Detonation
90-883065 APRIL 2001 Page 1C-5

GENERAL INFORMATION
Following Complete Submersion

Submerged While Running (Special Instructions)
When an engine is submerged while running, the possibility of internal engine damage is
greatly increased. If, after engine is recovered and with spark plugs removed, engine fails
to turn over freely when turning flywheel, the possibility of internal damage (bent connecting
rod and/or bent crankshaft) exists. If this is the case, the powerhead must be disassembled.
Salt Water Submersion (Special Instructions)
Due to the corrosive effect of salt water on internal engine components, complete disassem-
bly is necessary before any attempt is made to start the engine.
Fresh Water Submersion (Special Instructions)
1. Recover engine as quickly as possible.
2. Remove cowling.
3. Flush exterior of outboard with fresh water to remove mud, weeds, etc. DO NOT attempt
to start engine if sand has entered powerhead, as powerhead will be severely damaged.
Disassemble powerhead if necessary to clean components.
4. Remove spark plugs and get as much water as possible out of powerhead. Most water
can be eliminated by placing engine in a horizontal position (with spark plug holes down)
and rotating flywheel.
5. Drain water from fuel system as follows:
a. Disconnect remote fuel hose from engine.
b. Loosen drain screw of vapor separator and drain fuel/water into a suitable container.
Tighten drain screw after draining.
WARNING
Always release the fuel pressure in the high-pressure fuel line before servicing the
line or the vapor separator. If the fuel pressure is not released, pressurized fuel may
spray out.
c. Release fuel pressure. Refer to Releasing Fuel Pressure in the High Pressure
Fuel Line, Section 3C. Remove high-pressure fuel line from bottom of vapor separa-
tor fuel cooler and drain fuel/water into suitable container. Replace in-line fuel filter
of high-pressure fuel line and reconnect fuel line to connection on fuel cooler.
d. Remove fuel distribution manifold and empty contents into suitable container. In-
spect and clean fuel injectors. Reinstall fuel injectors/fuel distribution manifold.
e. Empty contents of water separating fuel filter into suitable container.
6. Change engine oil and filter as outlined in Section 1B “Changing Engine Oil”. Run
outboard for short time and check for presence of water in oil. If water present (milky
appearance) drain and refill as previously mentioned.
7. Pour alcohol into engine through throttle body (alcohol will absorb water). Again rotate
flywheel.
8. Turn engine over and pour alcohol into spark plug openings and rotate flywheel.
9. Turn engine over (place spark plug openings down) and pour engine oil into intake man-
ifold plug holes (plugs removed) while rotating flywheel to distribute oil throughout
crankcase.
Page 1C-6 90-883065 APRIL 2001

GENERAL INFORMATION
10. Again turn engine over and pour approximately one teaspoon of engine oil into each
spark plug opening. Again rotate flywheel to distribute oil in cylinders.
11. Remove and clean intake manifold assembly and fuel pump assembly.
12. Dry all wiring and electrical components using compressed air.
13. Disassemble the engine starter motor and dry the brush contacts, armature and other
corrodible parts.
14. Reinstall spark plugs, intake manifold and fuel pump.
15. Attempt to start engine, using a fresh fuel source. If engine starts, it should be run for
at least one hour to eliminate any water in engine.
16. If engine fails to start, determine cause (fuel, electrical or mechanical). Engine should
be run within 2 hours after recovery of outboard from water, or serious internal damage
may occur. If unable to start engine in this period, disassemble engine and clean all
parts. Apply oil as soon as possible.
90-883065 APRIL 2001 Page 1C-7

GENERAL INFORMATION
Model 50/60 EFI (4-Stroke) Powerhead Front View
b
a
m c
f e
g
i
h 58811
a - Remote Control and Engine Harness Connection

b - DDT Test Port
c - Fuses – 3-20 Amp. , 1-15 Amp.
d - Positive 12 Volt Battery Connection
e - Sound Attenuator
f - Throttle Body
g - Fuel Connection
h - Throttle and Shift Cables
i - Remote Control Harness
j - Throttle Air By-Pass Hose
k - Intake Manifold
l - ECM
m - 10 Pin SmartCraft Connection
Page 1C-8 90-883065 APRIL 2001

GENERAL INFORMATION
Model 50/60 EFI (4-Stroke) Powerhead Starboard View

b c d
a e
g
j
h
q
i
p
m l 58810
n
a - High Pressure Fuel Line from VST
b - Lifting Eye
c - Fuel Distribution Manifold
d - Engine Harness Connection to Remote Control Harness
e - 10 Pin SmartCraft Connection
f - Engine Harness Connections to ECM
g - Intake Manifold
h - Throttle Air By-Pass Hose
i - Idle Air Control (IAC)
j - Fuel Injectors
k - Shift Arm
l - Shift Linkage
m - Throttle Linkage
n - Tell-Tale
o - Throttle Lever
p - Throttle Cam
q - Fuel Filter
90-883065 APRIL 2001 Page 1C-9

GENERAL INFORMATION
Model 50/60 EFI (4-Stroke) Powerhead Port View
e
b
a
c f
g
h
m
n h
l
i
j
k
58812
a - Starter Motor i - Oil Dip Stick

b - Negative Battery Connection j - Engine Coolant Temperature
c - Access Port, Water Pressure/ (ECT) Sender
Temperature Sender Accessory k - Oil Pressure Port
d - Oil Pressure Switch l - Oil Filter
e - Crank Position Sensor (CPS) m - Vapor Separator Tank (VST)
f - Thermostat Housing n - Fuel Cooler
g - Voltage Regulator o - Schrader Test Valve
h - Ignition Coils
Page 1C-10 90-883065 APRIL 2001

GENERAL INFORMATION
Model 50/60 EFI (4-Stroke) Powerhead Top View
g
f
58815
a - Cam Shaft Timing Gear
b - Timing Belt
c - Crank Position Sensor
d - Flywheel
e - Starter Motor
f - Remote Control and Engine Harness Connection
g - 10 Pin SmartCraft Connection
90-883065 APRIL 2001 Page 1C-11

GENERAL INFORMATION
Model 50/60 EFI (4-Stroke) Powerhead Aft View

a
d
h
58814
a - Lifting Eye
b - Valve Cover
c - Crankcase Breather Hose
d - Oil Fill Plug
e - Bottom Cowl Latch
f - Fuel Pump (Water Cooled)
g - Main Power Relay
h - Trim Down Relay
i - Trim Up Relay
Page 1C-12 90-883065 APRIL 2001

GENERAL INFORMATION
Propeller Selection
For in-depth information on marine propellers and boat performance - written by marine en-
gineers - see your Authorized Dealer for the illustrated “What You Should Know About
Quicksilver Propellers...and Boat Performance Information” (Part No. 90-86144).
For best all around performance from your outboard/boat combination, select a propeller
that allows the engine to operate in the upper half of the recommended full throttle rpm range
with the boat normally loaded (refer to Specifications). This rpm range allows for better ac-
celeration while maintaining maximum boat speed.
If changing conditions cause the rpm to drop below the recommended range (such as warm-
er, more humid weather, operation at higher elevations, increased boat load or a dirty boat
bottom/gear case) a propeller change or cleaning may be required to maintain performance
and ensure the outboard’s durability.
Check full-throttle rpm using an accurate tachometer with the engine trimmed out to a bal-
anced-steering condition (steering effort equal in both directions) without causing the pro-
peller to “break loose”.
Refer to “Quicksilver Accessory Guide” for a complete list of available propellers.
1. Select a propeller that will allow the engine to operate at or near the top of the recom-
mended full throttle rpm range (listed in “Specifications,” preceding) with a normal load.
Maximum engine speed (rpm) for propeller selection exists when boat speed is maxi-
mum and trim is minimum for that speed. (High rpm, caused by an excessive trim angle,
should not be used in determining correct propeller.) Normally, there is a 150-350 rpm
change between propeller pitches.
2. If full throttle operation is below the recommended range, the propeller MUST BE
changed to one with a lower pitch to prevent loss of performance and possible engine
damage.
3. After initial propeller installation, the following common conditions may require that the
propeller be changed to a lower pitch:
a. Warmer weather and great humidity will cause an rpm loss.
b. Operating in a higher elevation causes an rpm loss.
c. Operating with a damaged propeller or a dirty boat bottom or gear housing will cause
an rpm loss.
d. Operation with an increased load (additional passengers, equipment, pulling skiers,
etc.).
90-883065 APRIL 2001 Page 1C-13

GENERAL INFORMATION
Propeller Removal/Installation
WARNING
If the propeller shaft is rotated while the engine is in gear, there is the possibility that
the engine will crank over and start. To prevent this type of accidental engine start-
ing and possible serious injury caused from being struck by a rotating propeller,
always shift outboard to neutral position and remove spark plug leads when you
are servicing the propeller.
1. Shift outboard to neutral (N) position.
2. Remove the spark plug leads to prevent engine from starting.
a
3. Straighten the bent tabs (a) on the propeller nut retainer.
4. Place a block of wood between gear case and propeller to hold propeller and remove
propeller nut. Pull propeller straight off shaft.
5. Coat the propeller shaft with Quicksilver or Mercury Precision Lubricants Anti-Corrosion
IMPORTANT: To prevent the propeller hub from corroding and seizing to the propeller
shaft, especially in salt water, always apply a coat of the recommended lubricant to
the entire propeller shaft at the recommended maintenance intervals and also each
time the propeller is removed.
c e d
d f
a a
b c b
Flo-Torque I Drive Hub Propellers Flo-Torque II Drive Hub Propellers
6. Flo-Torque I Drive Hub Propellers – Install forward thrust hub (a), propeller (b), propeller
nut retainer (c) and propeller nut (d) onto the shaft.
7. Flo-Torque II Drive Hub Propellers – Install forward thrust hub (a), propeller (b), replace-
able drive sleeve (c), rear thrust hub (d), propeller nut retainer (e) and propeller nut (f)
onto the shaft.
8. Place propeller nut retainer over pins. Place a block of wood between gear case and
propeller and tighten propeller nut to 55 lb. ft. (75 N·m), aligning flat sides of the propeller
nut with tabs on the propeller nut retainer.
9. Secure propeller nut by bending tabs up and against the flats on the propeller nut.
10. Reinstall spark plug leads.
Page 1C-14 90-883065 APRIL 2001

GENERAL INFORMATION

WARNING
If the propeller shaft is rotated while the engine is in gear, there is the possibility that
the engine will crank over and start. To prevent this type of accidental engine start-
ing and possible serious injury caused from being struck by a rotating propeller,
always shift outboard to neutral position and remove spark plug leads when you
are servicing the propeller.
1. Shift outboard to neutral (N) position.
2. Remove the spark plug leads to prevent engine from starting.
3. Straighten the bent tabs (a) on the propeller nut retainer.

4. Place a block of wood between gear case and propeller to hold propeller and remove
propeller nut. Pull propeller straight off shaft.
5. Coat the propeller shaft with Quicksilver or Mercury Precision Lubricants Anti-Corrosion
IMPORTANT: To prevent the propeller hub from corroding and seizing to the propeller
shaft, especially in salt water, always apply a coat of the recommended lubricant to
the entire propeller shaft at the recommended maintenance intervals, and also each
time the propeller is removed.
d e c
e
f
a
f c b d a
b
Flo-Torque I Drive Hub Propellers Flo-Torque II Drive Hub Propellers
6. Flo-Torq I Drive Hub Propellers – Install thrust washer (a), propeller (b), continuity wash-
er (c), thrust hub (d), propeller nut retainer (e), and propeller nut (f) onto the shaft.
7. Flo-Torq II Drive Hub Propellers – Install forward thrust hub (a), replaceable drive sleeve
(b), propeller (c), thrust hub (d), propeller nut retainer (e) and propeller nut (f) onto the
shaft.
8. Place a block of wood between gear case and propeller and torque propeller nut to 55
lb. ft. (75 N·m).
9. Secure propeller nut by bending three of the tabs into the thrust hub grooves.
10. Reinstall spark plug leads.
90-883065 APRIL 2001 Page 1C-15

GENERAL INFORMATION
Power Trim System

General Information
The power trim system is filled at the manufacturer and is ready for use.
Trim outboard through entire trim and tilt range several times to remove any air from the sys-
tem.
The trim system is pressurized and is not externally vented.
Power Trim Operation
With most boats, operating around the middle of the “trim” range will give satisfactory re-
sults. However, to take full advantage of the trimming capability there may be times when
you choose to trim your outboard all the way in or out. Along with an improvement in some
performance aspects comes a greater responsibility for the operator, and this is being aware
of some potential control hazards. The most significant control hazard is a pull or “torque”
that can be felt on the steering wheel or tiller handle. This steering torque results from the
outboard being trimmed so that the propeller shaft is not parallel to the water surface.
WARNING
Avoid possible serious injury or death. When the outboard is trimmed in or out be-
yond a neutral steering condition, a pull on the steering wheel or tiller handle in ei-
ther direction may result. Failure to keep a continuous firm grip on the steering
wheel or tiller handle when this condition exists can result in loss of boat control
as the outboard can turn freely. The boat can now “spin out” or go into a very tight
maximum turn which, if unexpected, can result in occupants being thrown within
the boat or out of the boat.
Consider the following lists carefully:
TRIMMING IN OR DOWN CAN:
1. Lower the bow.
2. Result in quicker planing off, especially with a heavy load or a stern heavy boat.
3. Generally improve the ride in choppy water.
4. Increase steering torque or pull to the right (with the normal right hand rotation propel-
ler).
5. In excess, lower the bow of some boats to a point where they begin to plow with their
bow in the water while on plane. This can result in an unexpected turn in either direction
called “bow steering” or “over steering” if any turn is attempted or if a significant wave
is encountered.
WARNING
Avoid possible serious injury or death. Adjust outboard to an intermediate trim po-
sition as soon as boat is on plane to avoid possible ejection due to boat spin-out.
Do not attempt to turn boat when on plane if outboard is trimmed extremely in or
down and there is a pull on the steering wheel or tiller handle.
TRIMMING OUT OR UP CAN:
1. Lift the bow higher out of the water.
2. Generally increase top speed.
3. Increase clearance over submerged objects or a shallow bottom.
Page 1C-16 90-883065 APRIL 2001

GENERAL INFORMATION
4. Increase steering torque or pull to the left at a normal installation height (with the normal
right hand rotation propeller).
5. In excess, cause boat “porpoising” (bouncing) or propeller ventilation.
6. Cause engine overheating if any water intake holes are above the water line.
Trim “In” Angle Adjustment
Some outboard boats, particularly some bass boats, are built with a greater than normal
transom angle which will allow the outboard to be trimmed further “in” or “under”. This great-
er trim “under” capability is desirable to improve acceleration, reduce the angle and time
spent in a bow high boat, altitude during planing off, and in some cases, may be necessary
to plane off a boat with aft live wells, given the variety of available propellers and height
range of engine installations.
However, once on plane, the engine should be trimmed to a more intermediate position to
a avoid a bow-down planing condition called “plowing”. Plowing can cause “bow steering”
or “over steering” and inefficiently consumes horsepower. In this condition, if attempting a
turn or encountering a diagonal, moderate wake, a more abrupt turn than intended may re-
sult.
In rare circumstances, the owner may decide to limit the trim in. This can be accomplished
by repositioning the tilt stop pins into whatever adjustment holes in the transom brackets
is desired.
WARNING
Avoid possible serious injury or death. Adjust outboard to an intermediate trim po-
sition as soon as boat is on plane to avoid possible ejection due to boat spin-out.
Do not attempt to turn boat when on plane if outboard is trimmed extremely in or
down and there is a pull on the steering wheel or tiller handle.
If an adjustment is required, purchase a stainless steel tilt pin (P/N 17-49930A1) and insert
it through whatever pin hole is desired. The non-stainless steel shipping bolt should not be
used in this application other than on a temporary basis.
a - Optional Tilt Pin
90-883065 APRIL 2001 Page 1C-17

GENERAL INFORMATION
Trim Tab Adjustment

Propeller steering torque will cause your boat to pull in one direction. This steering torque
is a normal thing that results from your outboard not being trimmed so the propeller shaft
is parallel to the water surface. The trim tab can help to compensate for this steering torque
in many cases and can be adjusted within limits to reduce any unequal steering effort.
NOTE: Trim tab adjustment will have little effect reducing steering torque if the outboard is
installed with the anti-ventilation plate approximately 2 inches (50mm) or more above the
boat bottom.
Operate your boat at normal cruising speed, trimmed to desired position. Turn your boat left
and right and note the direction the boat turns more easily.
If adjustment is necessary, loosen trim tab bolt and make small adjustments at a time. If the
boat turns more easily to the left, move the trailing edge of trim tab to the left. If the boat turns
more easily to the right move the trailing edge of trim tab to the right. Retighten bolt and ret-
est.
a - Trim Tab
Page 1C-18 90-883065 APRIL 2001

GENERAL INFORMATION
Compression Check
CAUTION
Compression/Cylinder Leakage Tests Must be performed with the ignition/injection
system disabled. To do this, the lanyard stop switch MUST BE placed to the “OFF”
position.
IMPORTANT: Compression check should be done with throttle in WOT position.
1. Check valve clearance (refer to “Valve Clearance Adjustment” in section 4A), adjust
if out of specification.
2. Warm up the engine. Remove all spark plugs.
3. Lubricate threads in cylinder head and on compression gauge. Install compression
gauge in spark plug hole.
110
P/N EEPV303A / MT26-18
58822 110 4-Stroke Outboard Oil (92-828000A12)
a - Compression Gauge (EEPV303A - Snap-on)

b - Adaptor (MT26-18 - Snap-on)
4. Hold throttle plate at W.O.T. and crank the engine over until the compression reading
peaks on the gauge. Record the reading.
5. Check and record compression of each cylinder. The highest and lowest reading
recorded should not differ by more than 15% (see example chart below). A reading
below 120 psi might indicate a total engine wear problem.
Compression Pressure (Minimum)

135 psi (950 Kpa, 9.5 kg/cm2)
Example of compression test differences:
Maximum (psi) Minimum (psi)

180 162
150 127.5
6. Remove compression gauge. Install spark plugs.

NOTE: Compression check is important because an engine with low or uneven compres-
sion cannot be tuned successfully to give peak performance. It is essential, therefore, that
improper compression be corrected before proceeding with an engine tuneup.
90-883065 APRIL 2001 Page 1C-19

GENERAL INFORMATION
Cylinder Leakage Testing

CAUTION
Compression/Cylinder Leakage Tests Must be performed with the ignition/injection
system disabled. To do this, the lanyard stop switch MUST BE placed to the “OFF”
position.
NOTE: Cylinder leakage testing*, along with compression testing, can help the mechanic
pinpoint the source of a mechanical failure by gauging the amount of leakage in an engine
cylinder. Refer to the manufactures tester instructions for proper testing procedures.
* Courtesy of Snap-On-Tools
Cylinder Leakage Tester (Snap-On-Tools EEPV309A)

NOTE: Spark plug hole is a 12 mm diameter. Use Snap-On Tool MT26-18 adapter with valve
core removed.
Analysis
Due to standard engine tolerances and engine wear, no cylinder will maintain a 0% of leak-
age. It is important only that cylinders have somewhat consistent reading between them.
Differences of 15 to 30% indicate excessive leakage. Larger engines tend to have a larger
percentage of cylinder leakage than smaller engines.
If excessive leakage is present, first check that the piston is at top dead center of it’s com-
pression stroke. Leakage will naturally occur if the exhaust or intake valve is open.
To determine the cause of high percentage leaks, you must locate where the air is escaping
from. Listen for air escaping through the intake manifold, adjacent spark plug holes, exhaust
pipe, crankcase fill plug. Use the following table to aid in locating the source of cylinder
leakage:
Indicates Possible
Air Escaping From:
Defective:
Intake Manifold Intake Valve
Exhaust System Exhaust Valve
Crankcase Fill Plug Piston or Rings
Cylinder Head Gasket
Page 1C-20 90-883065 APRIL 2001

GENERAL INFORMATION
Water Pressure Measurement

1. Warm up engine.
2. Remove plug.
3. Attach hose fitting and water pressure gauge to cylinder block.
NOTE: Water pressure measurements should be done on a warm engine with thermostat
operating 140°F (60°C).
Water Pump Pressure

24
22-89772 22
20
Pump Pressure (psi)

91-79250A2 18
16
14
12
10
8
6
4
2
a 0
0 1 2 3 4 5 6
rpm x 1000
a - Plug
90-883065 APRIL 2001 Page 1C-21

GENERAL INFORMATION
Painting Procedures
Cleaning & Painting Aluminum Propellers & Gear Housings
WARNING
Avoid serious injury from flying debris. Avoid serious injury from airborne par-
ticles. Use eye and breathing protection with proper ventilation.
PROPELLERS
1. Sand the entire area to be painted with 3M 120 Regalite Polycut or coarse Scotch-Brite,
disc or belts.
2. Feather edges of all broken paint edges. Try not to sand through the primer.
3. Clean the surface to be painted using PPG Industries DX330 Wax and Grease Remover
or equivalent (Xylene or M.E.K.).
4. If bare metal has been exposed, use Quicksilver’s Light Gray Primer.
5. Allow a minimum of 1 hour dry time and no more than 1 week before applying the finish
coat.
6. Apply the finish coat using Quicksilver’s EDP Propeller Black.
GEAR HOUSINGS
The following procedures should be used in refinishing gear housings. This procedure will
provide the most durable paint system available in the field. The materials recommended
are of high quality and approximate marine requirements. The following procedure will pro-
vide a repaint job that compares with a properly applied factory paint finish. It is recom-
mended that the listed materials be purchased from a local Ditzler Automotive Finish Supply
Outlet. The minimum package quantity of each material shown following is sufficient to refin-
ish several gear housings.
Procedure:
1. Wash gear housing with a muriatic acid base cleaner to remove any type of marine
growth, and rinse with water, if necessary.
2. Wash gear housing with soap and water, then rinse.
3. Sand blistered area with 3M 180 grit sandpaper or P180 Gold Film Disc to remove paint
blisters only. Feather edge all broken paint edges.
4. Clean gear housing thoroughly with (DX-330) wax and grease remover.
5. Spot repair surfaces where bare metal is exposed with (DX-503) alodine treatment.
IMPORTANT: Do not use any type of aerosol spray paints as the paint will not properly
adhere to the surface nor will the coating be sufficiently thick to resist future paint
blistering.
6. Mix epoxy chromate primer (DP-40) with equal part catalyst (DP-401) per manufactur-
ers instructions, allowing proper induction period for permeation of the epoxy primer and
catalyst.
7. Allow a minimum of one hour drying time and no more than one week before top coating
assemblies.
8. Use Ditzler Urethane DU9000 for Mercury Black, DU34334 for Mariner Grey, and
DU35466 for Force Charcoal, and DU33414M for Sea Ray White. Catalyze all four col-
ors with Ditzler DU5 catalyst mixed 1:1 ratio. Reduce with solvents per Ditzler label.
Page 1C-22 90-883065 APRIL 2001

GENERAL INFORMATION
CAUTION
Be sure to comply with instructions on the label for ventilation and respirators. Us-
ing a spray gun, apply one half to one mil even film thickness. Let dry, flash off for
five minutes and apply another even coat of one half to one mil film thickness. This
urethane paint will dry to the touch in a matter of hours, but will remain sensitive
to scratches and abrasions for a few days.
9. The type of spray gun used will determine the proper reduction ratio of the paint.
IMPORTANT: Do not paint sacrificial zinc trim tab or zinc anode.
10. Cut out a cardboard “plug” for trim tab pocket to keep paint off of mating surface to main-
tain good continuity circuitry between trim tab and gear housing.
Decal Removal/Application
Removal
1. Mark decal location before removal to assure proper alignment of new decal.
2. Carefully soften decal and decal adhesive with a heat gun or heat blower while removing
old decal.
3. Clean decal contact area with a 1:1 mixture of isopropyl alcohol and water.
4. Thoroughly dry decal contact area and check for a completely cleaned surface.
Instructions for “Wet” Application
NOTE: The following decal installation instructions are provided for a “Wet” installation. All
decals should be applied wet.
TOOLS REQUIRED
1. Plastic Squeegee*
2. Stick Pin
3. Dish Washing Liquid/Detergent without ammonia** “Joy” and “Drift” are known to be
compatible for this process.
** Automotive Body Filler Squeegee
** Do not use a soap that contains petroleum based
solvents.
SERVICE TIP: Placement of decals using the “Wet” application will allow time to posi-
tion decal. Read entire installation instructions on this technique before proceeding.
TEMPERATURE
IMPORTANT: Installation of vinyl decals should not be attempted while in direct sun-
light. Air and surface temperature should be between 60°F (15°C) and 100°F (38°C)
for best application.
SURFACE PREPARATION
IMPORTANT: Do not use a soap or any petroleum based solvents to clean application
surface.
Clean entire application surface with mild dish washing liquid and water. Rinse surface thor-
oughly with clean water.
90-883065 APRIL 2001 Page 1C-23

GENERAL INFORMATION
DECAL APPLICATION
1. Mix 1/2 ounce (16 ml) of dish washing liquid in one gallon (4 l) of cool water to use as
wetting solution.
NOTE: Leave protective masking, if present, on the face of decal until final steps of decal
installation. This will ensure that the vinyl decal keeps it’s shape during installation.
2. Place the decal face down on a clean work surface and remove the paper backing from
“adhesive side” of decal.
3. Using a spray bottle, flood the entire “adhesive side” of the decal with the pre-mixed wet-
ting solution.
4. Flood area where the decal will be positioned with wetting solution.
5. Position pre-wetted decal on wetted surface and slide into position.
6. Starting at the center of the decal, “lightly” squeegee out the air bubbles and wetting
solution with overlapping strokes to the outer edge of the decal. Continue going over the
decal surface until all wrinkles are gone and adhesive bonds to the cowl surface.
7. Wipe decal surface with soft paper towel or cloth.
8. Wait 10 - 15 minutes.
9. Starting at one corner, “carefully and slowly” pull the masking off the decal surface at
a 180° angle.
NOTE: To remove any remaining bubbles, pierce the decal at one end of the bubble with
stick pin and press out the entrapped air or wetting solution with your thumb (moving toward
the puncture).
Page 1C-24 90-883065 APRIL 2001

OUTBOARD MOTOR INSTALLATION
Section 1D - Outboard Motor Installation D
Table of Contents
Electric Fuel Pump . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1D-1 Wiring Harness . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1D-7
Boat Horsepower Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1D-1 Battery Cable Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1D-8
Start in Gear Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1D-2 Shift and Throttle Cable Installation . . . . . . . . 1D-9
Selecting Accessories For The Outboard . . . 1D-2 Trim-In Stop Adjustment
Installation Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1D-2 Power Trim Models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1D-13
Lifting Outboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1D-3 Trim Tab Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1D-13
Steering Cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1D-3 Wiring for SmartCraft Gauges – EFI Models 1D-14
Steering Cable Seal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1D-4 Typical SmartCraft Installation Configurations
Steering Link Rod . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1D-4 EFI Models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1D-15
Installing Outboard Instrument/Lanyard Stop Switch Wiring Diagram
Thumb Screw Models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1D-5 (Dual Outboard) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1D-16
Non Thumb Screw Models . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1D-6
90-883065 APRIL 2001 Page 1D-1

Electric Fuel Pump

If an electric fuel pump is used, the fuel pressure must not exceed 4 psi at the engine. If nec-
essary, install a pressure regulator to regulate the pressure.
Boat Horsepower Capacity

U.S. COAST GUARD CAPACITY
MAXIMUM HORSEPOWER XXX
MAXIMUM PERSON
CAPACITY (POUNDS) XXX
MAXIMUM WEIGHT
CAPACITY XXX
Do not overpower or overload the boat. Most boats will carry a required capacity plate indi-
cating the maximum acceptable power and load as determined by the manufacturer follow-
ing certain federal guidelines. If in doubt, contact your dealer or the boat manufacturer.
WARNING
Using an outboard that exceeds the maximum horsepower limit of a boat can:
1. Cause loss of boat control
2. Place too much weight at the transom, altering the designed flotation characteris-
tics of the boat or,
3. Cause the boat to break apart, particularly around the transom area.
Overpowering a boat can result in serious injury, death, or boat damage.
Page 1D-2 90-883065 APRIL 2001

Start in Gear Protection

The remote control connected to the outboard must be equipped with a start-in-gear protec-
tion device. This prevents the engine from starting in gear.
WARNING
Avoid serious injury or death from a sudden unexpected acceleration when starting
your engine. The design of this outboard requires that the remote control used with
it must have a built in start-in-gear protection device.
Selecting Accessories For The Outboard

Genuine Quicksilver Parts and Accessories have been specifically designed and tested for
this outboard.
Some accessories not manufactured or sold by Quicksilver are not designed to be safely
used with this outboard or outboard operating system. Acquire and read the Installation, Op-
eration, and Maintenance manuals for all selected accessories.
Installation Specifications
a b
Transom Opening “A” (Minimum)

Single Engine (Remote) 19 in. (483 mm)
Single Engine (Tiller) 30 in. (762 mm)
Dual Engines 40 in. (1016 mm)
Engine Center Line For Dual Engines “B” (Minimum)

26 in. (660mm)
90-883065 APRIL 2001 Page 1D-3

Lifting Outboard
Use lifting eye on engine.
Steering Cable
STARBOARD SIDE ROUTED CABLE
1. Lubricate the entire cable end.
95
95 2-4-C w/Teflon (92-850736A1)
2. Insert steering cable into tilt tube.
3. Torque nut to 35 lb. ft. (47.5 N·m).
Page 1D-4 90-883065 APRIL 2001

Steering Cable Seal

1. Mark tilt tube 1/4 in. (6.4 mm) from end. Install seal components.
2. Thread cap to the mark.
1/4 in. (6.4mm)
a b c d
a - 1/4 in. (6.4 mm) Mark
b - Plastic Spacer
c - O-Ring Seal
d - Cap
Steering Link Rod

1. Install steering link rod per illustration.
b
d
f
e
a
a - Special Bolt (10-90041) Torque to 20 lb. ft. (27.1 N·m)
b - Nylon Insert Locknut (11-34863) Torque to 20 lb. ft. (27.1 N·m)
c - Spacer (12-71970)
d - Flat Washer (2)
e - Nylon Insert Locknut (11-34863) Tighten Locknut Until it Seats, Then Back Nut
Off 1/4 Turn
f - Use Middle Hole – Steer Outboard to the Side to Gain Hole Access
IMPORTANT: The steering link rod that connects the steering cable to the engine
must be fastened using special bolt (“a” - Part Number 10-90041) and self locking
nuts (“b” & “e” - Part Number 11-34863). These locknuts must never be replaced with
common nuts (non locking) as they will work loose and vibrate off, freeing the link
rod to disengage.
WARNING
Disengagement of a steering link rod can result in the boat taking a full, sudden,
sharp turn. This potentially violent action can cause occupants to be thrown over-
board exposing them to serious injury or death.
90-883065 APRIL 2001 Page 1D-5

Installing Outboard – Thumb Screw Models

WARNING
Outboard must be fastened to boat transom one of two ways: 1. permanently fas-
tened to transom with thumb screws, and mounting bolts (provided), or 2. secured
to the transom using the optional outboard mounting kit (shown below). Should the
outboard strike an underwater object or be steered into a sharp turn, failure to fas-
ten outboard correctly to the boat transom with mounting bolts or optional mount-
ing kit could result in outboard ejecting suddenly off boat transom causing serious
injury, death, boat damage, or loss of outboard.
IMPORTANT: Optional outboard mounting kits shown, must be used if outboard will not be
permanently fastened to the transom with mounting bolts.
a - Outboard Mounting Kit Part No. 812432A4
1. Center outboard on the transom. Install the outboard so that the anti-ventilation plate
is in line or within 1 in. (25 mm) below the bottom of the boat.
0 - 1 in.
(0 - 25mm)
a - Anti-Ventilation Plate
2. Fasten outboard with provided mounting hardware shown.
e
d
c
a
b
a - 1/2 in. Diameter Bolts (2) d - Marine Sealer - Apply to Shanks of
b - Flat Washers Bolts, Not Threads
c - Locknuts e - Thumb Screws - Tighten Securely
Page 1D-6 90-883065 APRIL 2001

Installing Outboard – Non Thumb Screw Models

1. Attach (tape) engine mounting template to boat transom.
2. Mark and drill four 17/32 in. (13.5mm) mounting holes.
3. Install the outboard so that the anti-ventilation plate is in-line or within 1 in. (25 mm) be-
low the bottom of the boat.
0 - 1 in.
(0 - 25mm)
a - Anti-Ventilation Plate
4. Fasten outboard with provided mounting hardware shown.
d
d
c c
b b a
a
a - 1/2 in. Diameter Bolts (2)
b - Flat Washers
c - Locknuts
d - Marine Sealer - Apply to Shanks of Bolts, Not Threads
90-883065 APRIL 2001 Page 1D-7

Wiring Harness
IMPORTANT: Warning Horn Requirement – The remote control or key switch assem-
bly must be wired with a warning horn. This warning horn is used with the engine
warning system.
1. Route wiring harness into bottom cowl.
a - Wiring Harness
2. Connect wiring. Push the wiring harness connectors together inside the rubber sleeve.
Push the retainer over the exposed ends of the connectors. This will hold the connectors
together.
c b
BRN/WHT
GRN/WHT
BLU/WHT
TAN
GRN/WHT
BLU/WHT
a
a - Power Trim Connections
b - Rubber Sleeve – Place Harness Connectors Inside
c - Retainer – Push Over Connector Ends
Page 1D-8 90-883065 APRIL 2001

Battery Cable Connections
SINGLE OUTBOARD
(+)
(–) c
a - Red Sleeve (Positive)

b - Black Sleeve (Negative)
c - Starting Battery
DUAL OUTBOARDS
Connect a common ground cable (wire size same as engine battery cables) between nega-
tive (–) terminals on starting batteries.
(–)
(–)
d - Ground Cable (Same Wire Size As Engine Battery Cable) – Connect Between
Negative (–) Terminals
90-883065 APRIL 2001 Page 1D-9

Shift and Throttle Cable

Installation
Install cables into the remote control following the instructions provided with the remote con-
trol.
NOTE: Install the shift cable to the engine first. The shift cable is the first cable to move when
the remote control handle is moved out of neutral.
Shift Cable Installation
1. Position remote control into neutral.
2. Remove access cover from side of bottom cowl.
a
a - Access Cover
3. Shift outboard into neutral.
4. Measure the distance (a) between pin and center of lower hole.
b c
a - Distance Between Pin And Center of Lower Hole
b - Pin
c - Lower Hole
5. Fit shift cable through rubber grommet.
Page 1D-10 90-883065 APRIL 2001

6. Push in on the cable end until resistance is felt.
7. While pushing in on the cable end, adjust the cable barrel (b) to attain the measured dis-
tance (a) taken in Step 3.
b
a - Adjust Cable Barrel To Attain The Measured Distance Taken In Step 3
b - Cable Barrel
8. Place cable barrel into the barrel holder. Fasten cable with retainer.
b a
a - Place Barrel Into Barrel Holder

b - Retainer
9. Check shift cable adjustments as follows:

a. Shift remote control into forward. The propeller shaft should be locked in gear. If not,
adjust the barrel closer to the cable end.
b. Shift remote control into neutral. The propeller shaft should turn freely without drag.
If not, adjust the barrel away from the cable end. Repeat steps a and b.
c. Shift remote control into reverse while turning propeller. The propeller shaft should
be locked in gear. If not, adjust the barrel away from the cable end. Repeat steps a
thru c.
d. Shift remote control back to neutral. The propeller shaft should turn freely without
drag. If not, adjust the barrel closer to the cable end. Repeat steps a thru d.
90-883065 APRIL 2001 Page 1D-11

Throttle Cable Installation

1. Position remote control into neutral.
N
2. Fit throttle cable through rubber grommet.
3. Install throttle cable with retainer pin. Lock retainer pin in place.
4. Place throttle cable onto the throttle lever pin. Lock in place with retainer.
b
a - Throttle Cable
b - Retainer
Page 1D-12 90-883065 APRIL 2001

5. Adjust cable barrel until the center of the roller lines up with the alignment mark on the
cam.
a - Cable Barrel
b - Alignment Mark
c - Roller
6. Fasten control cables with the cable latch.
7. Install the access cover.
90-883065 APRIL 2001 Page 1D-13

Trim-In Stop Adjustment – Power Trim Models

If an adjustment is required, purchase a stainless steel tilt pin (P/N 17-49930A1) and insert
it through whatever pin hole is desired. The non-stainless steel shipping bolt should not be
used in this application other than on a temporary basis.
a - Tilt Pin
Trim Tab Adjustment

The trim tab can be adjusted within limits to help compensate for steering torque.
Adjust trim tab as follows:
1. If boat tends to pull to the right, move the rear edge of the trim tab to the right.
2. If boat tends to pull to the left, move the rear edge of the trim tab to the left.
NOTE: Trim tab adjustment will have little effect reducing steering torque if the anti-ventila-
tion plate is raised 2 inches (50mm) or more above the boat bottom.
Page 1D-14 90-883065 APRIL 2001

Wiring for SmartCraft Gauges – EFI Models

SmartCraft Wiring Harness Connection to the Engine
1. Cutout the harness opening in the front rubber grommet.
2. Route the SmartCraft wiring harness into the bottom cowl and connect as shown.
c
a - Front Rubber Grommet - Cutout Harness Opening

b - SmartCraft Harness
c - Connection for SmartCraft Harness
90-883065 APRIL 2001 Page 1D-15

Typical SmartCraft Installation Configurations – EFI Models

Single Engine Applications
System System
Monitor Tachometer
Wiring Harness SC1000 2RSL (20, 30 ft.)
System Link
Gauge
Connection
Engine
Dual Engine Applications

System System
Monitor Tachometer
System Link
Gauge
Connection
Engine
System Link
Gauge
Engine Connection
System System
Monitor Tachometer
Page 1D-16 90-883065 APRIL 2001

Notes:
90-883065 APRIL 2001 Page 1D-17

Instrument/Lanyard Stop Switch Wiring Diagram (Dual

Outboard)
d k d
c b
BLK = Black g l
BLU = Blue
BRN = Brown BATT GND
GRY = Gray d
GRN = Green
SENDER
ORN = Orange
PNK = Pink
PUR = Purple a e
RED = Red
TAN = Tan
WHT = White
YEL = Yellow
LIT = Light
DRK = Dark
h n
PORT INSTALLATION
52716
a - Ignition/Choke Switch f - Trim Indicator Gauge

b - Lanyard Stop Switch g - Temperature Gauge
c - Lead Not Used on Outboard Installations h - Remote Control
d - Retainer i - Synchronizer Gauge
e - Tachometer j - Synchronizer Box
Page 1D-18 90-883065 APRIL 2001
IMPORTANT: On installations where gauge options will not be used, tape back and
isolate any unused wiring harness leads.
BATT GND
i SENDER
a
e
STARBOARD INSTALLATION
52654
k - Lanyard/Diode n - Connect Wires Together with Screw and Hex

l - “Y” Harness Nut (4 Places);Apply Quicksilver Liquid Neo-
m - Power Trim Harness Connector prene to Connections and Slide Rubber Sleeve
over Each Connection.
o - Lead to Visual Warning Kit
90-883065 APRIL 2001 Page 1D-19

IGNITION
ELECTRICAL
Section 2A - Ignition
Table of Contents
2
Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2A-2 Ignition Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2A-8
A
Special Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2A-3 Ignition Diagnostic Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . 2A-8
Ignition Coil Mounting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2A-4 Testing Ignition Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2A-9
Ignition Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2A-6 Resistance Tests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2A-9
Ignition Component Description . . . . . . . . . . . 2A-6 High Tension Lead Removal/Installation . 2A-9
Ignition Coils . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2A-6 High Tension Lead Resistance . . . . . . . . . 2A-10
Ignition Test Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2A-7 Ignition Coil Removal and Installation . . . . . . 2A-11
90-883065 APRIL 2001 Page 2A-1

IGNITION
Specifications
Spark Plug:
Type Champion RA8HC
Gap 0.040 in. (1.0 mm)
Hole Size 12 mm
Ignition Timing:
@1500-1800 14° B.T.D.C
@ WOT (6000 rpm) 28° B.T.D.C
#2 and #3 6225 rpm
Cylinders 6350 rpm
Range
IMPORTANT: Use resistive spark plugs only.
Page 2A-2 90-883065 APRIL 2001

IGNITION
Special Tools
1. DMT 2000 Digital Tachometer Multi-meter P/N 91-854009A1
90-883065 APRIL 2001 Page 2A-3

IGNITION
IGNITION COIL MOUNTING
25 Liquid Neoprene (92-25711--3)

66 Loctite 242 (92-809821)
1
13
11 16 15
25
17
66
9
3 18 14 8
10
19
4
11 7
6
5
2 6 10
12
Page 2A-4 90-883065 APRIL 2001

IGNITION
IGNITION COIL MOUNTING

TORQUE
REF.
REF
NO. QTY. DESCRIPTION lb-in lb-ft Nm.
1 1 COIL PLATE
2 4 IGNITION COIL
3 4 HIGH TENSION CABLE
4 7 SPACER
5 7 NUT 30 3.4
6 3 TRIM RELAY
7 3 BRACKET
8 3 GROMMET
9 3 BUSHING
10 3 SCREW (M6 X 25) 60 6.8
11 2 J CLIP
12 1 TRIM HARNESS
13 3 BUSHING
14 3 GROMMET
15 1 CABLE
16 1 WASHER
17 1 SCREW (M6 X 10) 45 5.1
18 3 SCREW (M6 X 30) 75 8.5
19 3 WASHER
90-883065 APRIL 2001 Page 2A-5

IGNITION
Ignition Description
When the ignition key switch is turned to the “RUN” position battery voltage is applied to both
the Electronic Control Module (ECM) through the purple wire, and the main power relay
through the red/purple wire. As the ECM receives the “RUN” signal it internally completes
the ground circuit of the main relay for a period of two seconds, energizing the ignition/injec-
tion systems for start-up. As the engine is cranked with the starter motor, the ECM receives
the run signal from the Crank Position Sensor (CPS) and completes the ground circuit to
the main relay for engine operation.
With the main relay closed (completed circuit) D.C. current from the battery/charging system
is transferred through the 20 ampere main relay fuse to the positive terminal of all ignition
coil primary windings. The negative terminals of the ignition coil primaries are connected
to the engine ground through the coils internal driver, which is triggered by the ECM. With
the coil drivers closed, an electric magnetic field is allowed to build up within the ignition coil.
As the flywheel rotates, the CPS senses the location of the 54 teeth on the flywheel and sup-
plies the trigger signal information to the ECM. The ECM utilizes the CPS information and
determines when to remove the trigger signal from the coil driver of each ignition coil. The
coil driver then opens the coil primary ground circuit which allows it’s magnetic field to rapidly
collapse across the coil secondary winding which induces a high voltage charge (50,000
volts) that fires the spark plug.
Ignition Component Description
Ignition Coils (EST)
The negative terminals of the ignition coil primaries are connected to the engine ground
through the coils internal driver, which is triggered by the ECM. With the coil drivers closed,
an electric magnetic field is allowed to build up within the ignition coil.
As the flywheel rotates, the CPS senses the location of the 54 teeth on the flywheel and sup-
plies the trigger signal information to the ECM. The ECM utilizes the CPS information and
determines when to remove the trigger signal from the coil driver of each ignition coil. The
coil driver then opens the coil primary ground circuit which allows it’s magnetic field to rapidly
collapse across the coil secondary winding which induces a high voltage charge (50,000
volts) that fires the spark plug.
Page 2A-6 90-883065 APRIL 2001

IGNITION
Ignition Test Procedures

WARNING
DANGER – HIGH VOLTAGE/SHOCK HAZARD! Do not touch ignition components
and/or metal test probes while engine is running and/or being “cranked”. STAY
CLEAR OF SPARK PLUG LEADS. To assure personal safety, each individual spark
plug lead should be grounded to engine.
WARNING
When testing or servicing the ignition system, high voltage is present. DO NOT
TOUCH OR DISCONNECT any ignition parts while engine is running, while key
switch is on or while battery cables are connected.
CAUTION
Failure to comply with the following items may result in damage to the ignition sys-
tem.
1. DO NOT reverse battery cable connections. The battery negative cable is (–) ground.
2. DO NOT “spark” battery terminals with battery cable connections to check polarity.
3. DO NOT disconnect battery cables while engine is running.
4. DO NOT crank engine with Ignition Coils/Coil Mounting Plate not grounded.
CAUTION
To protect against meter and/or component damage, observe the following precau-
tions:
IMPORTANT: The metal housing of the ECM is isolation mounted and MUST NOT be
externally grounded. Should the housing become externally grounded, the engine
will not run until the ground is removed and battery cables are momentarily discon-
nected from the battery to re-set the ECM.
• ALL COMPONENTS MUST BE GROUNDED during tests. Running or “cranking” en-
gine with Ignition Coils/Coil Mounting Plate ungrounded may damage components.
90-883065 APRIL 2001 Page 2A-7

IGNITION
Ignition Troubleshooting
Refer to Section 3B “Electronic Fuel Injection” - “Troubleshooting and Diagnostics”
for complete system troubleshooting/diagnostics procedures.
Ignition Diagnostic Procedures

TROUBLESHOOTING TIP: With engine running, use inductive timing light to check spark
advance of each cylinder as throttle is opened and closed. If timing advances and retards
on each cylinder, ignition system is MOST LIKELY functioning properly.
IMPORTANT: If outboard appears to have an ignition system failure, it is recom-
mended that before beginning in-depth troubleshooting:
a. Ensure that the engine is mechanically sound condition. (Fuel System, Cylinder
Compression etc.).
b. Check all engine ground leads for loose or corroded connections.
c. Disconnect and reconnect ignition harness connectors to verify proper continuity.
Page 2A-8 90-883065 APRIL 2001

IGNITION
Testing Ignition Coil

Resistance Tests
Readings may very slightly due to temperature changes. Readings listed taken at 68° F (20° C).
NOTE: If using DMT 2000 turn the selector switch to . Allow the meter to auto-range.
ELECTRONIC SPARK TRIGGER (EST) TO EST GROUND
DC BA
b a
a - Red Meter Test Lead

b - Black Meter Test Lead
METER TEST LEADS METER SCALE READING
(ANALOG) (
RED BLACK
PIN B PIN C RX1K 8 5 - 12
8.5 12.0K
0K
NOTE: Ohm readings may not be in range specified because of sensitivity of your multi-me-
ter. Meter should show almost full continuity or near zero resistance condition.
High Tension Lead Removal/Installation

REMOVAL
1. Slightly twist high tension lead while removing.
INSTALLATION
1. Push high tension lead on until it snaps in place.
NOTE: High tension leads must be removed before testing. Leads contain 5k ohm resistor.
a - High Tension Lead
90-883065 APRIL 2001 Page 2A-9

IGNITION
High Tension Lead Resistance

a
a - Coil End
b - Spark Plug End
(ANALOG) (
RED BLACK
RX100 0 600 - 1.100K
0.600 1 100K
COIL END PLUG END
IGNITION COIL (SECONDARY)
DC BA
b
a
a - Pin A
b - Coil Tower
(ANALOG) (
RED BLACK
COIL TOWER PIN A RX1K 30-7
3.0 7.0
0
Page 2A-10 90-883065 APRIL 2001

IGNITION
Ignition Coil Removal and Installation

WARNING
Avoid serious injury or death from fire or explosion caused by damaged spark plug
boots. Damaged spark plug boots can emit sparks. Sparks can ignite fuel vapors
under the engine cowl. To avoid damaging spark plug boots, do not use any sharp
object or metal tool such as pliers, screwdriver, etc. to remove spark plug boots.
1. Disconnect spark plug leads from spark plugs.

2. Disconnect ignition coil harness connectors.
3. Remove ignition coil mounting screws.
4. Reverse steps for installation.
c
d
b
a
a - Spark Plug Lead (4)

b - Ignition Coil Harness Connector (4)
c - Ignition Coil Mounting Nut (7)
d - Ignition Coil (4)
Ignition Coil Mounting Nut Torque

30 lb. in. (3.4 N·m)
90-883065 APRIL 2001 Page 2A-11

CHARGING & STARTING SYSTEM
ELECTRICAL
Section 2B - Charging & Starting System
Table of Contents
2
Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2B-1 Flywheel Removal/Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2B-18
B
Special Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2B-2 Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2B-18
Flywheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2B-4 Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2B-20
Electrical Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2B-6 Stator Removal/Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2B-21
Starter Motor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2B-10 Voltage Regulator/Rectifier
Battery Charging System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2B-11 Removal/Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2B-22
Description (20 Ampere) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2B-11 Starting System Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2B-23
Wiring Diagram (20 Ampere) . . . . . . . . . . . 2B-11 Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2B-23
Charging System Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2B-12 Troubleshooting the Starting Circuit . . . . . . . . 2B-23
Flywheel Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2B-12 Starter Solenoid Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2B-24
Stator Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2B-12 Starter Motor Servicing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2B-27
Voltage Regulator/Rectifier Assembly . . . 2B-12 Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2B-27
Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2B-13 Disassembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2B-27
Battery Charging System Troubleshooting . . 2B-13 Cleaning and Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2B-29
Alternator System Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2B-14 Testing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2B-30
Stator Resistance Test - 20 Amp. Stator . 2B-15 Brush Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2B-32
Suppression Diode Tests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2B-15 Reassembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2B-33
Regulator/Rectifier (P/N 854514-1) Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2B-36
Diode Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2B-16
Specifications
Alternator Type: Single Phase (12 Pole)
CHARGING
20 Amp. Electric Alternator Output 12.6 V-20 Amps. (252 Watts)
SYSTEM
(Rectified/Regulated)
Readings taken @
Stator Resistance 0.20 - 0.30 Ohms (YEL-YEL)
68°F (20°C).
Quicksilver Tachometer Setting “6P” or “4”
Electric Start:
Starter Type Bendix
STARTING Output 1.1 kW
SYSTEM Ampere Draw Under:
(Load) 174.0 Amps
(No Load) 23.7 Amps
Battery Rating
Minimum Requirement 465 Marine Cranking Amps (MCA)
or 350 Cold Cranking Amps (CCA)
For operation below 32° F (0° C) 1000 Marine Cranking Amps (MCA) or
BATTERY 775 Cold Cranking Amps (CCA)
Ampere-Hours (Ah) Minimum
For operation above 32° F (0° C) 70
For operation below 32° F (0° C) 105
90-883065 APRIL 2001 Page 2B-1

Special Tools
1. Flywheel Holder P/N 91-83163M
2. Flywheel Puller P/N 91-83164M
Page 2B-2 90-883065 APRIL 2001

Notes:
90-883065 APRIL 2001 Page 2B-3

FLYWHEEL
2 3
6
110
7 9 8
10
15
4
16
19
11
13
5
14
12
17
18
20
110 4-Stroke Outboard Oil (92-828000A12)
Page 2B-4 90-883065 APRIL 2001

FLYWHEEL
TORQUE
REF.
REF
1 1 FLYWHEEL COVER
2 4 SCREW (M6 X 25) 75 8.5
3 1 DECAL - EPA INFORMATION (SEE NOTE)
4 1 FLYWHEEL
5 1 DRIVEN GEAR
6 1 DECAL - WARNING SPINNING FLYWHEEL
7 1 DECAL - TIMING MARKS
8 1 DECAL - WARNING-NEUTRAL
9 1 NUT 115 155.9
10 1 WASHER
11 3 SCREW (M5 X 30) 85 9.6
12 1 STATOR
13 1 LOAD RING
14 1 DRIVE GEAR
15 1 SCREW (M10 X 40) 28 38
16 1 WASHER
17 1 KEY
18 1 KEY
19 1 TIMING BELT
20 1 STA-STRAP
NOTE: THE EPA LABEL HAS IMPORTANT INFORMATION REGARDING EPA EMISSION
REGULATIONS. REPLACE ANY MISSING OR UNREADABLE EPA LABEL.
90-883065 APRIL 2001 Page 2B-5

ELECTRICAL COMPONENTS
6 Dielectric Grease (92-823506--1) 44
9 Loctite PST Pipe Sealant (92-809822) 13

66 Loctite 242 (92-809821)
66 11
12
9 10
14
8
5 6
7 15
4 66
12
2 3 6
4 16 25
15
27
1
18
3 17
4
1 25
3
1 21
24 20
26 19
24
29
30 23
6 21
22
43
31
35 28 25
42
41 33
32
34
25 24
38
36
45
37
39 40
Page 2B-6 90-883065 APRIL 2001

TORQUE
REF.
REF
1 3 SCREW (M6 X 25) 45 5.1
2 1 PLATE
3 3 WASHER
4 3 GROMMET
1 ECM (50)
5 1 ECM (60)
3 ECM (40)
6 3 BUSHING
7 2 SCREW 45 5.1
8 1 BRACKET
9 1 RETAINER
10 1 RETAINER
11 1 PLATE
12 3 SCREW (M6 X 16) 75 8.5
13 1 J CLAMP
14 1 BRACE
15 2 SCREW (M6 X 14) 45 5.1
16 1 SOLENOID PLATE
17 1 SCREW (M6 X 14) 45 5.1
18 1 BRACKET
19 1 SOLENOID
20 1 CABLE
21 2 NUT 60 6.8
22 1 BATTERY CABLE (POSITIVE)
23 1 BOOT (RED)
24 1 ENGINE WIRING HARNESS
4 FUSE (20 AMP)
25
1 FUSE (15 AMP)
26 1 COVER
27 1 DIODE ADAPTOR CABLE
28 1 PLUG (MALE)
29 1 CRANK POSITION SENSOR
30 2 SCREW (M5 X 16) 45 5.1
31 1 VOLTAGE REGULATOR
32 1 BRACKET
33 1 FOAM PAD
34 2 SCREW (M6 X 40) 75 8.5
35 1 PRESSURE SWITCH 75 8.5
36 1 STARTER MOTOR (SEE BREAKDOWN ON STARTER MOTOR)
37 1 NUT (1/4-20) 60 6.8
38 1 BATTERY CABLE (NEGATIVE)
39 1 J CLIP
90-883065 APRIL 2001 Page 2B-7

6 Dielectric Grease (92-823506--1) 44

66 Loctite 242 (92-809821)
66 11
12
9 10
14
8
5 6
7 15
4 66
12
2 3 6
4 16 25
15
27
1
18
3 17
4
1 25
3
1 21
24 20
26 19
24
29
30 23
6 21
22
43
31
35 28 25
42
41 33
32
34
25 24
38
36
45
37
39 40
Page 2B-8 90-883065 APRIL 2001

TORQUE
REF.
REF
40 3 SCREW (M8 X 45) 21.7 29.4
41 2 SCREW (M6 X 25) 75 8.5
42 AR STA-STRAP
43 4 SPARK PLUG (RA8HC) 20 21.1
44 1 SCREW (M5 X 12) 45 5.1
45 1 EXTENSION HARNESS (HANDLE)
90-883065 APRIL 2001 Page 2B-9

STARTER MOTOR
2
3
1 6
11
10
9
4 7
TORQUE
REF.
REF
1 1 STARTER MOTOR
2 2 THRU BOLT 70 8.0
3 1 DRIVE KIT
4 1 ARMATURE
5 1 PINION
6 1 DRIVE CAP
7 1 COMMUTATOR CAP
8 1 BRUSH & SPRING KIT
9 1 BRUSH HOLDER
10 2 SCREW
11 1 DECAL-Warning-High voltage
Page 2B-10 90-883065 APRIL 2001

Battery Charging System

Description (20 Ampere)
The battery charging system components are the flywheel, stator, regulator/rectifier, and
battery. Alternating current (generated in battery charge coils) flows to the regulator/rectifier,
which changes the alternating current to a regulated direct current for charging the battery.
Wiring Diagram (20 Ampere)
BLK = Black
RED = Red
GRY = Gray
YEL = Yellow
a
YEL YEL b
e
RED
GRY RED
d
YEL BLK
RED
YEL
BLK
RED
f
c
a - Stator
b - Voltage Regulator/Rectifier
c - Connector
d - To Engine Ground
e - To Battery Positive (Red) Terminal
f - To Battery Negative (Black) Terminal
90-883065 APRIL 2001 Page 2B-11

Charging System Description

Flywheel Assembly
The flywheel assembly contains six permanently charged magnet segments which are
bonded and retained to the inner wall of the flywheel. Each magnet contains a north and a
south pole providing a 12 pole system.
Stator Assembly
58489
The stator assembly located under the flywheel contains the battery charge coils. As the
flywheel permanent magnets pass the respective stator coil windings, an AC pulse current
is produced at each coil winding when magnet polarity changes. (South to North), (North
to South) etc.
Voltage Regulator/Rectifier Assembly
The voltage regulator converts the alternating current from the stator to direct current that
can be stored in the battery.
Page 2B-12 90-883065 APRIL 2001

Battery
A 12 volt battery with a minimum rating of 465 marine cranking amps (MCA) or 350 cold
cranking amps (CCA). For operation below 32° F (0° C) a rating of 1000 Marine Cranking
Amps (MCA) or 775 Cold Cranking Amps (CCA) is recommended.
Battery Charging System Troubleshooting

CAUTION
The charging system may be damaged by: 1) reversed battery cables, 2) an open
circuit, such as a broken wire or loose connection.
A fault in the battery charging system usually will cause the battery to become under-
charged. Check battery electrolyte level, and charge battery.
If battery will NOT accept a satisfactory charge, replace battery.
If battery accepts a satisfactory charge, determine the cause of the charging system prob-
lem as follows.
1. Check for correct battery polarity [RED cable to POSITIVE (+) battery terminal]. If polar-
ity was incorrect, check for damaged regulator/rectifier. See “REGULATOR/RECTIFI-
ER DIODE TEST”.
2. Check for loose or corroded battery connections.
3. Visually inspect wiring between stator and battery for cuts, chafing, and a disconnected,
loose or corroded connection.
4. Excessive electrical load (from too many accessories) will cause battery to run down.
If visual inspection determines that battery connections and wiring are OK, perform the fol-
lowing stator and regulator/rectifier tests.
90-883065 APRIL 2001 Page 2B-13

Alternator System Test

20 AMPERE STATOR
1. Check battery voltage at battery with engine running.
2. If battery voltage is above 15.0 volts, replace voltage regulator/rectifier. Check condition
of battery as overcharging may have damaged battery.
3. If battery voltage is below 12.5 volts, charge battery. If battery can NOT be satisfactorily
charged, replace battery.
4. If battery accepts a satisfactory charge, check battery voltage while cranking engine. If
cranking voltage is not acceptable, replace battery.
5. If cranking voltage is acceptable, disconnect the RED (voltage regulator) connector.
6. Connect RED (+) ammeter lead to RED voltage regulator wire, and the BLACK (–) am-
meter lead to the RED wiring harness wire.
7. Secure stator wires away from flywheel.
8. With engine running at the indicated RPM’s, the ammeter should indicate the following
appropriate amperes:
20
18
16
Alternator current (Amps)
14
12
10
0
0 1 2 3 4 5 6
RPM x 1000
9. A reading of 19.5 amperes at 5000 RPM indicates the charging system is functioning
properly.
10. If ammeter reads less than required amperes @ 5000 RPM, test the stator (refer to “Sta-
tor Resistance Test”). If stator tests OK, replace rectifier/regulator.
Page 2B-14 90-883065 APRIL 2001

Stator Resistance Test - 20 Amp. Stator
METER READING
METER TEST LEADS SCALE (
(ANALOG)
RED BLACK
YEL YEL RX1 0 20 - 0
0.20 0.30
30
NOTE: If using DMT 2000 turn the selector switch to . Allow the meter to auto-range.
Suppression Diode Tests
The suppression diode is located between the brown start solenoid lead, the yellow/red key
switch lead (within the engine harness) and connects to engine ground. The purpose of the
suppression diode is to eliminate the inductive spike created as the start solenoid is de-ener-
gized (key switch turned from START to RUN).
Symptoms of a failed suppression diode:
1. Open circuit - Longer crank times during engine start-up (3 seconds warm engine).
2. Short circuit - Blown fuse #3 (Main Power Relay/Accessory).
BLK
BRN YEL/RED
DIODE TEST
BLK RED YEL/RED BRN BLK
YEL/RED X 0V or SHORT 0.4 - 0.8V
BRN 0V or SHORT X 0.4 - 0.8V
BLK OUCH, OL, ∞ OUCH, OL, ∞ X
RESISTANCE TEST
BLK RED YEL/RED BRN BLK
YEL/RED X < 0.5 1 - 3M
90-883065 APRIL 2001 Page 2B-15

BRN < 0.5 X 1 - 3M

BLK OUCH, OL, ∞ OUCH, OL, ∞ X
Regulator/Rectifier (P/N 854514-1) Diode Test

ANALOG METER
NOTE: Voltage regulator/rectifier specifications are given for informational purposes only.
Use the appropriate troubleshooting techniques previously mentioned to find the faulty
component in the charging system.
BLK = Black
GRY = Gray
RED = Red
BLK YEL = Yellow
GRY
YEL
YEL
RED
DIODE TEST:
1. Set Ohm meter to R X 10 scale.
2. Connect Red (+) meter lead to RED regulator lead.
3. Connect Black (–) meter lead to either YELLOW regulator lead.
TEST RESULTS:
100 - 400 OHMS
DIODE TEST:
1. Set Ohm meter to R X 1k scale.
2. Connect Black (–) meter lead to RED regulator lead.
3. Connect Red (+) meter lead to YELLOW regulator lead. Test. Then change Red (+) me-
ter lead to the other YELLOW regulator lead for 2ND test reading.
TEST RESULTS (1ST READING):
20,000 to ∞ OHMS
TEST RESULTS (2ND READING):
∞ OHMS (No needle movement)
SCR TEST:
2. Connect Red (+) meter lead to regulator case.
3. Connect Black (–) meter lead to one YELLOW regulator lead. Test. Connect Black (–)
meter lead to the other YELLOW lead.
TEST RESULTS (BOTH TESTS):
8,000 - 15,000 OHMS (8k - 15K)
Page 2B-16 90-883065 APRIL 2001

TACHOMETER CIRCUIT TEST:

2. Connect Red (+) meter lead to GREY regulator lead.
3. Connect Black (–) meter lead to regulator case.
TEST RESULTS:
10,000 - 50,000 OHMS (10k - 50k)
DIGITAL METER
NOTE: Voltage regulator/rectifier specifications are given for informational purposes only.
Use the appropriate troubleshooting techniques previously mentioned to find the faulty
component in the charging system.
BLK = Black
BLK GRY = Gray
RED = Red
YEL = Yellow
GRY
YEL
YEL
RED
DIODE TEST:
1. Set meter to .
2. Connect Black (–) meter lead to RED regulator lead.
3. Connect Red (+) meter lead to either YELLOW regulator lead.
TEST RESULTS:
0.4-0.8 V
DIODE TEST:
1. Set meter to .
2. Connect Red (+) meter lead to RED regulator lead.
3. Connect Black (–) meter lead to either YELLOW regulator lead.
TEST RESULTS (1ST READING):
∞ or OUCH or OL
SCR TEST:
1. Set meter to .
2. Connect Black (–) meter lead to regulator case.
3. Connect Red (+) meter lead to either YELLOW regulator lead.
TEST RESULTS (BOTH TESTS):
1.5 V - ∞ or OUCH or OL
90-883065 APRIL 2001 Page 2B-17

Flywheel Removal/Installation
WARNING
Engine could possibly start when turning flywheel during removal and installation.
To prevent this type of accidental engine starting and possible serious injury, al-
ways remove spark plug leads from spark plugs.
Removal
1. Remove flywheel cover.
a - Flywheel Cover
b - Screw (4) M6 x 25
Page 2B-18 90-883065 APRIL 2001

2. Loosen flywheel nut. Hold flywheel using flywheel holder (91-83163M).

3. Remove nut and washer.
NOTE: Removal of the nut may require the use of an impact tool.
c
d
91-83163M
a - Flywheel Holder (91-83163M)

b - Breaker Bar with 30 mm Socket
c - Nut
d - Washer
4. Loosen flywheel using puller (91-83164M). Remove flywheel and key.
NOTE: Apply a small amount of grease to the end of the crankshaft before installing puller.
c
b
91-83164M
58815 58227
a - Flywheel Puller (91-83164M)

b - Flywheel
c - Key
90-883065 APRIL 2001 Page 2B-19

Installation
1. Place flywheel key into slot.
2. Install flywheel. Apply oil to threads on crankshaft.
3. Install washer and nut.
4. Hold flywheel using flywheel holder (91-83163M) and tighten nut to the specified torque.
d
110
c
a
b
91-83163M
58227
110 4-Stroke Outboard Oil (92-828000A12)
a - Key
b - Flywheel
c - Washer
d - Nut
e - Torque Wrench with 30mm socket
f - Flywheel Holder (91-83163M)
Flywheel Nut Torque

115 lb. ft. (155.9 N·m)
Page 2B-20 90-883065 APRIL 2001

Stator Removal/Installation
NOTE: Remove flywheel as outlined in “Flywheel Removal and Installation” section of ser-
vice manual.
1. Disconnect stator wires. The 2 pin connector disconnects from voltage regulator.
2. Remove stator mounting screws.
3. Reverse steps for installation (refer to wiring diagram in Section 8 for correct stator wire
connections).
NOTE: Apply Loctite 222 to threads of stator mounting screws.
b
b
51
51 Loctite “222” (92-809818)

a - Stator
b - Screw (3) M5 x 30
c - 2 Pin Connector
Stator Screw Torque

85 lb. in. (9.6 N·m)
90-883065 APRIL 2001 Page 2B-21

Voltage Regulator/Rectifier Removal and Installation

1. Disconnect voltage regulator/rectifier wire connectors.
2. Remove mounting screws and remove voltage regulator/rectifier.
3. Reverse steps for installation (refer to wiring diagram section 8 for correct wire connec-
tions).
b
a - Voltage Regulator/Rectifier
b - Screw (2) M6 x 40
c - Connectors
Voltage Regulator/Rectifier Mounting Screw Torque

75 lb. in. (8.5 N·m)
Page 2B-22 90-883065 APRIL 2001

Starting System Components

Description
The function of the starting system is to crank the engine. The battery supplies electrical
energy to crank the starter motor. When the ignition switch is turned to “START” position,
the starter solenoid is activated and completes the starting circuit between the battery and
starter.
The neutral start switch opens the start circuit when the shift control lever is not in neutral.
This prevents accidental starting when engine is in gear.
The starting system consists of the following components.
1. Battery
2. Starter Solenoid
3. Neutral Safety Switch
4. Starter Motor
5. Ignition Switch
CAUTION
The starter motor may be damaged if operated continuously. DO NOT operate con-
tinuously for more than 30 seconds. Allow a 2 minute cooling period between start-
ing attempts.
Troubleshooting the Starting Circuit

Before beginning the starting circuit troubleshooting flow chart, following, check first for the
following conditions:
1. Make sure that battery is fully charged.
2. Check that control lever is in “NEUTRAL” position.
3. Check battery terminals for corrosion and loose connections.
4. Check start solenoid and starter for corrosion and loose connections.
5. Check cables and wiring for frayed and worn insulation.
6. Check 20 Amp fuse.
90-883065 APRIL 2001 Page 2B-23

Starter Solenoid Test

1. Inspect starter solenoid for cracks, loose terminals or loose terminal lead connections.
2. Connect ohm meter between terminals of starter solenoid.
3. Connect the BLACK lead from solenoid to battery negative (–) terminal and momentarily
connect the BROWN lead to the positive (+) terminal of battery.
4. Verify continuity between the starter solenoid terminals when 12 volts are applied.
b
a - BROWN Lead
b - Starter Solenoid
c - BLACK Lead
d - Battery
The following “STARTING CIRCUIT TROUBLESHOOTING FLOW CHART” is designed as

an aid to troubleshooting the starting circuit. This flow chart will accurately locate any exist-
ing malfunction. Location of “TEST POINTS” (called out in the chart) are numbered in dia-
gram below.
Page 2B-24 90-883065 APRIL 2001

FUSE HOLDER ASSEMBLY BRN YEL/RED

15 RED/PUR
YEL/RED
BRN
6
RED
BLK
BLK
STARTER
3
YEL/RED
RED/PUR
BLK
(with
RED SLEEVES) DIODE
BLK STARTER
(with SOLENOID
NEUTRAL
BLK
YEL SLEEVES)
1 START
SWITCH
7
4
5
2
BLK = Black
BLU = Blue
BRN = Brown
GRY = Gray
GRN = Green + – BLK
ORN = Orange IGNITION SWITCH
PNK = Pink
PUR = Purple BATTERY
RED = Red
TAN = Tan
WHT = White
YEL = Yellow
Starting Circuit Troubleshooting Flow Chart
Starter Motor Does Not Turn
SAFETY WARNING: Disconnect BLACK (with Yellow

Sleeve) (starter motor) cable from starter solenoid test
point 1 BEFORE making tests 1-thru-7 to prevent unex-
pected engine cranking.
TEST 1
Use an ohmmeter (R x 1 scale) and connect meter leads be-
tween NEGATIVE (-) battery post and common powerhead
ground.
No continuity indicated; there is an open circuit in the BLACK Continuity Indicated

NEGATIVE (-) battery cable between the NEGATIVE (-) battery Proceed to TEST 2, on next page.
post and the powerhead.
• Check cable for loose or corroded connections.
• Check cable for open.
90-883065 APRIL 2001 Page 2B-25

* Battery Voltage
TEST 2
a. Disconnect BLACK ground wire(s) from Test Point 2.
b. Connect voltmeter between common engine ground and Test Point 2.
No voltage reading; c. Turn ignition key to “Start” position.
proceed to TEST 3.
TEST 3 12 Volt Reading*

a. Reconnect BLACK ground wire(s). Check BLACK ground wire for poor connection
b. Connect voltmeter between common engine ground and Test Point 3. or open circuit. Reconnect ground wire to start-
c. Turn ignition key to “Start” position. er solenoid; proceed to TEST 7.
Electric Start Tiller Handle Model

No voltage reading; 12 Volt Reading
proceed to TEST 4. Neutral start switch is open or BLACK leads are
Defective starter solenoid. disconnected or damaged.
TEST 4
a. Connect voltmeter between common 12 Volt Reading*
engine ground and Test Point 4. Neutral start switch is open, or BROWN, or
No voltage reading; b. Turn ignition key to “Start” position. YEL/RED, or BLACK wire is open between
proceed to TEST 5. Test Points 4 and 3. Check diode adaptor if
equipped.
TEST 5
Connect voltmeter between common 12 Volt Reading*
No voltage reading; engine ground and Test Point 5. Defective ignition switch.
proceed to TEST 6.
TEST 6
Connect voltmeter between common engine ground and Test Point 6.
No voltage reading; check BLACK (with RED

12 Volt Reading*
sleeve) wire between battery (+) positive termi- Check fuse in RED wire between test points 5 and 6.
nal and Test Point 6. Check for open RED or RED/PUR wire between test
points 5 and 6.
TEST 7
a. Connect voltmeter between common engine ground and Test Point 1.
b. Turn ignition key to “Start” position.
No voltage reading; De- 12 Volt Reading*

fective starter solenoid. Should hear solenoid click; proceed to TEST 8.
TEST 8
a. Reconnect BLACK (with YELLOW sleeve) (starter motor) cable to starter
solenoid Test Point 1.
b. Connect voltmeter between common engine ground and Test Point 7
c. Turn ignition key to “Start” position.
No voltage reading; check BLACK (with

12 Volt Reading*
Check BLACK (with YELLOW sleeve) cable
YELLOW sleeve) cable for poor connec-
at starter for loose or corroded connection, or
tion or open circuit.
open circuit. If cable is O.K., check starter mo-
tor.
Page 2B-26 90-883065 APRIL 2001

Starter Motor Servicing

Removal
WARNING
Always disconnect the battery and remove spark plug leads from spark plugs be-
fore working on motor.
1. Disconnect battery leads from battery and black starter motor lead from starter solenoid.
2. Remove upper mounting screws. Loosen bottom screw, lift up and remove starter.
a
a 58813
a - Starter Mounting Screw (3) M8 x 45

b - Starter Motor Lead
Disassembly
1. Remove 2 thru bolts and commutator end cap, taking care not to lose brush springs.
a c
a c
b
a - Thru Bolts
b - Commutator End Cap
c - Brush Springs
90-883065 APRIL 2001 Page 2B-27

2. Remove the nut, washer, spring, pinion stopper and pinion drive assembly. You may
need to lightly clamp the armature in a vise while removing the nut.
NOTE: DISPOSE OF NUT AFTER REMOVING IT AND USE A NEW ONE FOR REAS-
SEMBLY.
e
c
b
c d
58223
a - Nut d - Spring
b - Washer e - Pinion
c - Pinion Stopper
3. Pull armature from starter frame.
f g h
d c d
a b e
a - Nut e - Pinion
b - Washer f - Drive End Cap
c - Spring g - Armature Shaft
d - Pinion Stopper (2) h - Washer
Page 2B-28 90-883065 APRIL 2001

Cleaning and Inspection

1. Clean all motor parts.
2. Check pinion teeth for chips, cracks or excessive wear.
3. Replace the drive clutch spring and/or collar, if tension is not adequate, or if wear is ex-
cessive.
4. Check that the brush holder is not damaged or is not holding the brushes against the
commutator.
5. Replace brushes that are pitted or worn to less than 1/4 in. (6.4mm) in length. Refer to
“BRUSH REPLACEMENT”, following.
6. Replace a damaged or excessively worn bushing in the end cap.
7. Check the armature conductor (commutator bar junction) for a firm connection. A poor
connection usually results in a burned commutator bar.
8. Re-surface and undercut a rough commutator, as follows:
CAUTION
Do not turn down the commutator excessively.
a. Re-surface the commutator and undercut the insulation between the commutator
bars 1/3 in. (0.8mm) to the full width of the insulation, make sure that the undercut
is flat.
b. Clean the commutator slots after undercutting.
c. De-burr the commutator lightly with No. 00 sandpaper, then clean the commutator.
d. Check the armature on a growler for shorts. See “TESTING”, following.
9. Open-circuited armatures often can be saved where an open circuit is obvious and re-
pairable. The most likely place for an open circuit is at the commutator bars. Long crank-
ing periods overheat the starter motor so that solder in the connections melts. The poor
connections cause arcing and burning of the commutator bars.
10. Repair bars, that are not too badly burned, by re-soldering the leads in bars (using rosin
flux solder) and turning down the commutator in a lathe to remove burned material, then
undercut the mica.
11. Clean out the copper or brush dust from slots between the commutator bars.
12. Check the armature for shorts and ground. See “TESTING”.
90-883065 APRIL 2001 Page 2B-29

Testing
ARMATURE TEST FOR SHORTS
Check armature for short circuits by placing on growler and holding hack saw blade over
armature core while armature is rotated. If saw blade vibrates, armature is shorted. Re-
check after cleaning between commutator bars. If saw blade still vibrates, replace armature.
ARMATURE TEST FOR GROUND

1. Set ohmmeter to (R x 1 scale). Place one lead of ohmmeter on armature core (or shaft)
and other lead on commutator, as shown.
2. If meter indicates continuity, armature is grounded and must be replaced.
Page 2B-30 90-883065 APRIL 2001

CHECKING POSITIVE BRUSHES AND TERMINALS

1. Connect ohmmeter (R x 1 scale) leads between positive brushes.
2. Ohmmeter must indicate full continuity (zero resistance). If resistance is indicated,
check lead to positive terminal solder connection. If connection cannot be repaired,
brushes must be replaced. Refer to “BRUSH REPLACEMENT”.
11673
a - Positive Brushes
TESTING NEGATIVE BRUSHES FOR GROUND

Set ohmmeter to (R x 1 scale). Place one lead of ohmmeter on the negative brush and the
other lead on the end cap (bare metal). If the meter indicates NO continuity, replace the neg-
ative brush. Repeat this procedure on the other negative brush.
b
a
a - Negative (–) Brushes

b - End Cap
90-883065 APRIL 2001 Page 2B-31

Brush Replacement
IMPORTANT: Replace brushes that are pitted or worn to less than 1/4 in. (6.4mm) in
length.
e
c
f
g
b
a
a - Positive (+) Terminal

b - Long Brush Lead
c - Push Lead Into Slot
d - Insulating Washer
e - Flat Washer
f - Lock Washer
g - Nut
a c b
b a
a - Positive (+) Brushes

b - Negative (–) Brushes
c - Brush Holder
d - Bolts (Fasten Negative Brushes and Holder)
Page 2B-32 90-883065 APRIL 2001

Reassembly
1. Lubricate helix threads and drive end cap bushing with SAE 10W oil.
2. Install the pinion, pinion stopper, spring, second pinion stopper, washer, and NEW nut
onto armature shaft.
3. Lightly clamp the armature in a vise and torque nut to specified torque.
f g h
d c d
a e
b
a - Nut
b - Washer
c - Spring
d - Pinion Stopper (2)
e - Pinion
f - Drive End Cap
g - Armature Shaft
h - Washer
Starter Shaft Nut Torque
22.5 lb.-ft. (30.5 N·m)
90-883065 APRIL 2001 Page 2B-33

4. Construct a brush retainer tool as shown.
Brush Retainer Tool Layout (Full Size)
18-Gauge Sheet Metal

METRIC
SCALE
3” = 76.2mm
2” = 50.8mm
1-3/4” = 44.5mm
1-11/16”= 42.9mm
3/4” = 19.1mm
1/2” = 12.7mm
Brush Retainer Tool Side View (Full Size)
Page 2B-34 90-883065 APRIL 2001

5. Place springs and brushes into brush holder and hold in place with brush retainer tool.
6. Lubricate bushing with one drop of SAE 10W oil. DO NOT over-lubricate.
a - Brush Retainer Tool

b - Bushing
7. Position armature into starter frame so that commutator end of armature is at end of
starter frame where permanent magnets are recessed 1 in. (25.4mm). Align marks (a)
as shown.
8. Install commutator end cap onto starter frame; align marks (b) as shown, and remove
brush retainer tool.
9. Install thru bolts (c) and torque to 70 lbs. in. (7.9 N·m).
c
c
90-883065 APRIL 2001 Page 2B-35

Installation
1. Secure starter to block with (3) mounting screws. Tighten screws to specified torque.
Secure starter motor lead as shown.
a
a 58813
a - Starter Mounting Screw (3) M8 x 45

b - Starter Motor Lead
Starter Motor Mounting Screw Torque

22 lb. ft. (29 N·m)
Page 2B-36 90-883065 APRIL 2001

TIMING, SYNCHRONIZING, & ADJUSTING
ELECTRICAL
Section 2C - Timing, Synchronizing, & Adjusting
Table of Contents
2
Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2C-2 Maximum Throttle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2C-6
C
Special Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2C-3 Timing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2C-7
Throttle Link Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2C-5 Idle Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2C-8
Idle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2C-5 Throttle Position Sensor (TPS) . . . . . . . . . . . . 2C-8
90-883065 APRIL 2001 Page 2C-1

Specifications
Spark Plug:
Type Champion RA8HC
Gap 0.040 in. (1.0 mm)
Hole Size 12 mm
Ignition Timing:
@1500-1800 14° B.T.D.C
@ WOT (6000 rpm) 28° B.T.D.C
#2 and #3 6225 rpm
Cylinders 6350 rpm
Range
NOTE: The 50/60 EFI (4-stroke) ECM unit electronically controls the ignition timing,
therefore making the ignition timing non–adjustable. When initially running the
outboard, use a timing light to verify that the ignition timing falls within the timing windows
(as outlined in this section).
Page 2C-2 90-883065 APRIL 2001

Special Tools
2. Timing Light P/N 91-99379
3. Digital Diagnostic Tester 91-823686A2
4. DDT Cartridge 91-880118--2 and DDT Reference Manual 90-881204--2.
91-880118--2
90-881204--2
90-883065 APRIL 2001 Page 2C-3

5. DDT Cable 10’ (3.05m) Extension 84-825003A1
6. DDT Test Harness 84-822560A5
Page 2C-4 90-883065 APRIL 2001

Throttle Link Setting

Idle
NOTE: For remote control models, remove remote control throttle cable during throttle link
adjustment. For tiller handle models, throttle cables remain attached and throttle twist grip
should be used to advance throttle during throttle link adjustment.
1. Lightly hold throttle body arm against idle stop.
2. Slowly push throttle lever forward until you feel the throttle body arm start to move. The
center of throttle arm roller should line up with the throttle cam alignment mark. Toler-
ance may range from mark to 1/8 inch (3.2 mm) after mark.
3. If adjustment is needed refer to Throttle Link Adjustment section 7A .
c e
f g
h
d
a
b
g
a - Throttle Body Arm

b - Throttle Lever
c - Throttle Arm Roller
d - Throttle Cam Alignment Mark
e - Correct
f - Shorten Link Rod
g - Lengthen Link Rod
h - Alignment Tolerance - 1/8 inch (3.2mm)
90-883065 APRIL 2001 Page 2C-5

Maximum Throttle
1. With throttle cable(s) attached, advance throttle (remote control handle or throttle twist
grip) to wide open throttle position.
2. Throttle stop should lightly contact adjoining surface. To ensure the throttle shutter is
fully open, back the throttle stop screw out until there is a gap between the throttle stop
screw and adjoining surface (at WOT position). Keep turning the throttle stop screw “in”
until the throttle stop lightly contacts the adjoining surface.
a - Throttle Lever
b - Throttle Stop Screw
c - Throttle Stop
Page 2C-6 90-883065 APRIL 2001

Timing
WARNING
To prevent personal injury or possible death, from loss of balance or stability while
servicing the motor, DO NOT attempt to check timing while boat is in motion. Failure
to follow one of the recommended servicing procedures may result in the person
falling overboard or causing personal injury from fall in boat.
WARNING
To prevent personal injury from spinning flywheel, Do Not attempt to remove fly-
wheel cover or place hands on top of cover when checking ignition timing.
Ignition timing is not adjustable. The Electronic Control Module unit electronically controls
the ignition timing.
When initially running the outboard, use a timing light to verify that the ignition timing falls
within the timing windows as described within the following tests.
IMPORTANT: When checking the timing with the engine running, one of the following
test procedures must be followed.
Check maximum timing per specification while running the outboard:
•IN A TEST TANK
•ON A DYNAMOMETER
•ON A BOAT SECURED ON A TRAILER “Backed in Water”
1. Attach timing light to #1 spark plug lead.
2 a
3 c
a - Timing Light Clamp

b - #1 Spark Plug Lead
c - Timing Window-Electric Start Models
90-883065 APRIL 2001 Page 2C-7

NOTE: Idle timing is controlled by the ECM and will vary for idle speed control. Checking
the ignition timing marks using a timing light will not be stable until 1500-1800 rpm.
2. Start the engine and place the outboard in “Forward” gear. Check timing at 1500 - 1800
rpm, timing should be 14° BTDC. If timing is not within specification refer to section 3B
EFI Troubleshooting and Diagnostics.
a
14 BTDC
15
a - Timing Mark (1500-1800 rpm)

3. Slowly increase the engine RPM while watching the ignition timing marks. The timing
should increase to the maximum timing specification “Full Advance” at approximately
6000 RPM. If not within specification window, refer to section 3B - EFI Troubleshoot-
ing and Diagnostics.
a
28° BTDC
a - Timing Mark (Full Advance)
Idle Speed
Engine idle speed is maintained by the ECM and is therefore not adjustable. The parame-
ters affecting idle speed can be checked and monitored using the Digital Diagnostic Termi-
nal (DDT). Refer to section 3B - EFI Troubleshooting and Diagnostics.
Throttle Position Sensor (TPS)

The Throttle Position Sensor (TPS) is not adjustable. TPS voltage reading can be monitored
with the DDT through the ECM. If readings are not within specifications, refer to section 3B
EFI Troubleshooting and Diagnostics.
Page 2C-8 90-883065 APRIL 2001

THEORY OF OPERATION
ELECTRONIC FUEL INJECTION

Section 3A - Theory of Operation
Table of Contents
Electronic Fuel Injection System . . . . . . . . . . . 3A-2 Manifold Air Temperature (MAT) Sensor . 3A-7
Air Induction System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3A-2 Throttle Position Sensor (TPS) . . . . . . . . . 3A-8
Fuel System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fuel System Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3A-3
3A-4
Oil Pressure Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Actuators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3A-8
3A-9
3
Fuel Pump . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3A-4 Idle Air Control (IAC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3A-9 A
Vapor Separator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3A-5 Fuel Injector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3A-9
Fuel Pressure Regulator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3A-6 Main Power Relay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3A-10
Fuel Cooler . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3A-6 Fuse Holder Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3A-10
Sensors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3A-7 Suppression Diode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3A-11
Crank Position Sensor (CPS) . . . . . . . . . . 3A-7 Electronic Control Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3A-11
Engine Coolant Temperature Electronic Control Module Functions . . . . 3A-12
(ECT) Sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3A-7 Outline of Control System . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3A-13
Manifold Absolute Pressure Control and Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3A-14
(MAP) Sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3A-7
90-883065 APRIL 2001 Page 3A-1

THEORY OF OPERATION
Electronic Fuel Injection System

Air Induction System
The air induction system consists of an intake manifold (an intake runner for each cylinder
joined to a common air box), a single throttle body/shutter with attached Throttle Position
Sensor (TPS), an Idle Air Control (IAC), a Manifold Absolute Pressure (MAP) sensor, and a
Manifold Air Temperature (MAT) sensor. The intake manifold also mounts the fuel distribu-
tion manifold and the fuel injectors.
f c
a - Intake Manifold
b - Throttle Body/Shutter
c - Throttle Position Sensor (TPS)
d - Idle Air Control (IAC)
e - Manifold Absolute Pressure (MAP) Sensor
f - Manifold Air Temperature (MAT) Sensor
Page 3A-2 90-883065 APRIL 2001

THEORY OF OPERATION
Fuel System
The fuel system consists of a fuel line connector, a water separating fuel filter, a low-pres-
sure mechanical fuel pump, a high-pressure electric fuel pump, a fuel distribution manifold,
fuel injectors, a fuel cooler and a fuel pressure regulator. The low-pressure mechanical fuel
pump draws fuel from the fuel tank, through the fuel line connector and fuel filter, then deliv-
ers it to the high-pressure fuel pump within the vapor separator tank. High-pressure fuel is
circulated through the fuel cooler and supplied to the fuel distribution manifold and fuel in-
jectors to be sprayed into the intake manifold. Fuel not used by the fuel injectors (fuel not
entering the high-pressure fuel line to the fuel distribution manifold) circulates through the
fuel cooler, then flows through pressure regulator, and returns to the vapor separator tank.
h f
a e
a - Fuel Line Connector

b - Water Separating Fuel Filter
c - Low-Pressure Mechanical Fuel Pump
d - Vapor Separator Tank/High Pressure Electric Fuel Pump
e - Fuel Cooler
f - Fuel Distribution Manifold
g - Fuel Injectors (4)
h - Pressure Regulator
i - High Pressure Fuel Filter
90-883065 APRIL 2001 Page 3A-3

THEORY OF OPERATION
Fuel System Components

Fuel Pump
The fuel pump is a diaphragm pump which is mechanically driven off of the rocker arm.
The pump base insulates the fuel pump from the heat of the engine block. The fuel pump
is water cooled to help prevent vapor lock by cooling the fuel.
If the engine runs out of fuel, or has a restriction (on the inlet side of the pump) preventing
adequate fuel flow, the pump will make a “clicking” noise.
c
b
d
a - Fuel From Filter/Tank
b - Fuel Outlet to VST
c - Water Inlet From VST Fuel Cooler
d - Water Outlet to Tell-tale
Page 3A-4 90-883065 APRIL 2001

THEORY OF OPERATION
Vapor Separator
The vapor separator maintains a liquid fuel supply for the high pressure fuel pump located
in the vapor separator tank. Fuel delivered from the mechanical low-pressure fuel pump is
supplied to the top of the vapor separator and is controlled by the inlet needle/float assem-
bly. Pressurized fuel from the high-pressure pump circulates through the fuel cooler, to the
fuel distribution manifold and injectors. Excess fuel flows through the pressure regulator
back to the vapor separator tank.
e a
a
e
d b
d
c
f f
a - Fuel From Mechanical Fuel Pump

b - Inlet Needle and Float Valve
c - High Pressure Electric Fuel Pump
d - Fuel Cooler
e - Pressure Regulator
f - Fuel Outlet to Fuel Distribution Manifold
90-883065 APRIL 2001 Page 3A-5

THEORY OF OPERATION
Fuel Pressure Regulator

The fuel pressure regulator mounted on top of the vapor separator maintains a stable fuel
pressure between the high-pressure fuel pump and the fuel injectors. The pressure regula-
tor consists of a spring-loaded diaphragm which actuates a valve/seat assembly. Excess
fuel pressure unseats the valve returning fuel to the vapor separator tank. The excess fuel
is channeled below the fuel level in the vapor separator tank through an internal pipe to
prevent fuel vaporization.
The spring side of the diaphragm is vented to atmosphere allowing barometric conditions
to act on the diaphragm in addition to spring pressure.
c
a - Vent to Atmosphere
b - High Pressure Fuel From Fuel Cooler
c - Excess Fuel Flows to VST
Fuel Cooler
A fuel cooler (heat exchanger) is attached to the vapor separator, and uses engine cooling
water to cool the high-pressure fuel supply to the fuel injectors as well as a return circuit to
the VST. Removing heat from the circulating high-pressure fuel prevents the formation of
fuel vapors.
Page 3A-6 90-883065 APRIL 2001

THEORY OF OPERATION
Sensors
Sensors send input signals to the ECM regarding engine operating conditions.

As the flywheel rotates, the CPS senses the location of the 54 teeth on the flywheel and
supplies the trigger signal information to the ECM. The ECM utilizes the CPS information
and determines when to trigger each ignition coil and fuel injector.
The CPS provides the ECM with crank angle position and engine speed information, which
the ECM uses in determining fuel delivery and spark timing.
Engine Coolant Temperature (ECT) Sensor

The ETC sensor is located on the engine’s exhaust cover and protrudes into the return
water passage. The sensor monitors the temperature of the cooling water that has passed
through the engine as controlled by the thermostat and sends signals to the ECM for proc-
essing.
Manifold Absolute Pressure (MAP) Sensor

The MAP sensor is mounted into the intake manifold, and measures the absolute pressure
within the intake manifold. This information is then used to calculate fuel delivery and spark
timing.
Manifold Air Temperature (MAT) Sensor

The MAT sensor is mounted into the intake manifold and measures the charge air temper-
ature. This information is then conducted to the ECM for processing.
90-883065 APRIL 2001 Page 3A-7

THEORY OF OPERATION

The TPS sensor is located on the throttle body and connected to the throttle shaft. It pro-
vides the ECM with throttle angle information.
Oil Pressure Switch

The oil pressure switch is located port side of the engine and protrudes into the pressurized
oil galley between the oil pump and the oil filter. The sensor sends a low oil pressure signal
to the ECM, which activates ignition/injection cut-off/warning horn.
Page 3A-8 90-883065 APRIL 2001

THEORY OF OPERATION
Actuators
Actuators receive input signals from the ECM and perform functions, which control air-fuel
ratios, spark advance, and idle rpm.
Idle Air Control (IAC)

The Idle Air Control (IAC) is an electrically operated spring-loaded solenoid valve, which
controls the amount of intake air that bypasses the closed throttle shutter. Signals from the
ECM regulate the duty cycle that the IAC valve remains open, or (spring-loaded) closed.
Duty cycle of the IAC valve ranges from 0% to 100% open. The IAC controls three operat-
ing functions:
1. Provides additional intake air (bypass) for engine start-up and allows increased idle
rpm during engine warm-up.
2. Controls idle speed according to varying engine loads and running conditions.
3. Functions as an electronic dashpot by providing additional bypass air as the throttle
quickly closes during a rapid deceleration, preventing engine stalling.
Fuel Injector
The fuel injector is an electrically operated spring-loaded solenoid, which delivers a me-
tered amount of fuel into the intake manifold runner, just ahead of the intake valve. The
injectors are electrically charged as the key switch is set to the “RUN” position. The ECM
controls the injection by completing the ground circuit, lifting the solenoid, which allows
high-pressure fuel to flow. The ECM then opens the ground circuit allowing the spring to
close the injector and stop the fuel flow.
90-883065 APRIL 2001 Page 3A-9

THEORY OF OPERATION
Main Power Relay

The main power relay is controlled by the ECM. It provides power to the ignition coils, idle
air control, injectors, and high pressure fuel pump.
Fuse Holder Assembly

The fuse holder hold four function fuses and one spare fuse.
1. Fuse number one protects the SmartCraft wiring.
2. Fuse number two is powered by the main relay. It protects red/blue leads on the en-
gine. This fuse provides power to the injectors, idle air control, and electric fuel pump.
3. Fuse number three protects red/purple leads on the engine, the main power relay, and
key switch. When the key switch is on, the purple leads on the engine, key switch and
dash gauges are also powered/protected through this fuse.
4. Fuse number four is powered by the main relay. It protects red/yellow leads on the en-
gine. This fuse provides power to the ignition coils.
5. Fuse number 5 is a spare 20 AMP fuse.
5
1 3
15
2 4
Page 3A-10 90-883065 APRIL 2001

THEORY OF OPERATION
Suppression Diode
The suppression diode is located between the brown start solenoid lead and the yellow/red
key switch lead (within the engine harness), and connects to the engine ground. The pur-
pose of the suppression diode is to eliminate the inductive spike created as the start sole-
noid is de-energized (key switch turned from START to RUN).
Electronic Control Module
The ECM requires 6 volts DC to operate. If the ECM should fail, the engine will stop run-
ning.
The inputs to the ECM can be monitored and tested by the Digital Diagnostic Terminal P/N
91-823686A2 and adapter harness 84-822560A5.
The ECM performs the following functions:
1. Calculates the precise fuel and ignition timing requirements based on engine speed,
throttle position, manifold pressure, manifold air temperature and engine coolant tem-
perature
2. Directly controls the ground circuit of fuel injectors, ignition coils, and idle air control
3. Indirectly controls the positive circuit of fuel injectors, ignition coils, and idle air control
through the main relay
4. Controls alarm horn and warning functions
5. Controls RPM limit function
6. Records engine running information
90-883065 APRIL 2001 Page 3A-11

THEORY OF OPERATION
Electronic Control Module Functions

Crank Position Sensor Fuel pump
(CPS)
Throttle Position
Fuel Injectors
Sensor (TPS)
Engine Coolant Temperature Idle Air Control (IAC)

(ECT) Sensor
Manifold Air Temperature

ECM Ignition coils
(MAT) Sensor (Electronic

SmartCraft Output
Control
Manifold Absolute
Pressure (MAP) Sensor Module) Digital Diagnostic Terminal (DDT)
Oil Pressure Switch Warning Horn
Ignition Key Switch

Tachometer
Page 3A-12 90-883065 APRIL 2001

THEORY OF OPERATION
Outline of Control System

ECM Sensors
Ignition Timing 0 Engine load / Engine speed map Manifold Absolute Pressure (MAP) Sensor
Control Crank Position Sensor (CPS)
0 Engine temperature correction Engine Coolant Temperature (ECT) Sensor
0 Starting correction Engine Coolant Temperature (ECT) Sensor

0 Ignition cutoff for decreased engine speed Crank Position Sensor (CPS)
Oil Pressure Switch
0 Over-revolution prevention Crank Position Sensor (CPS)
0 Engine cutoff Ignition Key Switch

Stop Switch
0 Idling stabilizer Crank Position Sensor (CPS)
0 Safety control Sensors and Switches
ECM Sensors
Fuel system 0 Engine load / Engine speed map Manifold Absolute Pressure (MAP) Sensor

0 Rapid acceleration correction Throttle Position Sensor (TPS)
0 Rapid deceleration correction Throttle Position Sensor (TPS)
0 Fuel cutoff for decreased engine speed Crank Position Sensor (CPS)
Oil Pressure Switch
Battery Voltage
0 Over-revolution prevention Crank Position Sensor (CPS)
90-883065 APRIL 2001 Page 3A-13

THEORY OF OPERATION
ECM Sensors
IAC Control 0 Engine speed Crank Position Sensor (CPS)

0 Rapid deceleration correction Throttle Position Sensor (TPS)

0 Idling speed feedback Crank Position Sensor (CPS)
0 Variable idling speed control Throttle Position Sensor (TPS)
0 Starting preparation Engine Coolant Temperature (ECT) Sensor
Control and Function
Ignition Fuel IAC Function
Crank Position Sensor Detects the crankshaft posi-

(CPS) tion and engine speed
Throttle Position Sensor Detects the open degree of
(TPS) the throttle valve
Engine Coolant Temperature Detects engine temperature
(ECT) Sensor
Manifold Absolute Pressure Detects intake air pressure
(MAP) Sensor of the intake manifold
Manifold Air Temperature Detects intake air tempera-
(MAT) Sensor ture
Oil Pressure Switch Detects Oil Pressure
Page 3A-14 90-883065 APRIL 2001

TROUBLESHOOTING AND DIAGNOSTICS

Section 3B - Troubleshooting and Diagnostics
Table of Contents
Table of Contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3B-1 Troubleshooting Without the Digital
Special Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3B-2 Diagnostic Terminal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3B-11
EFI System Diagnostic Procedures . . . . . . . .
Pressure Regulator Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3B-4
3B-4
Guardian Protection System . . . . . . . . . . . 3B-11
EFI System Troubleshooting Guide . . . . . . . . 3B-13
3
Mechanical Fuel Pump Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3B-5 Component Resistance Tests . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3B-17 B
Checking for Restricted Fuel Flow Engine Coolant Temperature (ECT) Sensor
Caused by Anti-Siphon Valves . . . . . . . . . 3B-5 Manifold Air Temperature (MAT) Sensor . 3B-17
Vacuum (Lift) Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3B-5 Fuel Injector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3B-18
Pressure Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3B-8 Main Power Relay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3B-18
EFI System Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3B-10 Manifold Absolute Pressure
Using the Digital Diagnostical (MAP) Sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3B-19
Terminal (DDT) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3B-10 Crank Position Sensor (CPS) . . . . . . . . . . 3B-19

(Plunger/Diaphragm)
FUEL
Fuel Pump:
SYSTEM
Pressure 3-6 psi
FUEL INJECTION
Range 5500–6000
90-883065 APRIL 2001 Page 3B-1

Special Tools
1. Fuel Pressure Gauge 91-16850A7 or Fuel Pressure Gauge 91-852087A3.
91-16850A7
3. Cartridge 91-880118--2
Page 3B-2 90-883065 APRIL 2001

4. Digital Diagnostic Tester 91-823686A2
5. DDT Reference Manual 90-881204--2
6. DDT Cable 10’ (3.05m) Extension 84-825003A1
7. DDT Test Harness 84-822560A5
90-883065 APRIL 2001 Page 3B-3

EFI System Diagnostic Procedures

Pressure Regulator Test
1. Install the fuel pressure gauge onto the pressure check valve (located on the VST).
2. Start the engine. Fuel pressure should be within specification.
b
91-16850A7
58821
a - Fuel Pressure Gauge

b - Pressure Relief Button
c - Drain Hose
Page 3B-4 90-883065 APRIL 2001

Mechanical Fuel Pump Test

Checking for Restricted Fuel Flow Caused by Anti-Siphon Valves
While anti-siphon valves may be helpful from a safety stand-point, they clog with debris,
they may be too small, or they may have too heavy a spring. Summarizing, the pressure
drop across these valves can, and often does, create operational problems and/or powerhead
damage by restricting fuel to the fuel pump and VST. Some symptoms of restricted (lean)
fuel flow, which could be caused by use of an anti-siphon valve, are:
1 - Loss of fuel pump pressure
2 - Loss of power
3 - High speed surging
4 - Preignition/detonation (piston dome erosion)
5 - Outboard cuts out or hesitates upon acceleration
6 - Outboard runs rough
7 - Outboard quits and cannot be restarted
8 - Outboard will not start
9 - Vapor lock
Since any type of anti-siphon device must be located between the outboard fuel inlet and
fuel tank outlet, a simple method of checking [if such a device (or bad fuel) is a problem
source] is to operate the outboard with a separate fuel supply which is known to be good,
such as a remote fuel tank.
If, after using a separate fuel supply, it is found that the anti-siphon valve is the cause of
the problem, there are 2 solutions to the problem; either 1) replace the anti-siphon valve
with one that has lighter spring tension or 2) replace it with a solenoid-operated fuel shut
off valve.
Vacuum (Lift) Test
Fuel system vacuum can be checked using a short piece of extra fuel hose, vacuum
gauge, and a “TEE” fitting.
1. Conduct test with water to the engine cooling system using one of the following methods:
• In a test tank.
• With boat/outboard lower unit in water
2. Disconnect fuel hose from inlet fitting of mechanical fuel pump.
3. Connect extra fuel hose onto the inlet fitting of pump.
4. Install “TEE” fitting into extra hose making connection as close to pump as possible.
5. Connect vacuum gauge and fuel inlet hose onto “TEE” fitting.
6. Start engine and run at 1000 RPM, normal fuel system vacuum (lift) should be to speci-
fications.
NOTE: The system vacuum test is normally performed at 1000 RPM. As engine RPM is
increased there will be a slight increase in vacuum; this increase should not exceed normal
readings.
Normal Fuel System Vacuum (Lift) @ 1000 RPM

1 – 2 in. Hg (25 – 50 mm Hg)
90-883065 APRIL 2001 Page 3B-5

7. To isolate the mechanical fuel pump from the rest of the fuel system:
a. Pinch off/restrict the fuel supply hose between the vacuum gauge and the fuel tank.
b. The mechanical fuel pump vacuum (lift) should be to specifications.
c. If vacuum reading for the pump is below specifications, the pump needs rebuilding.
Mechanical Fuel Pump Vacuum (Lift) @ 1000 RPM

4 in. Hg (101.6 mm Hg)
8. If vacuum reading is not within specifications, refer to “Vacuum (Lift) Troubleshooting”

table.
9. Stop engine, remove gauge, and reconnect fuel line to inlet fitting of fuel pump.
The fuel pump is designed to lift fuel (vertically) about 60 in. (1524 mm) if there are no other
restrictions in the system using a fuel hose that is 5/16 in. (7.9 mm) minimum diameter.
As restrictions are added, such as filters, fittings, valves etc., the amount of fuel pump lift
decreases.
d
a
b
57859
a - Extra Hose - To Inlet Fitting of Mechanical Fuel Pump
b - “TEE”-fitting
c - Vacuum Gauge
d - Fuel Supply Hose - From Fuel Tank
Page 3B-6 90-883065 APRIL 2001

Vacuum (Lift) Troubleshooting

Condition Cause Correction
Fuel system vacuum (lift) above Restricted anti-siphon valve Refer to “Checking for Restricted
specification Fuel Flow caused by Anti-Siphon
Valves” preceding
Plugged fuel tank pick-up screen Clean/replace fuel pick-up
screen
Pinched/collapsed fuel hose Inspect/replace fuel hose(s)
Dirty/plugged water separating Clean/replace water separating
fuel filter fuel filter
Restriction in fuel line thru-hull Clean/replace fitting
fitting
Restriction in fuel tank switching Clean/replace valve
valve
Restriction within primer bulb Rebuild/replace primer bulb
Fuel system vacuum (lift) below Low fuel level in fuel tank Fill tank with fuel
specifications
ifi ti Hole/cut in pick-up tube of fuel Replace fuel pick-up tube
tank
Loose fuel line connection Check/tighten all connections
Hole/cut is fuel line Inspect/replace fuel hose(s)
Loose fuel pump screws Torque screws to specification
Fuel pump gasket(s) worn or Rebuild/replace fuel pump
leaking
Fuel pump check valves/seals Rebuild/replace fuel pump
leaking
Leaky fuel pump diaphragm Rebuild/replace fuel pump
Worn/broken fuel pump springs Rebuild/replace fuel pump
Leaky fuel pump seals Rebuild/replace fuel pump
Fuel filter bowl loose Tighten fuel filter bowl
Fuel filter gasket cut/worn Replace gasket
Fuel vaporization Check for plugged fuel pump wa-
ter cooling circuit
90-883065 APRIL 2001 Page 3B-7

Pressure Test
Fuel system pressure/trouble shooting can be performed using piece of clear fuel hose 4
in. (10 cm) long, a pressure gauge, and a “TEE” fitting.
1. Conduct test with water to the engine cooling system using one of the following methods:
• In a test tank
• With boat/outboard lower unit in water
2. Disconnect fuel hose from outlet fitting of mechanical fuel pump.
3. Connect clear fuel hose onto the inlet fitting of pump.
4. Install “TEE” fitting onto clear fuel hose.
5. Connect pressure gauge and fuel outlet hose (to VST) onto “TEE” fitting.
6. Start engine and run at 1000 RPM, normal fuel system pressure should be to specifica-
tions.
Normal Fuel System Pressure @ 1000 RPM

Pressure should exceed 2 psi (13.7 kPa)
7. To isolate the mechanical fuel pump from the rest of the fuel system:
a. Pinch off/restrict the fuel hose between the “TEE” fitting and the VST.
b. The mechanical fuel pump pressure should be to specifications.
c. If pressure reading for the pump is below specifications, the pump needs rebuild-
ing.
Mechanical Fuel Pump Pressure @ 1000 RPM

Pressure should exceed 3 psi (20.7 kPa)
8. If fuel pressure reading is below specifications, refer to “Fuel Pressure Troubleshoot-

ing” table.
9. Stop engine, remove gauge/clear hoses and reconnect fuel line to outlet fitting of fuel
pump.
b a
a - Clear Hose - From Mechanical Fuel Pump Outlet to “Tee” Fitting

b - “TEE”-fitting
c - Fuel Pressure Gauge
d - Fuel Hose - To VST
Page 3B-8 90-883065 APRIL 2001

Fuel Pressure Troubleshooting

Condition Cause Correction
Fuel system pressure below Restricted anti-siphon valve Refer to “Checking for Restricted
specification Fuel Flow caused by Anti-Siphon
Valves” preceding
Low fuel level in fuel tank * Fill tank with fuel
Plugged fuel tank pick-up screen Clean/replace fuel pick-up
screen
Hole/cut in pick-up tube of fuel Replace fuel pick-up tube
tank *
Loose fuel line connection * Check/tighten all connections
Hole/cut in fuel line * Inspect/replace fuel hose(s)
Fuel line primer bulb check Replace fuel line primer bulb
valves not opening
Fuel hose/line internal diameter Use 5/16 in. (8mm) fuel hose
too small
Restriction in fuel line thru-hull Clean/replace fitting
fitting
Restriction in fuel tank switching Clean/replace valve
valve
Restriction within primer bulb Rebuild/replace primer bulb
Pinched/collapsed fuel hose Inspect/replace fuel hose(s)
Dirty/plugged water separating Clean/replace water separating
fuel filter fuel filter
Fuel filter bowl loose * Tighten fuel filter bowl
Fuel filter gasket cut/worn * Replace gasket
Loose fuel pump screws * Torque screws to specification
Fuel pump gasket(s) worn or Rebuild/replace fuel pump
leaking *
Fuel pump check valves/seals Rebuild/replace fuel pump
leaking
Leaky fuel pump diaphragm * Rebuild/replace fuel pump
Worn/broken fuel pump springs Rebuild/replace fuel pump
Leaky fuel pump seals Rebuild/replace fuel pump
Fuel vaporization Check for plugged fuel pump
water cooling circuit
NOTE: * Air bubbles may also be visible as fuel passes through the clear fuel (test) hose
installed between the mechanical fuel pump outlet fitting and the VST.
90-883065 APRIL 2001 Page 3B-9

EFI System Troubleshooting

The ECM is designed such that if a sensor fails the ECM will compensate so that the engine
does not go into an over-rich condition. Because of this, disconnecting a sensor for trouble-
shooting purposes may have no noticeable effect.
Using the Digital Diagnostical Terminal (DDT)
IMPORTANT: Any sensor that is disconnected while the engine is running will be
recorded as a fault in the ECM Fault History. Use the DDT to view and clear the fault
history when troubleshooting/repair is completed.
a c
d
b
a - Digital Diagnostic Terminal (91-823686A2)

b - Software Cartridge (91-880118--2)
c - DDT Reference Manual (90-881204--2)
d - DDT Cable 10ft. (3.05m) Extension (84-825003A1)
e - Adaptor Harness (84-822560A5)
The Quicksilver Digital Diagnostic Terminal (DDT) has been developed specifically to help
technicians diagnose and repair Mercury Marine 2 and 4 cycle engines.
Attach the diagnostic cable to the ECM diagnostic connector and plug in the software car-
tridge. You will be able to monitor sensors and ECM data values including status switches.
The ECM program can help diagnose intermittent engine problems. It will record the state
of the engine sensors and switches for a period of time and then can be played back to
review the recorded information.
Refer to the Digital Diagnostic Terminal Reference Manual for complete diagnostic proce-
dures.
Page 3B-10 90-883065 APRIL 2001

IGNITION
DDT Functions – 4-Stroke EFI Models

Software Version 1.2 (P/N 91-880118-2) 02MY EFI xx HP 995cc
ECM #859613-X Any fault will turn on fault light. Refer to
CODE
SPARK PLUG Fault Status to identify fault
CHAMPION RA8HC
GAP 0.040 (1 mm)
FIRING ORDER FAULT LIGHTS FAULT LIGHTS
SmartCraft Monitor 1-3-4-2
BATV 12.6 - 15.0
1 – Mercury Marine
IGNITION TIMING:
2 – Tool Setup IDLE ECM CONTROL IGNITION 1 5 SWITCHES
1500 - 1800 14° BTDC
6000 RPM 28° BTDC INJECTOR 2 6 MISCELLANEOUS
STATOR
0.2 - 0.3 ohm PUMP 3 7 RPM LIMIT
THIS ENGINE IS A CPS 300 - 500 ohm
IGN SEC 3 - 7 K ohm SENSORS
xx MY EFI xxx HP xxxcc 4 8 BREAK–IN
FINJ 10.0 - 13.5 ohm
PRESS 1 to CONTINUE PWR RLY 81 - 99 ohm
IAC 24 - 30 ohm
MAT/ECT
10 K ohm @ 77F/25C
RPM LIMIT 6200
ENGINE RPM
PROP RPM 5500 - 6000
Select Function: Select Auto Test: BATTERY VOLTS
TYPICAL TPS RANGE
1 - AUTO SELF TEST PWR 1 VOLTS
1 – STATIC TEST MAP PSI TPI 0.39 - 1.00v IDLE
TRIGGER ERR 3.66 - 4.80v WOT
2 - MANUAL TEST AVAILABLE PWR % MAP 3.5 - 15 psi
IAC PWM % 24 - 103 kPa
SPARK ANG _TDC FUEL 42 - 44 psi
ECT °F 290 - 303 kPa
TPS 1 VOLTS 1 FUSE - BUS +12 V
TPS % 2 FUSE - INJ/IAC/PMP
MAT °F 3 FUSE - MAIN RELAY
4 FUSE - IGN COIL
OVERTEMP/LOW OIL
PRESSURE LIMITS Fault Status List
ARE CONTROLLED BY
ENGINE GUARDIAN
Select Function: MAT INPUT HI or LO Manifold Air Temperatrure (engine) sensor input is high or low
1 - DATA MONITOR
2 - FAULT STATUS BATT VOLT HI or LOW Battery voltage is high or low
3 - SYSTEM INFO
4 - HISTORY ECT INPUT HI or LO Engine Coolant Temperature sensor input is high or low
5 - SPECIAL FUNCTIONS EST 1 thru 4 SHORT or OPEN Electronic spark trigger signal (1 thru 4) is short or open circuit
FREEZE FRAME BUFFERS FINJ 1 thru 4 SHORT or OPEN Fuel injector (1 thru 4) is short or open circuit
Select Function: Select Fault Hist: 0 thru 9
1 - FAULT HISTORY 1 – FREEZE FRAME Note: Select Desired Buffer GUARDIAN Guardian system activated
2 - RUN HISTORY
2 – FAULT SECONDS
3 - CLEAR FAULT HIST MAP INPUT HI or LO MAP sensor input high or low
4 - CLEAR RUN HIST
FREEZE FRAME BUFFERS MPRLY BACKFEED Main Power Relay is Receiving a Current Back feed
Selected Buffer: x - xxxxx MPRLY OUTPUT Main Power Relay Output

BARO PSI
FAULT SECONDS BATT VOLTS OVERSPEED Overspeed is activated
BATT VOLT HIGH BLOCK PSI
Select Function: BOAT SPEED COOL TMP OVRHT Engine overheat
BATT VOLT LOW
1 - OIL PUMP PRIME BLOCK PSI LOW AIR TMP °F
2 - CYLINDER MISFIRE COMP OVERHEAT COOL TMP °F TPS1 CKT HI or LO TPS #1 sensor input is high or low
3 - OUTPUT LOAD TEST ETC MOTOR OPEN DEMAND %
RUN TIME HR. TPS1 NO ADAPT ECM is unable to adapt to the current position of the TPS
4 - RESET BREAK-IN OIL ETC MOTOR SHORT ENGINE RPM
RPM 0 – 799
5 - CHANGE FUEL OFFSET FUEL PSI IN HI ENGINE STATE
RPM 800 – 1499 TPS1 RANGE HI or LO TPS #1 is above or below the allowable range
6 - ENGINE LOCATION FUEL PSI IN LO FPC TOTAL
RPM 1500 – 1999
7 - TRIM LIMIT GUARDIAN FREQ COUNTER
RPM 2000 – 2999 WARNING HORN Warning horn fault
KNOCK SENS1 FUEL LEVEL %
RPM 3000 – 3999
KNOCK SENS2 SHIFT
RPM 4000 – 4499
Select Load Test: OIL PSI STR LAKE/SEA TMP °F
RPM 4500– 4999
1 - IGNITION OIL REMOTE STR LOAD%
RPM 5000 – 5999
2 - FUEL INJECTOR OIL RESERVE STR MPRLY REQ
RPM 6000 +
3 - DIRECT INJECTOR MAP INPUT HI MAP PSI
BREAK-IN LEFT
4 - OIL PUMP MAP INPUT LO OIL LEVEL %
RPM LIMIT Sec
5 - FUEL PUMP MAP IDLE CHECK PORT TAB POS
GRD LIMIT Sec
6 - HORN OIL PUMP AVAILABLE PWR %
CTS TMP Sec
7 - MISCELLANEOUS OVERSPEED RUN TIME
1 - IDLE AIR CONTROL PORT OVERHEAT STAR TAB POS
8 - TACHOMETER STAR OVERHEAT TPI %
9 - RELAYS WARNING HORN TRIM POSITION
1 - MAIN POWER RELAY H2O IN FUEL
2 - FUEL PUMP RELAY
90-883065 APRIL 2001 Page 3B-11

Troubleshooting Without Digital Diagnostic Terminal

Troubleshooting without the DDT is limited to checking resistance on some of the sensors.
Typical failures usually do not involve the ECM. Connectors, set-up, and mechanical wear
are most likely at fault.
• Verify spark plug wires are securely installed (pushed on) on the coil tower.
• The engine may not run or may not run above idle with the wrong spark plugs installed.
• Swap ignition coils to see if the problem follows the coil or stays with the particular cylin-
der.
NOTE: ECMs are capable of performing a cylinder misfire test to isolate problem cylinders.
Once a suspect cylinder is located, an output load test on the ignition coil or fuel injector
can be performed using the DDT.
• Any sensor or connection can be disconnected and reconnected while the engine is
operating without damaging the ECM. Disconnecting the crank position sensor will
stop the engine.
IMPORTANT: Any sensor that is disconnected while the engine is running will be
recorded as a Fault in the ECM Fault History. Use the DDT to view and clear the fault
history when troubleshooting/repair is completed.
• If all cylinders exhibit similar symptoms, the problem is with a sensor or harness input
to the ECM.
• If problem is speed related or intermittent, it is probably connector or contact related.
Inspect connectors for corrosion, loose wires or loose pins. Secure connector seating;
use dielectric compound 92-823506-1.
• Inspect the harness for obvious damage: pinched wires, chaffing.
• Secure grounds and all connections involving ring terminals (coat with Liquid Neo-
prene 92-25711--3).
• Check fuel pump connections and fuel pump pressure.
Guardian Protection System

The guardian protection system monitors critical engine functions and will reduce engine
power accordingly in an attempt to keep the engine running within safe operating parameters.
IMPORTANT: The Guardian System cannot guarantee that powerhead damage will
not occur when adverse operating conditions are encountered. The Guardian Sys-
tem is designed to (1) warn the boat operator that the engine is operating under ad-
verse conditions and (2) reduce power by limiting maximum rpm in an attempt to
avoid or reduce the possibility of engine damage. The boat operator is ultimately
responsible for proper engine operation.
90-883065 APRIL 2001 Page 3B-13

Warning Horn/Guardian System Operation

Sound Condition Description
One Beep on key up Normal System Test
Six Beeps on key up, Failure detected with Engine should run well however,
or during a running failure. MAP, MAT *, TPS, or Flash Check service will be required.
Sum (ECM)
Three Beeps every 4 Minutes. Failure detected with: Engine will start hard, run rough
• Battery Voltage * and/or stall. Utilizing the neutral
• EST *- Open detected at key fast idle feature may assist start-
up. Short detected with engine ing. Service is required.
running
• Fuel Injector - Detected while
cranking/running *
• Coolant Sensor *
• IAC **
Intermittent Beeps Failure detected with: Engine may or may not start. If en-
• Fuel Pump - May start gine starts it easily stalls. Service
momentarily ** is required.
• Main Power Relay - No start **
• ECM Reference Voltage to
MAP/TPS - Starts but stalls
under load
Continuous Engine Overheat Engine Guardian System is acti-
vated. Power limit will vary with
level of overheat. Stop engine and
check water intake for obstruction.
Advancing throttle above idle may
provide additional cooling.
Low Oil Pressure Guardian System is activated. En-
gine power is limited to 10% of
maximum. Stop engine and check
oil level. Add oil if necessary.
Battery Voltage Engine Guardian System is acti-
Less Than 10v or More Than 16v vated. Engine power is limited to
75% of maximum.
Coolant Sensor Failure Engine Guardian System is acti-
vated. Engine power is limited to
50% of maximum. Engine over-
heat protection is compromised.
Engine Speed Limiter Exceeding 6200 rpm cuts spark/in-
jection on cylinders #2 and #3 to
reduce engine speed.
Exceeding 6350 rpm cuts spark/in-
jection on all cylinders to reduce
engine speed.
* Horn Beeps once on key up, plus failure code.

** Sticky Fault requires key off to reset.
Page 3B-14 90-883065 APRIL 2001

EFI System Troubleshooting Guide

IMPORTANT: In all instances check wiring harness integrity (especially ground connections) in boat and
on engine.
Condition Cause/Fault Warning Check
Mode
Engine cranks Lanyard stop switch is in the None Set lanyard stop switch to “RUN”
but will not
ot sta
startt “OFF” position
Weak battery or bad starter 3 Beeps Check condition of battery/starter sole-
motor. Battery voltage drops every 4 noid terminals and cables. Charge/re-
below 8 volts while cranking minutes for place battery. Inspect condition of starter
(ECM cuts out below 6 volts) low battery motor.
(Fuel pump requires 8 volts). voltage.
Blown Fuse None Replace fuse. Inspect engine wiring har-
ness and electrical components.
Fuse #2 - Fuel Injectors/IAC/Fuel Pump
Fuse #3 - Main Power Relay/Accessory
Fuse #4 - Ignition Coils
Main Power Relay Intermittent Listen for relay to “click” when key switch
Beeps is turned to “ON”
81 - 99 ohms
Between pin #22 (YEL/PUR) of port ECM
connector and (RED/BLU) wire of fuse #3
(fuse removed)
- or -
Between pin #85 and pin #86 of relay
Crank Position Sensor None 300 – 350 ohms
(CPS) Note: Between pin #5 (RED) and pin #6 (WHT)
No rpm of starboard ECM connector.
reading at - or -
tachometer
Between pin #1 (RED) and pin #2 (WHT)
of CPS connector.
Electric fuel pump Intermittent Listen for pump. Fuel pump should run 2
Beeps seconds after key switch is turned to
“RUN” position.
32 - 41 ohms
Between pin #19 (BLK/BLU) and pin # 23
(RED/BLU)
- or -
Between pins of fuel pump connector.
Flywheel misaligned None Remove flywheel and inspect flywheel
key/key way
Engine Coolant Temperature 3 Beeps See ECT sensor resistance chart -
(ECT) sensor every 4 Section 3B “ELECTRONIC FUEL
minutes INJECTION”.
Advancing the remote control fast idle
feature or advancing the tiller handle
throttle grip half way may assist starting.
90-883065 APRIL 2001 Page 3B-15

on engine.
Mode
Engine cranks, Remote control to engine None Clean and inspect male and female
starts and stalls wiring harness connection is connections.
poor
Air in fuel system/lines None Crank and start engine several times.
Manifold Absolute Pressure 6 Beeps at See MAP sensor resistance chart -
(MAP) sensor key up or Section 3B “ELECTRONIC FUEL
failure INJECTION”.
Throttle Position Sensor 6 Beeps at Typical TPI range with DDT:
(TPS) key up or Idle 0.39-1.0 volts, WOT 3.66-4.80 volts.
failure
Idle Air Control (IAC) 3 Beeps 20 - 24 ohms
every 4 Between pin #20 (WHT/ORG) and pin
minutes #23 (RED/BLU) of starboard ECM con-
nector.
- or -
Between pin A and pin B of IAC.
ECM reference voltage to Intermittent 5 volts
MAP/TPS Beeps Between PUR/YEL pin of MAP sensor
wiring harness connector and engine
ground (key switch to “RUN”).
Fuel pressure at VST fitting None See fuel pressure test - Section 3B
“ELECTRONIC FUEL INJECTION”.
Flywheel misaligned None Remove flywheel and inspect flywheel key
and key way
Engine Idles Engine Coolant Temperature 3 Beeps See ECT sensor resistance chart -
Fast after warm- (ECT) sensor every 4 Section 3B “ELECTRONIC FUEL
up minutes INJECTION”.
(900-1100rpm)
Poor off idle or Fuel injector 3 Beeps 10.0 - 13.5 ohms
WOT running every 4 Between fuel injector pin #1 and pin #2.
quality minutes
- or -
Between (removed) fuse #2 (RED/BLU)
wire and port ECM connector:
Pin #17 (PNK/BRN) Fuel Injector #1
Pin #2 (PNK/RED) Fuel Injector #2
Pin #1 (PNK/ORG) Fuel Injector #3
Pin #18 (PNK/YEL) Fuel Injector #4
Ignition coil (EST) *** 3 Beeps See ignition coil resistance chart -
every 4 Section 2A “IGNITION”
minutes
Fuel pressure at VST fitting None See fuel pressure test - Section 3B
Fuel filter plugged None Replace fuel filter
Improper spark plugs None Use recommended resistive spark plugs
Loose grounds None Check all ground connections.
Flywheel timing tooth pattern None Check tooth pattern for partially missing
or damaged teeth
Fouled spark plug(s) None Replace spark plug(s).
Page 3B-16 90-883065 APRIL 2001

on engine.
Mode
Poor idle quality Crank Position Sensor None 300 - 350 ohms
(CPS) Between pin #5 (RED) and pin #6 (WHT)
of starboard ECM connector.
- or -
Between pin #1 (RED) and pin #2 (WHT)
of CPS connector.
Manifold Absolute Pressure 6 Beeps at See MAP sensor resistance chart -
(MAP) sensor key up or Section 3B “ELECTRONIC FUEL
Throttle Position Sensor 6 Beeps at Typical TPI range with DDT:
(TPS) key up or Idle 0.39-1.0 volts, WOT 3.66-4.80 volts.
failure
(ECT) sensor every 4 Section 3B “ELECTRONIC FUEL
minutes INJECTION”.
Manifold Air Temperature 6 Beeps at See MAT sensor resistance chart –-

(MAT) sensor key up or Section 3B “ELECTRONIC FUEL
Fuel injector 3 Beeps 10.0 - 13.5 ohms
every 4 Between fuel injector pin #1 and pin #2.
minutes
- or -
Between (removed) fuse #2 (RED/BLU)
wire and port ECM connector:
Pin #17 (PNK/BRN) Fuel Injector #1
Pin #2 (PNK/RED) Fuel Injector #2
Pin #1 (PNK/ORG) Fuel Injector #3
Pin #18 (PNK/YEL) Fuel Injector #4
Ignition coil (EST) *** 3 Beeps See ignition coil resistance chart -
every 4 Section 2A “IGNITION”
minutes
Idle Air Control (IAC) 3 Beeps 20 - 24 ohms
every 4 Between pin #20 (WHT/ORG) and pin
minutes #23 (RED/BLU) of starboard ECM con-
nector.
- or -
Between pin A and pin B of IAC.
Fuel pressure at VST fitting. None See fuel pressure test - Section 3B
Loose grounds None Check all ground connections.
Fouled spark plug(s) None Replace spark plug(s).
*** The ECM will only monitor the EST connection to the ignition coil, use resistance tests and/or spark gap
test to confirm an ignition coil failure.
90-883065 APRIL 2001 Page 3B-17

on engine.
Mode
Engine runs rich Fuel pressure regulator None 42 - 44 psi (290 – 303 kPa) at VST fitting
- Section 3B “ELECTRONIC FUEL
INJECTION”
(ECT) Sensor every 4 Section 3B Electronic Fuel Injection
minutes
Thermostat stuck open None Remove and inspect thermostat.
Section 4A “CYLINDER HEAD”
Speed Reduction Low oil pressure or GUARDIAN Check engine oil level and add oil as
Engine RPM grounded oil pressure switch Continuous needed.
Limited to 2000 lead Horn Above Remove oil pressure switch and install oil
10% Power pressure gauge, (warm engine) oil pres-
Setting sure should be:
Above 2.9 psi (20.0 kPa) at idle
30-40 psi. (207-278 kPa) at 3000 rpm.
See Oil Pressure Switch test -
Section 4B “Cylinder Block/Crankcase”.
Check for short between pin #7 (BLU) of
starboard ECM connector and open
connector of oil pressure switch.
Speed Reduction Engine Overheat GUARDIAN Engine Guardian System is activated.
Engine RPM Continuous Power limit will vary with level of overheat.
Limited Stop engine and check water intake for
obstruction.
Advancing throttle above idle may provide
additional cooling.
Battery Voltage GUARDIAN Engine Guardian System is activated.
Less Than 10v or More Continuous Engine power is limited to 75% of maxi-
Than 16v Horn Above mum.
75% Power
Setting
Engine Coolant Temperature GUARDIAN Engine Guardian System is activated.
(ECT) Sensor Failure Continuous Engine power is limited to 50% of maxi-
Horn Above mum. Engine overheat protection is com-
50% Power promised
Setting
Page 3B-18 90-883065 APRIL 2001

Component Resistance Tests

NOTE: Refer to section 1C General Information (powerhead reference views) for location
of sensors.
NOTE: If using DMT 2000 turn the selector switch to Ω Allow the meter to auto-range.

1. Place the engine coolant temperature sensor in a container filled with water.
2. Place a thermometer in the water and slowly heat the water.
3. Measure the resistance when the specified temperature is reached. If the reading is
out of specification, replace the sensor.
a - Engine Coolant Temperature(ECT) Sensor
270
255
240
Test Water Temperature ( F)

225
210
195
Temperature Sensor
180
165
150
135
120
105
90
75
60
45
30
15
0
0 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20 22 24 26 28 30 32
Resistance (k)
90-883065 APRIL 2001 Page 3B-19

Fuel Injector
b a

(ANALOG) (
RED BLACK
PIN A PIN B RX1 10 - 13
13.5
5
Main Power Relay
85 86

(ANALOG) (
RED BLACK
PIN 85 PIN 86 RX1 81 - 91
Page 3B-20 90-883065 APRIL 2001


b
c a
a - Black/Orange
b - Yellow
c - Purple/Yellow
(ANALOG) (
RED BLACK
PIN A PIN B
95 - 105 K
PIN A PIN C RX1K 3.9 - 4.3 K
PIN B PIN C 95 - 105 K
Crank Position Sensor

(ANALOG) (
RED BLACK
RED WHT RX1 300 - 350
90-883065 APRIL 2001 Page 3B-21

SERVICE PROCEDURES

Section 3C - Service Procedures
Table of Contents
Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3C-1 Throttle Position Sensor (TPS)
Special Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3C-2 Removal/Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3C-31
Intake Manifold . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Vapor Separator Components . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3C-4
3C-6
ECM Removal/Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3C-32
3
Vapor Separator Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3C-8 Removal/Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3C-33 C
Fuel Pump . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3C-10 Engine Coolant Temperature (ECT)
Fuel Lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3C-12 Sensor Removal/Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3C-34
Torque Sequence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3C-14 Low Pressure Fuel Line/Fuel Pump . . . . . . . . 3C-35
Intake Manifold Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3C-15 Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3C-35
Releasing Fuel Pressure in the Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3C-36
High-Pressure Fuel Line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3C-15 Disassembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3C-37
Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3C-16 Cleaning/Inspection/Repair . . . . . . . . . . . . 3C-38
Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3C-19 Check Valve Inspection/Replacement . . . 3C-38
Throttle Body Removal/Installation . . . . . . . . 3C-23 Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3C-39
Idle Air Control (IAC) Removal/Installation . . 3C-24 Fuel Filter Disassembly/Assembly . . . . . . . . . 3C-41
Fuel Injectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3C-25 Vapor Separator (VST) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3C-42
Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3C-25 Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3C-42
Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3C-26 Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3C-43
Manifold Absolute Pressure (MAP) Disassembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3C-44
Sensor Removal/Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3C-27 Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3C-46
Fuel Distribution Manifold . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3C-28 Pressure Regulator Removal/Installation . . . 3C-48
Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3C-28 High Pressure Fuel Line
Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3C-29 Removal/Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3C-49
Manifold Air Temperature (MAT)
Sensor Removal/Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3C-30
Specifications
(Plunger/Diaphragm)
FUEL
Fuel Pump:
SYSTEM
Pressure 3-6 psi
FUEL INJECTION
Range 5500–6000
90-883065 APRIL 2001 Page 3C-1

SERVICE PROCEDURES
Special Tools
1. DMT 2000 Digital Tachometer Multi-meter P/N 91-854009A1.
2. Digital Diagnostic Terminal P/N 91-823686A2
3. DDT Cartridge 91-822608-2
4. Fuel Injector Cap Tool 91-883877A1
58816
Page 3C-2 90-883065 APRIL 2001

SERVICE PROCEDURES
5. Clamp Tool Kit 91-803146A2
57316
a - Clamp Tool 91-803146T

6. Fuel Pressure Gauge 91-16850A7 or Fuel Pressure Gauge 91-852087A3.
91-16850A7
90-883065 APRIL 2001 Page 3C-3

SERVICE PROCEDURES
INTAKE MANIFOLD
26
24
66 26
27
22
1 28
2 18
17
26
19 16 21
20
14
15
5
13
66
25 12 23
3 4
6
7
11
8
10
66 Loctite 242 (92-809821)
Page 3C-4 90-883065 APRIL 2001

SERVICE PROCEDURES
INTAKE MANIFOLD
TORQUE
REF.
REF
1 1 INTAKE MANIFOLD
2 4 GASKET
3 1 SCREW 31 3.5
4 1 BRACKET
5 1 NUT 75 8.5
6 1 IDLE AIR CONTROL (IAC)
7 1 FUEL DISTRIBUTION MANIFOLD
8 4 INJECTOR
9 2 SCREW 31 3.5
10 4 SCREW 31 3.5
11 4 CLIP
12 1 HOSE
13 1 THROTTLE BODY
14 1 GASKET
15 2 SCREW 31 3.5
16 1 THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR (TPS)
17 2 SCREW 18 2
18 1 MANIFOLD ABSOLUTE PRESSURE (MAP) SENSOR
19 1 MANIFOLD AIR TEMPERATURE (MAT) SENSOR 12.5 1.4
20 1 O RING
21 1 SOUND ATTENUATOR
22 8 SCREW (M6 X 25) 75 8.5
1 RESTRICTOR (50)
23
1 RESTRICTOR (40)
24 1 BREATHER HOSE
25 1 SCREW (M6 X 30) 75 8.5
26 3 STA-STRAP
27 1 SCREW (10-16 X .625) Drive Tight
28 1 RETAINER
90-883065 APRIL 2001 Page 3C-5

SERVICE PROCEDURES
VAPOR SEPARATOR COMPONENTS

66 11
12 9
13 2
3 2
4 1
9 14 22
15
6 11
11
8
7
17 21
20 16
5 24
9 10 23
19
9
26
12
66 12
25 18
33
27
29
41
40 28
43
33 44 66
46
34
9
32 45
38
39
30
35
9
37
36 31

66 Loctite 242 (92-809821)
Page 3C-6 90-883065 APRIL 2001

SERVICE PROCEDURES

TORQUE
REF.
REF
1 1 COVER KIT
2 2 FITTING
3 1 ELECTRICAL PASS-THRU KIT 45-55 5.1-6.2
4 1 O RING
5 1 RETAINER
6 1 FITTING 45-55 5.1-6.2
7 1 FITTING 45-55 5.1-6.2
8 1 DIAGNOSTIC VALVE 40-50 4.5-5.7
9 1 CAP
10 1 DRAIN TUBE
11 5 SCREW 35-40 4-4.5
12 6 SCREW 20-24 2.3-2.7
13 1 REGULATOR
14 1 O RING
15 1 O RING
16 1 SEAL KIT 30-35 3.4-4
17 1 GASKET
18 1 FLOAT KIT
19 1 FLOAT SHAFT
20 1 INLET NEEDLE KIT
21 1 VENT HOSE
22 1 STA STRAP
23 1 FUEL BAFFLE
24 1 HARNESS
25 1 PUMP KIT
26 1 SLEEVE
27 1 GROMMET
28 1 FUEL BOWL KIT
29 1 GASKET
30 1 DRAIN SCREW 30-35 3.4-4
31 1 FITTING Press to Shoulder
32 1 FUEL COOLER BODY KIT
33 4 CLAMP
34 2 FITTING 45-55 5.1-6.2
35 5 PLUG
36 2 ELBOW FITTING Install 5 to 7 Turns
37 1 ELBOW FITTING 45-55 5.1-6.2
10.8- 14.7-
38 1 SCREW
12.5 17
39 1 GASKET
40 1 HOSE (1-5/8)
41 1 HOSE (4-1/2)
42 1 DRAIN HOSE
90-883065 APRIL 2001 Page 3C-7

SERVICE PROCEDURES

66 11
12 9
13 2
3 2
4 1
9 14 22
15
6 11
11
8
7
17 21
20 16
5 24
9 10 23
19
9
26
12
66 12
25 18
33
27
29
41
40 28
43
33 44 66
46
34
9
32 45
38
39
30
35
9
37
36 31

66 Loctite 242 (92-809821)
Page 3C-8 90-883065 APRIL 2001

SERVICE PROCEDURES

TORQUE
REF.
REF
43 3 BUSHING
44 3 GROMMET
45 3 SCREW (M6 X 25) 45 5.1
46 3 WASHER
90-883065 APRIL 2001 Page 3C-9

SERVICE PROCEDURES
FUEL PUMP
21
20 22
23 19
13 A
B
24 13
18
15 10
25
11
13
14
13
8
13
17
13 9
13
1 2
16 13
12
C
A = TO VAPOR SEPARATOR COVER
B = TO VST COOLER
C = TO TELL TALE
3
3
4
3
5
3 3
66
1
3
6
7
3
66 Loctite 242 (92-809821)
Page 3C-10 90-883065 APRIL 2001

SERVICE PROCEDURES
FUEL PUMP
TORQUE
REF.
REF
1 1 FUEL PUMP
2 4 SCREW
3 1 DIAPHRAGM/O-RING KIT
4 1 SPRING
5 4 NUT
6 1 SPRING
7 1 CAP
8 1 COWL DEFLECTOR
9 2 SCREW (M6 X 30) 75 8.5
10 1 TUBING (34 IN.)
12 1 TUBING (6 IN.)
13 AR STA STRAP
14 1 TUBING (8 IN.)
15 1 FUEL FILTER
17 1 FUEL CONNECTOR
18 1 BUSHING
19 1 GROMMET
20 1 WASHER
21 1 NUT (M6) 45 5.1
22 1 BRACKET
23 2 SCREW (M6 X 13) 75 8.5
24 1 CONDUIT (13 IN.)
90-883065 APRIL 2001 Page 3C-11

SERVICE PROCEDURES
FUEL LINES
Page 3C-12 90-883065 APRIL 2001

SERVICE PROCEDURES
FUEL LINES
TORQUE
REF.
REF
2 1 FUEL LINE
3 1 FUEL FILTER
4 1 PROTECTIVE SLEEVE
5 1 FUEL LINE
90-883065 APRIL 2001 Page 3C-13

SERVICE PROCEDURES
Torque Sequence
INTAKE MANIFOLD FLANGE
3
4
1
2
5
6
Page 3C-14 90-883065 APRIL 2001

SERVICE PROCEDURES
Intake Manifold Assembly

WARNING
line or the vapor separator. If the fuel pressure is not released, pressurized fuel
may spray out.
Releasing Fuel Pressure in the High-Pressure Fuel Line

1. Install the fuel pressure gauge onto the pressure check valve.
2. Place the drain hose into a container.
3. Push the relief button and release the pressure.
b
91-16850A7
58821
a - Fuel Pressure Gauge
b - Pressure Relief Button
c - Drain Hose
90-883065 APRIL 2001 Page 3C-15

SERVICE PROCEDURES
Removal
4. Push in on the fuel injector harness connector retaining clip and unplug the harness
from each fuel injector. It is not necessary to remove the retaining clip from the connec-
tor.
5. Unplug the Idle Air Control (IAC) connector.
6. AFTER RELIEVING PRESSURE disconnect the high pressure fuel line from the fuel
distribution manifold by depressing the locking tab and pulling back on the fuel line.
7. Remove the flywheel cover.
f
g
e
b
d
c
58860
a - Fuel Injector (4)

b - Harness Connector Retaining Clip
c - Idle Air Control (IAC) Connector
d - Throttle Air Bypass Hose
e - High Pressure Fuel Line
f - Locking Tab
g - Flywheel Cover
Page 3C-16 90-883065 APRIL 2001

SERVICE PROCEDURES
8. Remove intake assembly mounting screws and remove intake assembly.
58817
a - Intake Assembly Mounting Screw (6) M6 x 25

b - Intake Assembly Mounting Screw (1) M6 x 30
c - Intake Assembly Mounting Screw (2) M6 x 40
9. Disconnect throttle link rod from the throttle body ball socket.
a - Throttle Link Rod

b - Throttle Body Ball Socket
90-883065 APRIL 2001 Page 3C-17

SERVICE PROCEDURES
10. Disconnect ECM harness connectors.

11. Remove the ECM mounting screws and washers. Remove the ECM from the mounting
plate.
b
e
a c
b
b d 58811
a - ECM Harness Connectors d - J-Clip

b - ECM Mounting Screw (3) M6 x 25 e - Washers (3)
c - ECM
12. Disconnect the following sensors: Manifold Absolute Pressure (MAP), Manifold Air
Temperature (MAT), and Throttle Position Sensor (TPS).
13. Cut sta-strap and remove crankcase breather hose from sound attenuator. Remove
intake assembly from engine.
d
a
f
e
a - Manifold Absolute Pressure (MAP) Sensor

b - MAP Sensor Retaining Clip
c - Screw (10-16 x .625)
d - Manifold Air Temperature (MAT) Sensor Connector
e - Throttle Position Sensor (TPS) Connector
f - Crankcase Breather Hose
g - Sound Attenuator
Page 3C-18 90-883065 APRIL 2001

SERVICE PROCEDURES
Installation
1. Install intake manifold assembly to engine. Make sure O-rings are in place. Tighten
screws (in sequence shown) to specified torque.
3
b
4
66
1
2
66 a
5
6
7
58817
66 Loctite 242 (92-809821)
a - Intake Assembly Mounting Screw (6) M6 x 25

b - Intake Assembly Mounting Screw M6 x 30
c - Intake Assembly Mounting Screw M6 x 40
Intake Assembly Mounting Screw Torque
75 lb-in (8.5 Nm)
2. Connect throttle link rod to the throttle body ball socket.

IMPORTANT: Check for proper throttle link rod adjustment as outlined in section 7A.
a - Throttle Link Rod

b - Throttle Body Ball Socket
90-883065 APRIL 2001 Page 3C-19

SERVICE PROCEDURES
3. Connect the following sensors: Manifold Absolute Pressure (MAP), Manifold Air Tem-
perature (MAT) Sensor, and Throttle Position Sensor (TPS).
4. Install MAP sensor retaining clip and tighten screw to specified torque.
5. Install crankcase breather hose into sound attenuator. Secure with sta-strap.
d
a
f
e
g
a - Manifold Absolute Pressure (MAP) Sensor
b - MAP Sensor Retaining Clip
c - Screw (10-16 x .625)
d - Manifold Air Temperature (MAT) Sensor
e - Throttle Position Sensor (TPS)
f - Crankcase Breather Hose
g - Sound Attenuator
Page 3C-20 90-883065 APRIL 2001

SERVICE PROCEDURES
6. Connect the fuel line to the fuel distribution manifold. Push on until locked into place.
7. Route injector harness as shown and plug-in the fuel injector and IAC connectors.
8. Install flywheel cover. Tighten screws to specified torque.
f
g
c d
58860

b - Fuel Injector Connector (4)
c - Idle Air Control (IAC) Connector
d - Throttle Air Bypass Hose
e - Fuel Line
f - Locking Tab
g - Flywheel Cover
Flywheel Cover Screw Torque
75 lb-in (8.5 Nm)
90-883065 APRIL 2001 Page 3C-21

SERVICE PROCEDURES
9. Install ECM to mounting plate. Tighten mounting screws to specified torque.

10. Plug in ECM harness connectors.
b
e
a c
b
b d 58811
a - ECM Harness Connectors

b - ECM Mounting Screw (3) M6 x 25
c - ECM
d - J-Clip
e - Washers (3)
ECM Mounting Screw Torque
45 lb-in (5.1 Nm)
Page 3C-22 90-883065 APRIL 2001

SERVICE PROCEDURES
Throttle Body Removal/Installation

REMOVAL
1. Remove the intake manifold assembly. Refer to Intake Manifold Assembly Removal.
2. Remove throttle body mounting screws and remove throttle body assembly from the
intake assembly.
INSTALLATION
1. Lubricate O-ring and install throttle body to intake assembly. Tighten screws to specified
torque.
2. Install the intake assembly. Refer to Intake Assembly Installation.
b
a
a - Throttle Body Mounting Screws (2) 25mm long

b - Throttle Body Assembly
c - Seal
d - Intake Assembly
Throttle Body Mounting Screw Torque
31 lb-in (3.5 Nm)
90-883065 APRIL 2001 Page 3C-23

SERVICE PROCEDURES
Idle Air Control (IAC) Removal/Installation

REMOVAL
1. Disconnect the IAC harness connector.
2. Remove IAC mounting screw.
3. Disconnect the throttle air bypass hose and remove the IAC valve.
INSTALLATION
1. Install IAC and secure with mounting screw.
2. Connect IAC harness connector and bypass hose.
b c
a d
a - IAC Mounting Screw
b - IAC Harness Connector
c - Throttle Air Bypass Hose
d - Idle Air Control (IAC) Valve
IAC Mounting Screw Torque
31 lb-in (3.5 Nm)
Page 3C-24 90-883065 APRIL 2001

SERVICE PROCEDURES
Fuel Injectors
WARNING
may spray out.
Removal
1. Remove fuel injector cap retaining clips and screws.
2. Push in on the harness connector retaining clip and unplug the harness from each fuel
injector.
3. Using service tool 91-883877A1, pry injector cap from the injector.
4. Remove fuel injectors from intake manifold.
b
d
91-883877A1
b - Fuel Injector Cap (4)
c - Fuel Injector Cap Retaining Clip (4)
d - Screw (4)
e - Harness Connector Retaining Clip (4)
90-883065 APRIL 2001 Page 3C-25

SERVICE PROCEDURES
Installation
1. Install fuel injector cap by pushing it on the fuel injector until it bottoms out.
2. Lubricate O-rings and install fuel injectors into intake manifold.
3. Install fuel injector cap retaining screws and tighten to specified torque. Install fuel in-
jector cap retaining clips so that the locking teeth line up with the locking rib on the fuel
injector (as shown).
4. Connect the harness connectors to each fuel injector. Push the connector on until the
retaining clip locks in place.
f
g h
58823
b d

d - Fuel Injector Cap Retaining Screw (4)
e - Fuel Injector Harness Retaining Clip (4)
f - Fuel Injector Harness Connector (4)
g - Locking Teeth
h - Locking Rib
Fuel Injector Cap Retaining Screw Torque
31 lb-in (3.5 Nm)
Page 3C-26 90-883065 APRIL 2001

SERVICE PROCEDURES

Removal/Installation
REMOVAL
1. Remove the intake assembly. Refer to Intake Assembly Removal.
2. Remove the MAP sensor retaining screw and bracket. Remove the MAP from the intake
by pulling and twisting simultaneously (pulls out hard).
INSTALLATION
1. Lubricate seal and push MAP into intake assembly.
2. Install retaining clip and screw. Tighten screw securely.
3. Install intake assembly. Refer to Intake Assembly Installation.
a - MAP Sensor
b - Retaining Clip
c - Screw
90-883065 APRIL 2001 Page 3C-27

SERVICE PROCEDURES
Fuel Distribution Manifold

WARNING
may spray out.
Removal
1. Remove fuel injector cap retaining screws.
2. Remove the fuel injector cap retaining clips.
3. Using service tool 91-883877A1, pry the fuel injector cap off of each fuel injector.
4. Remove fuel distribution manifold mounting screws.
5. AFTER RELIEVING FUEL PRESSURE disconnect the high pressure fuel line by de-
pressing the locking tab and pulling back. Remove fuel distribution manifold.
f e
d
91-883877A1
a - Fuel Injector Cap Retaining Screw (4)

d - Fuel Distribution Manifold Mounting Screw (2)
e - Fuel Distribution Manifold
f - High Pressure Fuel Line Locking Tab
Page 3C-28 90-883065 APRIL 2001

SERVICE PROCEDURES
Installation
1. Install fuel distribution manifold and tighten mounting screws to specified torque.
2. Push fuel injector cap onto the fuel injector until the cap bottoms out on the injector.
3. Install fuel injector cap retaining screws and tighten securely. Install fuel injector cap
retaining clips so that the locking teeth line up with the locking rib on the fuel injector
(as shown).
4. Connect high pressure fuel line. Push on until locking tab snaps in place.
f
g e
91-883877A1
a - Fuel Injector Cap Retaining Screw (4)

c - Fuel Injector (4)
d - Fuel Injector Cap Retaining Clip (4)
e - Fuel Distribution Manifold Mounting Screw (2)
f - Fuel Distribution Manifold
g - High Pressure Fuel Line
Mounting Screw Torque
31 lb-in (3.5 Nm)
90-883065 APRIL 2001 Page 3C-29

SERVICE PROCEDURES

REMOVAL
1. Remove the intake manifold assembly. Refer to Intake Manifold Assembly Remov-
al.
2. Disconnect manifold air temperature (MAT) sensor connector.
3. Unscrew MAT sensor from the intake manifold assembly. Inspect o-ring and replace
if necessary.
INSTALLATION
CAUTION
Overtightening the manifold air temperature (MAT) sensor can lead to failing the
plastic threads. Be sure to tighten to the specified torque.
1. Lubricate O-ring and screw in air temperature sensor. Tighten to specified torque.
2. Connect MAT sensor connector.
3. Install the intake manifold assembly. Refer to Intake Manifold Assembly Installa-
tion.
b
c
a - Manifold Air Temperature (MAT) Sensor

b - MAT Sensor Connector
c - O-ring
Air Temperature Sensor Torque
12.5 lb-in. (1.4 Nm)
Page 3C-30 90-883065 APRIL 2001

SERVICE PROCEDURES
Throttle Position Sensor (TPS) Removal/Installation

REMOVAL
1. Remove the intake manifold assembly. Refer to Intake Manifold Assembly Remov-
al.
2. Disconnect throttle position sensor (TPS) connector.
3. Remove mounting screws and remove throttle position sensor.
INSTALLATION
1. Install throttle position sensor. Tighten screws to specified torque.
2. Connect throttle position sensor connector.
3. Install the intake manifold assembly. Refer to Intake Manifold Assembly Installa-
tion.
b
a
a - Throttle Position Sensor (TPS)

b - TPS Connector
c - TPS Mounting Screws(2) 15 mm long
Throttle Position Sensor Mounting Screw Torque
18 lb-in (2 Nm)
90-883065 APRIL 2001 Page 3C-31

SERVICE PROCEDURES
ECM Removal/Installation
Removal
1. Remove ECM harness connectors.
2. Remove the ECM mounting screws and washers. Remove the ECM from the mounting
plate.
Installation
1. Install ECM onto mounting bracket (position the j-clip as shown). Install screws and
washers. Tighten screws to specified torque.
2. Connect ECM harness connectors.
b
e
a c
b
b d 58811
a - ECM Harness Connectors

b - ECM Mounting Screw (3) M6 x 25
c - ECM
d - J-clip
e - Washers (3)
ECM Mounting Screw Torque

45 lb. in. (5.1 N·m)
Page 3C-32 90-883065 APRIL 2001

SERVICE PROCEDURES
Crank Position Sensor Removal/Installation

1. Disconnect sensor from wiring harness.
2. Remove sensor mounting screws.
3. Reverse steps for installation. Tighten screws to specified torque.
58228
a - Crank Position Sensor

b - Harness Connector
c - Screw (2) M5x16
Crank Position Sensor Mounting Screw Torque

45 lb. in. (5.1 N·m)
90-883065 APRIL 2001 Page 3C-33

SERVICE PROCEDURES

1. Disconnect sensor from wiring harness.
2. Remove sensor from exhaust cover.
3. Reverse steps for installation. Tighten to specified torque.
CAUTION
Over-tightening the coolant temperature sensor can lead to failing the plastic
threads. Be sure to tighten to the specified torque.
b c
58225
a - Harness Connector
b - Temperature Sensor
c - Exhaust Cover
Temperature Sensor Mounting Torque

15 lb. in. (1.7 N·m)
Page 3C-34 90-883065 APRIL 2001

SERVICE PROCEDURES
Low Pressure Fuel Line/Fuel Pump

Removal
1. Cut sta-straps and remove fuel pump inlet/outlet hoses, and fuel cooler water inlet/out-
let hoses.
2. Remove fuel pump mounting bolts and cowl deflector.
3. Separate fuel pump from cylinder head cover.
e
c
a
g f
d
58814
a - Inlet Fuel Hose (from filter)

b - Outlet Fuel Hose (to VST)
c - Fuel Cooler Water Inlet Hose (from VST fuel cooler)
d - Fuel Cooler Water Outlet Hose (to tell-tale outlet)
e - Mounting Screw (2) M6 x 30
f - Cowl Deflector
g - Fuel Pump
90-883065 APRIL 2001 Page 3C-35

SERVICE PROCEDURES
Installation
1. Secure fuel pump and cowl deflector to cylinder head cover with screws. Tighten to
specified torque.
2. Connect fuel lines to pump and secure with new sta-straps.
c
h
a b
66
e
a
e
c d
b
g f
58814
66 Loctite 242 (92-809821)
a - Inlet Fuel Hose (from fuel filter)

b - Outlet Fuel Hose (to VST)
c - Fuel Cooler Water Inlet Hose (from VST fuel cooler)
d - Fuel Cooler Water Outlet Hose (to tell-tale outlet)
e - Mounting Screw (2) M6 x 30
f - Cowl Deflector
g - Fuel Pump
h - Conduit (13 in.)
i - Conduit (21 in.)
j - Sta-strap
Fuel Pump Mounting Screw Torque

75 lb. in. (8.5 N·m)
Page 3C-36 90-883065 APRIL 2001

SERVICE PROCEDURES
Disassembly
IMPORTANT: Before separating fuel pump components mark each component with
an awl or marker. This will ensure the components are oriented correctly during
reassembly.
1. Remove screws to separate pump cover, cover seal, diaphragm and valve body from
pump base.
a
h
b
c
d
e
f
g
28378
a - Screws (4) e - Valve Body
b - Pump Cover f - Pump Base
c - Cover Seal g - Nuts (4)
d - Diaphragm h - I.D. Marks (Create These)
2. Rotate plunger to line up slots.
a b
53615
a - Slots Offset
b - Slots Aligned
3. Compress pump assembly to free spring load on pin.

4. Tilt assembly to allow pin to slide out.
53617
a - Pin
90-883065 APRIL 2001 Page 3C-37

SERVICE PROCEDURES
Cleaning/Inspection/Repair
1. Inspect springs for damage, replace if necessary.
2. Inspect cover seal and diaphragm, replace if damaged.
b a
a - Cover Seal
b - Diaphragm
Check Valve Inspection/Replacement

1. Inspect the check valves for damage, replace if necessary.
REMOVAL
2. If replacement is needed remove old check valves by grabbing the seal and pulling.
a
58831
a - Check Valve/Seal Assembly (2)
Page 3C-38 90-883065 APRIL 2001

SERVICE PROCEDURES
INSTALLATION
1. Fabricate an installation tool to the dimensions specified.
2. Lubricate the end of the seal and push the assembly into the valve body.
NOTE: Drill into the handle using a 5/64 in. (2mm) drill bit. Insert the peg into the drilled
hole until 0.312 in. (8mm) remains exposed.
c .312 in. ±0.010 in. 58832

(7.7 - 8.2mm)
5/64 in. dia.

(2mm)
b 0.375 in. dia.
(9.5mm)
a
58831
a - Check Valve/Seal Assembly (2)
b - Installation Tool (make yourself)
c - Valve Body
Assembly
1. Assemble springs, diaphragm, and plunger onto pump base.
a - Diaphragm
b - Diaphragm Spring
c - Pump Body
d - Spring
e - Plunger
90-883065 APRIL 2001 Page 3C-39

SERVICE PROCEDURES
2. Line up slots and compress assembly.

3. Insert pin into hole.
c
b
a - Pump Body
b - Slots
c - Pin
4. Rotate plunger 90° to offset slots.
a b
53615
a - Slots Aligned
b - Slots Offset
5. Assemble valve body, diaphragm, seal, and cover to pump base. Be sure to line up
I.D. marks that were made before disassembly. Apply Loctite 242 to screws and se-
cure with nuts.
NOTE: Seal installs in one direction only.
a
h
b
c
d
e
f
g
66
66 Loctite 242 (92-809821)
28378
a - Screws (4) e - Valve Body
b - Pump Cover f - Pump Base
c - Cover Seal g - Nuts (4)
d - Diaphragm h - I.D. Marks
Page 3C-40 90-883065 APRIL 2001

SERVICE PROCEDURES
6. Inspect O-ring and replace if necessary. Install onto fuel pump assembly.
53620
a - O-ring
Fuel Filter Disassembly/Assembly

DISASSEMBLY
1. Unscrew fuel filter cup and remove fuel filter element and o-rings.
2. Inspect o-rings and replace if necessary.
3. Clean fuel filter cup and replace fuel filter element if needed.
ASSEMBLY
1. Lubricate o-rings and install fuel filter element.
2. Install fuel filter cup and hand tighten.
a b
a - Fuel Filter Assembly d - O-ring

b - Fuel Filter Cap e - Fuel Filter Cup
c - Fuel Filter Element
90-883065 APRIL 2001 Page 3C-41

SERVICE PROCEDURES
Vapor Separator (VST)

WARNING
may spray out.
Removal
1. Release fuel pressure. Refer to Releasing Fuel Pressure in the High Pressure Fuel
Line.
2. Remove the lower cowl. Drain the fuel from the VST into a suitable container.
3. Disconnect fuel lines, water lines and high pressure fuel pump harness connector.
4. Remove vapor separator (VST) mounting screws and remove VST from engine.
c
h
g
d
e a
b
f
58812
a - VST Drain Valve

b - VST Drain Hose
c - Fuel Hose (Mechanical Fuel Pump to VST)
d - High Pressure Fuel Hose (Fuel Cooler to Fuel Distribution Manifold)
e - Water Hose (VST Fuel Cooler to Mechanical Fuel Pump Fuel Cooler)
f - Water Hose (Exhaust Cover to Fuel Cooler)
g - VST Vent Hose
h - High Pressure Fuel Pump Harness Connector
i - Vapor Separator Mounting Screws (3) M6 x 25
Page 3C-42 90-883065 APRIL 2001

SERVICE PROCEDURES
Installation
1. Tighten drain valve and install VST to engine. Tighten mounting screws to specified
torque.
2. Connect fuel and water hoses as shown below. Secure with sta-straps.
3. Plug in high pressure fuel pump harness connector.
c
h
i
66
g
d
e a
b
f
66 Loctite 242 (92-809821) 58812
a - VST Drain Valve

b - VST Drain Hose
c - Fuel Hose (Mechanical Fuel Pump to VST)
d - High Pressure Fuel Hose (Fuel Cooler to Fuel Distribution Manifold)
e - Water Hose (VST Fuel Cooler to Mechanical Fuel Pump Fuel Cooler)
f - Water Hose (Exhaust Cover to Fuel Cooler)
g - VST Vent Hose
h - High Pressure Fuel Pump Harness Connector
i - Vapor Separator Mounting Screws (3) M6 x 25
Vapor Separator Mounting Screw Torque

45 lb. in. (5 N·m)
90-883065 APRIL 2001 Page 3C-43

SERVICE PROCEDURES
Disassembly
1. Remove fuel cooler mounting screw.
2. If removal of fuel cooler is required (because of damaged/plugged hoses or fuel cooler
replacement), cut metal hose clamps and remove fuel hoses from VST cover. Remove
fuel cooler.
3. Remove VST cover screws and remove cover assembly.
c
d
e
c
a - Fuel Cooler Mounting Screw (1) M6 x 25

b - Fuel Cooler
c - Metal Hose Clamp
d - VST Cover Screws (5)
e - VST Cover Assembly
Page 3C-44 90-883065 APRIL 2001

SERVICE PROCEDURES
4. Disconnect high pressure fuel pump connectors and remove high pressure fuel pump.
5. Inspect and clean high pressure fuel pump screen.
a - Connectors
b - High Pressure Fuel Pump
c - Screen
6. Loosen float pin retaining screw and remove float assembly.
7. Remove baffle plate (if desired).
8. Remove and inspect seat.
9. Inspect and clean VST float chamber.
g a
e
c
d
f
b
i
h
a - Float Pin Retaining Screw
b - Float
c - Float Shaft
d - Clip
e - Needle
f - Baffle Plate
g - VST Float Chamber
h - Seat
i - Gasket
90-883065 APRIL 2001 Page 3C-45

SERVICE PROCEDURES
Assembly
1. Apply Loctite 242 to screws and install baffle plate (if removed). Tighten screws to spe-
cified torque.
2. Install seat (with new gasket) and tighten.
3. Install float assembly as shown. Install float pin and tighten retaining screw to specified
torque.
a
66
f
e
c
d
b
h
g
66 Loctite 242 (92-809821)
a - Float Pin Retaining Screw e - Needle
b - Float f - Baffle Plate Screw (3)
c - Float Shaft g - Seat
d - Clip h - Gasket
Screw Torque
22 lb. in. (2.5 N·m)
4. Connect the high pressure fuel pump connectors. Push the nozzle into the rubber
grommet (lubricate with light oil if necessary). Make sure the alignment pin is positioned
properly and lines up with hole in the high pressure fuel pump.
a
c
a - Connectors
b - High Pressure Fuel Pump
c - Alignment Pin
Page 3C-46 90-883065 APRIL 2001

SERVICE PROCEDURES
5. Install grommet to the bottom of the high pressure fuel pump.

6. Lightly clamp the VST float chamber in a vise. Position the VST cover assembly so the
high pressure fuel pump is horizontal. This will prevent the grommet from falling off.
7. Install VST cover assembly and new gasket, into float chamber. Push the cover and
float chamber together, this will compress the grommet and allow the screws to be
threaded in.
8. Install VST cover screws and tighten to specified torque.
g
e
g
d
h
a
i
91-803146T
a - Grommet
b - Gasket
c - VST Float Chamber
d - High Pressure Fuel Pump
e - VST Cover Assembly
f - VST Cover Screws (5)
g - Metal Hose Clamp (4)
h - Fuel Cooler Mounting Screw(1) M4 x 20
i - Fuel Cooler
Screw Torque
32 lb. in. (3.5 N·m)
90-883065 APRIL 2001 Page 3C-47

SERVICE PROCEDURES
Pressure Regulator Removal/Installation

WARNING
may spray out.
NOTE: The pressure regulator vent is an open fitting that does not require a hose to be
attached.
Removal
1. Release fuel pressure. Refer to Releasing Fuel Pressure in the High Pressure Fuel
Line.
2. Remove fuel pressure regulator mounting screws and remove regulator from VST cover.
3. Inspect o-rings. Replace if necessary. Inspect and clean screen.
Installation
1. Lubricate o-rings with light lubricant and reassemble the pressure regulator to the VST
cover (twist while pushing in).
2. Apply Loctite 242 to mounting screws and tighten to specified torque.
a
d
b
66
c
66 Loctite 242 (92-809821)
a - Mounting Screw (2)

b - Fuel Pressure Regulator
c - O-rings
d - Vent (no hose)
Pressure Regulator Mounting Screw Torque

22 lb. in. (2.5 N·m)
Page 3C-48 90-883065 APRIL 2001

SERVICE PROCEDURES
High Pressure Fuel Line Removal/Installation

WARNING
may spray out.
REMOVAL
1. Disconnect the fuel line from the fuel distribution manifold by depressing the locking
tab.
2. Disconnect the fuel line from the fuel cooler by depressing the locking tab.
3. Remove the high pressure fuel line assembly.
4. Inspect filter for cracks/debris. Replace if necessary.
INSTALLATION
1. Connect fuel lines as shown.
f
a
a - Locking Tab
b - Fuel Filter
c - Fuel Line (to VST fuel cooler)
d - Fuel Line (to fuel distribution manifold)
e - Protective Sleeve
f - Conduit
g - Conduit
90-883065 APRIL 2001 Page 3C-49

EMISSIONS

Section 3D – Emissions
Table of Contents
Exhaust Emissions Standards . . . . . . . . . . . . 3D-2 Emissions Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3D-6
What Are Emissions? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3D-2 Manufacturer’s Responsibility: . . . . . . . . . 3D-6
Hydrocarbons – HC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3D-2 Dealer Responsibility: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3D-6
Carbon Monoxide – CO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3D-2 Owner Responsibility: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3D-6
Oxides of Nitrogen - NOx . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Controlling Emissions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3D-2
3D-2
EPA Emission Regulations: . . . . . . . . . . . .
Decal Location for 2001 Models: . . . . . . .
3D-7
3D-8
3
Stoichiometric (14.7:1) Air/Fuel Ratio . . . 3D-3 Service Replacement Certification Label . . . 3D-9 D
Outboard Hydrocarbon . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3D-3 Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3D-9
Emissions Reductions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3D-3 Date Code Identification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3D-9
Stratified Vs Homogenized Charge . . . . . . . . 3D-4 Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3D-9
Homogenized Charge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3D-4 Decal Location: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3D-9
Stratified Charge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3D-5
90-883065 APRIL 2001 Page 3D-1

EMISSIONS
Exhaust Emissions Standards

Through the Environmental Protection Agency (EPA), the federal government has estab-
lished exhaust emissions standards for all new marine engines sold in the U.S.
What Are Emissions?
Emissions are what comes out of the exhaust system in the exhaust gas when the engine
is running. They are formed as a result of the process of combustion or incomplete com-
bustion. To understand exhaust gas emissions, remember that both air and fuel are made
of several elements. Air contains oxygen and nitrogen among other elements; gasolene
contains mainly hydrogen and carbon. These four elements combine chemically during
combustion. If combustion were complete, the mixture of air and gasoline would result in
these emissions: water, carbon dioxide and nitrogen, which are not harmful to the environ-
ment. But combustion is not usually complete. Also, potentially harmful gases can be
formed during and after combustion.
All marine engines must reduce the emission of certain pollutants, or potentially harmful
gases, in the exhaust to conform with levels legislated by the EPA. Emissions standards
become more stringent each year. Standards are set primarily with regard to three emis-
sions: hydrocarbons (HC), carbon monoxide (CO) and oxides of nitrogen (NOx).
Hydrocarbons – HC
Gasoline is a hydrocarbon fuel. The two elements of hydrogen and carbon are burned dur-
ing combustion in combination with oxygen. But they are not totally consumed. Some pass
through the combustion chamber and exit the exhaust system as unburned gases known
as hydrocarbons.
Carbon Monoxide – CO
Carbon is one of the elements that make up the fuel burned in the engine along with oxygen
during the combustion process. If the carbon in the gasoline could combine with enough
oxygen (one carbon atom with two oxygen atoms), it would come out of the engine in the
form of carbon dioxide (CO2). CO2 is a harmless gas. But carbon often combines with in-
sufficient oxygen (one carbon atom with one oxygen atom). This forms carbon monoxide,
CO. Carbon monoxide is the product of incomplete combustion and is a dangerous, poten-
tially lethal gas.
Oxides of Nitrogen - NOx
NOx is a slightly different byproduct of combustion. Nitrogen is one of the elements that
makes up the air going into the engine. Under extremely high temperatures it combines
with oxygen to form oxides of nitrogen (NOx). This happens in the engine’s combustion
chambers when temperatures are too high. NOx itself is not harmful, but when exposed
to sunlight it combines with unburned hydrocarbons to create the visible air pollutant
known as smog. Smog is a serious problem in California as well as many other heavily
populated areas of the United States.
Controlling Emissions
There are two principle methods of reducing emissions from a two-stroke-cycle marine en-
gine. The first method is to control the air/fuel ratio that goes into the combustion chamber.
The second is to control the time when this air/fuel mixture enters the combustion cham-
ber. Timing is important, to prevent any unburned mixture from escaping out of the exhaust
port.
Page 3D-2 90-883065 APRIL 2001

EMISSIONS
Stoichiometric (14.7:1) Air/Fuel Ratio

In the search to control pollutants and reduce exhaust emissions, engineers have discov-
ered that they can be reduced effectively if a gasoline engine operates at an air/fuel ratio
of 14.7:1. The technical term for this ideal ratio is stoichiometric. An air/fuel ratio of 14.7:1
provides the best control of all three elements in the exhaust under almost all conditions.
The HC and CO content of the exhaust gas is influenced significantly by the air/fuel ratio.
At an air/fuel ratio leaner than 14.7:1, HC and CO levels are low, but with a ratio richer than
14.7:1 they rise rapidly. It would seem that controlling HC and CO by themselves might
not be such a difficult task; the air/fuel ratio only needs to be kept leaner than 14.7:1. How-
ever, there is also NOx to consider.
As the air/fuel ratio becomes leaner, combustion temperatures increase. Higher combus-
tion temperatures raise the NOx content of the exhaust. But, enrichening the air/fuel ratio
to decrease combustion temperatures and reduce NOx also increases HC and CO, as well
as lowering fuel economy. So the solution to controlling NOx - as well as HC and CO - is
to keep the air/fuel ratio as close to 14.7:1 as possible.
OUTBOARD HYDROCARBON
EMISSIONS REDUCTIONS
8 1/3% PER YEAR OVER 9 MODEL YEARS
120
100
80
60
40
20
0
96 97 98 99 2000 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08
90-883065 APRIL 2001 Page 3D-3

EMISSIONS
STRATIFIED VS HOMOGENIZED CHARGE

DFI engines use a stratified charge inside the combustion chamber to aid in reducing emis-
sions. All other models use a homogenized charge. The difference between the two is:
Homogenized Charge
A homogenized charge has the fuel/air particles mixed evenly throughout the cylinder.
This mixing occurs inside the carburetor venturi, reed blocks and crankcase. Additional
mixing occurs as the fuel is forced through the transfer system into the cylinder. The ho-
mogenized charge is easy to ignite as the air/fuel ratio is approximately 14.7:1.
Page 3D-4 90-883065 APRIL 2001

EMISSIONS
Stratified Charge
A stratified charge engine only pulls air through the transfer system. The fuel required for
combustion is forced into the cylinder through an injector placed in the top of the cylinder
(head). The injector sprays a fuel/air mixture in the form of a bubble into the cylinder. Sur-
rounding this bubble is air supplied by the transfer system. As the bubble is ignited and
burns, the surrounding air provides almost complete combustion before the exhaust port
opens.
A stratified charge is hard to ignite, the fuel/air bubble is not evenly mixed at 14.7:1 and
not easily ignited.
90-883065 APRIL 2001 Page 3D-5

EMISSIONS
Emissions Information
Manufacturer’s Responsibility:
Beginning with 1998 model year engines, manufacturers of all marine propulsion engines
must determine the exhaust emission levels for each engine horsepower family and certify
these engines with the United States Environmental Protection Agency (EPA). A certifica-
tion decal/emissions control information label, showing emission levels and engine speci-
fications directly related to emissions, must be placed on each engine at the time of
manufacture.
Dealer Responsibility:
When performing service on all 1998 and later outboards that carry a certification, atten-
tion must be given to any adjustments that are made that affect emission levels.
Adjustments must be kept within published factory specifications.
Replacement or repair of any emission related component must be executed in a manner
that maintains emission levels within the prescribed certification standards.
Dealers are not to modify the engine in any manner that would alter the horsepower or
allow emission levels to exceed their predetermined factory specifications.
Exceptions include manufacturers prescribed changes, such as that for altitude adjust-
ments.
Owner Responsibility:
The owner/operator is required to have engine maintenance performed to maintain emis-
sion levels within prescribed certification standards.
The owner/operator is not to modify the engine in any manner that would alter the horse-
power or allow emissions levels to exceed their predetermined factory specifications.
Exceptions:
• Carburetor jets may be changed for high altitude use in accordance with factory
recommendations.
• Single engine exceptions may be allowed with permission from the EPA for racing
and testing.
Page 3D-6 90-883065 APRIL 2001

EMISSIONS
EPA Emission Regulations:

All new 1998 and later outboards manufactured by Mercury Marine are certified to the
United States Environmental Protection Agency as conforming to the requirements of the
regulations for the control of air pollution from new outboard motors. This certification is
contingent on certain adjustments being set to factory standards. For this reason, the fac-
tory procedure for servicing the product must be strictly followed and, whenever practica-
ble, returned to the original intent of the design.
The responsibilities listed above are general and in no way a complete listing of the rules
and regulations pertaining to the EPA laws on exhaust emissions for marine products. For
more detailed information on this subject, you may contact the following locations:
VIA U.S. POSTAL SERVICE:
Office of Mobile Sources
Engine Programs and Compliance Division
Engine Compliance Programs Group (6403J)
401 M St. NW
Washington, DC 20460
VIA EXPRESS or COURIER MAIL:
Office of Mobile Sources
Engine Programs and Compliance Division
Engine Compliance Programs Group (6403J)
501 3rd St. NW
Washington, DC 20001
EPA INTERNET WEB SITE:
http:/www.epa.gov/omswww
90-883065 APRIL 2001 Page 3D-7

EMISSIONS
CERTIFICATION LABEL:
The certification label must be placed on each engine at the time of manufacture and must
be replaced in the same location if damaged or removed. Shown below is a typical certifi-
cation label and is not representative of any one model. Label shown below is not to scale;
(shown at twice the normal size).
EMISSION CONTROL
INFORMATION
THIS ENGINE CONFORMS TO 2002 CALIFORNIA AND U.S. EPA
EMISSION REGULATIONS FOR SPARK IGNITION MARINE ENGINES
REFER TO OWNERS MANUAL FOR REQUIRED MAINTENANCE.
i IDLE SPEED (IN GEAR): 725 ± 25 RPM FAMILY: 2M9XM.9952G0 a
h 50 HP 995 cc FEL: 17.3 g/kW-hr b
g
TIMING (IN DEGREES): NOT ADJUSTABLE c
f Spark Plug: NGK DPR6EA-9

JAN 2001 Gap: 1.0 mm (0.035″) d
Cold Valve Clearance (mm) Intake: 0.15 – 0.25

Exhaust: 0.25 – 0.35 e
a-Family Example
b-FEL: Represents (Mercury Marine) statement of the maximum emissions output
for the engine family
c-Timing specifications when adjustable
d-Recommended spark plug for best engine performance
e-Valve Clearance (Four Stroke engines only)
f-Date of Manufacture
g-Cubic Centimeter
h-Engine Horsepower rating
i-Idle Speed (In Gear)
1 M9X M. 995 2 G 0
0=Unspecified
Model Year Regulation 3=Ultra Clean California
1=2001 M=Marine Technology type
1=Existing Rated Eng.
2=New Application
Manufacturer
3=Sport Jet C=2 Stroke
Mercury Marine
Displacement E=EFI Sport Jet
Liter G=4 Stroke
Cubic Inch H=Hi-Perf.
J=Sport Jet
Decal Location
Model Service Part No. Location on Engine
2001 Merc/Mar 995 cc 37-804655AO1 Flywheel/Rewind Cover
Page 3D-8 90-883065 APRIL 2001

EMISSIONS
Service Replacement Certification Label

IMPORTANT: By federal law, it is required that all 1998 and newer Mercury Marine
outboards have a visible and legible emission certification label. If this label is mis-
sing or damaged, contact Mercury Marine Service for replacement if appropriate.
Removal
Remove all remaining pieces of the damaged or illegible label. Do not install new label over
the old label. Use a suitable solvent to remove any traces of the old label adhesive from
the display location.
Date Code Identification
Cut and remove a “V” notch through the month of engine manufacture before installing the
new label. The month of manufacture can be found on the old label. If the label is missing
or the date code illegible, contact Mercury Marine Technical Service for assis-
tance.
EMISSION CONTROL
INFORMATION
THIS ENGINE CONFORMS TO 2002 CALIFORNIA AND U.S. EPA
EMISSION REGULATIONS FOR SPARK IGNITION MARINE ENGINES
REFER TO OWNERS MANUAL FOR REQUIRED MAINTENANCE.
IDLE SPEED (IN GEAR): 725 ± 25 RPM FAMILY: 2M9XM.9952G0
50 HP 995 cc FEL: 17.3 g/kW-hr
TIMING (IN DEGREES): NOT ADJUSTABLE
Spark Plug: NGK DPR6EA-9
Gap: 1.0 mm (0.035″)
Cold Valve Clearance (mm) Intake: 0.15 – 0.25

Exhaust: 0.25 – 0.35
b JAN FEB MAR APR MAY JUNE JULY AUG SEP OCT NOV DEC
a
a-“V” Notch
b-Month of Manufacture
Installation
Install the label on a clean surface in the original factory location.
Decal Location:
Model Service Part No. Location on Engine
90-883065 APRIL 2001 Page 3D-9

CYLINDER HEAD
POWERHEAD
Section 4A - Cylinder Head
Table of Contents
Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4A-2 Valve Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4A-26
Special Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4A-4 Rocker Shaft and Rocker Arm . . . . . . . . . . 4A-27
Cylinder Head . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4A-6 Camshaft . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4A-28
Camshaft . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4A-8 Cylinder Head . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4A-30
Intake/Exhaust Valves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4A-10 Valve Guides . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4A-30
Torque Sequence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4A-12 Valve Guide Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4A-31
Valve Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4A-13 Valves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4A-32
Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4A-13
4A-15
Valve Springs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Valve Seat Reconditioning . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4A-33
4A-35
4
Valve Clearance Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4A-18 Valve Refacing Steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4A-36 A
Adjusting Valves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4A-18 Cylinder Head Reassembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4A-37
Timing Belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4A-21 Valve Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4A-37
Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4A-21 Camshaft Oil Seal Installation . . . . . . . . . . 4A-38
Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4A-22 Camshaft Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4A-39
Cylinder Head Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4A-23 Oil Pump Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4A-40
Cylinder Head Disassembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4A-24 Rocker Arm Shaft Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . 4A-41
Rocker Arm Assembly Removal . . . . . . . . 4A-24 Rocker Arm Shaft Installation . . . . . . . . . . 4A-41
Oil Pump Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4A-24 Cylinder Head Gasket . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4A-42
Camshaft Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4A-25 Cylinder Head Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4A-43
90-883065 APRIL 2001 Page 4A-1

CYLINDER HEAD
Specifications
Camshaft Dimensions
Intake “A” 1.214 - 1.222 in. (30.83 - 31.03 mm)
Exhaust “A” A 1.214 - 1.222 in. (30.83 - 31.03 mm)
Intake “B” 1.020 - 1.028 in. (25.90 - 26.10 mm)
Exhaust “B” 1.020 - 1.028 in. (25.90 - 26.10 mm)
Run-out Limit B 0.0039 in. (0.1 mm)

Camshaft Bearing Diameter “b” 1.4541 - 1.4549 in.
(36.935 - 36.955 mm)
CAMSHAFT
b
b
b
b
Free Length “a” 1.491-1.569 in. (37.85-39.85 mm)

Tilt Limit “b” Less than 0.060 in. (1.7 mm)
bb
aa
VALVE SPRING
Compressed Pressure (Installed)

Intake 19.8 - 22.0 lbs. (9.0 - 10.0 kg)
Exhaust 19.8 - 22.0 lbs. (9.0 - 10.0 kg)
Tilt Limit (Intake & Exhaust) 0.043 in. (1.1 mm)
Dir. of Winding (Intake & Exhaust) Left Hand
Page 4A-2 90-883065 APRIL 2001

CYLINDER HEAD
Warp Limit 0.004 in. (0.1 mm)
* Lines indicate straight edge measurement

CYLINDER HEAD Camshaft Bore Inside Diameter “a” 1.4567 - 1.4577 in.
(37.000 - 37.025 mm)
a a a a
a
Valve/Valve Seat/Valve Guides:

Valve Clearance (cold)
Intake 0.006 - 0.010 in. (0.15 - 0.25 mm)
Exhaust 0.010 - 0.014 in. (0.25 - 0.35 mm)
Valve Dimensions:
“A” Head Diameter
Intake 1.256 - 1.264 in. (31.9 - 32.1 mm)
Exhaust 1.020 - 1.028 in. (25.9 - 26.1 mm)
“B” Face Width
Intake 0.079 - 0.124 in. (2.00 - 3.14 mm)
Exhaust 0.079 - 0.124 in. (2.00 - 3.14 mm)
“C” Seat Width
Intake 0.035 - 0.043 in. (0.9 - 1.1 mm)
Exhaust 0.035 - 0.043 in. (0.9 - 1.1 mm)
“D” Margin Thickness
VALVES Intake 0.020 - 0.035 in. (0.5 - 0.9 mm)
Exhaust 0.020 - 0.035 in. (0.5 - 0.9 mm)
Stem Outside Diameter
Intake 0.2156 - 0.2161 in. (5.475 - 5.490 mm)
Exhaust 0.2150 - 0.2156 in. (5.460 - 5.475 mm)
Guide Inside Diameter
Intake 0.2165 - 0.2170 in. (5.500 - 5.512 mm)
Exhaust 0.2165 - 0.2170 in. (5.500 - 5.512 mm)
Stem To Guide Clearance
Intake 0.0004 - 0.0015 in. (0.010 - 0.037 mm)
Exhaust 0.0010 - 0.0020 in. (0.025 - 0.052 mm)
Stem Run-out Limit (max.) 0.0006 in. (0.016 mm)
90-883065 APRIL 2001 Page 4A-3

CYLINDER HEAD
Special Tools
1. Flywheel Holder P/N 91-83163M
2. Valve Guide Remover P/N 91-809495A1
3. Valve Guide Installer Bushing P/N 91-809496A1
4. Valve Guide Reamer P/N 91-809497A1
5. Valve Spring Compressor P/N 91-809494A1
6. Valve Seat Cutter Kit (Obtain Locally).
Page 4A-4 90-883065 APRIL 2001

CYLINDER HEAD
Notes:
90-883065 APRIL 2001 Page 4A-5

CYLINDER HEAD
CYLINDER HEAD
12
22 24
19 20
21
17
18
A
22
15 9
14
11
3 4 1
110
10
6
8
23
7
16
110 4-stroke Outboard Oil (92-828000A12)
A = TO FITTING IN ADAPTOR PLATE

13
Page 4A-6 90-883065 APRIL 2001

CYLINDER HEAD
CYLINDER HEAD
TORQUE
REF.
REF
– 1 CYLINDER HEAD
1 1 CYLINDER HEAD
2 8 GUIDE 70 7.9
3 4 SCREW 70 7.9
4 4 WASHER
5 1 OIL SEAL
6 8 PIPE PLUG 14.7 19.9
7 1 O RING
8 1 COVER
9 1 BREATHER PIPE
10 1 BAFFLE PLATE
11 4 SCREW (M4 X 10) Drive Tight
12 1 ELBOW Drive Tight
13 1 GASKET
14 7 SCREW (M6 X 20) 70 7.9
15 10 SCREW (M9 X 95) 34 46.1
16 2 DOWEL PIN
17 1 PLUG
18 1 O RING
19 1 DECAL - SERVICING REFERRAL
20 1 DECAL - ENGINE OIL/VALVE CLEARANCE
21 1 HOSE (19 IN.)
22 2 STA-STRAP
23 5 SCREW (M6 X 25) 8.8 12
24 1 DECAL - HP ID
90-883065 APRIL 2001 Page 4A-7

CYLINDER HEAD
CAMSHAFT
10
5
3
4
6
2
66
66 Loctite 242 (92-809821)
Page 4A-8 90-883065 APRIL 2001

CYLINDER HEAD
CAMSHAFT
TORQUE
REF.
REF
1 1 CAMSHAFT
2 1 OIL PUMP ASSEMBLY
3 1 O RING
4 1 O RING
5 1 O RING
6 1 O RING
7 2 SCREW (M6 x 16) 70 8
8 4 SCREW (M6 x 40) 70 8
9 1 DOWEL PIN
10 1 PIN
90-883065 APRIL 2001 Page 4A-9

CYLINDER HEAD
INTAKE/EXHAUST VALVE
5 6
4
3 9
8
1
8 15
9
7
12
16
6 17
5
4 14
11
13
10
2
14
12
11
Page 4A-10 90-883065 APRIL 2001

CYLINDER HEAD
INTAKE/EXHAUST VALVES
TORQUE
REF.
REF
1 4 EXHAUST VALVE
2 4 INTAKE VALVE
3 8 SEAL-Valve Stem
4 8 VALVE SPRING-Outer
5 8 RETAINER
6 16 KEY
7 8 ROCKER ARM
8 8 SCREW
9 8 NUT 120 13.5
10 1 ROCKER SHAFT
11 2 PLUG
12 2 BRACKET
13 1 BRACKET
14 2 SPRING
15 5 SCREW (M8 x 23) 160 18
16 1 GASKET
17 1 PIN-Cam Thrust
90-883065 APRIL 2001 Page 4A-11

CYLINDER HEAD
Torque Sequence
Torque center bolts in sequence and in two steps, than torque the Cylinder Head and intake
manifold flange bolts.
8 7
8
3
3
3 4
4
1
2
1
1
5
2 6
2
5
7
4 6
9 10
58249
Cylinder Head Bolt Torque

Center Bolts Qty. 10 (Larger Dia. M9)
1st: 17 lb-ft (23 Nm)
2nd: 34.7 lb-ft (47 Nm)
Cyl. Head Flange Bolts Qty. 5 (Smaller Dia. M6)
1st: 53 lb-in. (6 Nm)
2nd: 106 lb-in. (12 Nm)
Intake Manifold Screws Qty. 8 (Smaller Dia. M6)
70 lb-in. (8 Nm)
Page 4A-12 90-883065 APRIL 2001

CYLINDER HEAD
Valve Cover
Removal
1. Disconnect spark plug leads and remove spark plugs.
2. Remove flywheel cover.
a - Screw (4) - M6x25

b - Flywheel Cover
90-883065 APRIL 2001 Page 4A-13

CYLINDER HEAD
3. Disconnect the crankcase breather hose and vent hose, fuel pump input/output hose
and fuel cooler in/out hoses.
IMPORTANT: The hose fittings on the fuel pump can break if you try twisting or pull-
ing off the hoses. Remove fuel pump hoses by slowly prying them off using a small
screwdriver.
4. Remove fuel pump from valve cover.
WARNING
line or the vapor separator. If the fuel pressure is not released, pressurized fuel may
spray out.
5. Disconnect high pressure fuel line from fuel distribution manifold by depressing locking
tab. Refer to section 3C Releasing Fuel Pressure in the High Pressure Fuel Line.
6. Remove coil plate fasteners and swing the coil plate assembly to the side.
7. Loosen water separating fuel filter nut, pull the assembly from the mounting bracket and
place it out of the way.
8. Remove valve cover.
b
k
e a
i
c
j
d
f
58814
a - Crankcase Breather Hose

b - Crankcase Vent Hose
c - Fuel Pump Output Hose
d - Fuel Pump Input Hose
e - Fuel Cooler IN Hose
f - Fuel Cooler OUT Hose
g - Valve Cover
h - Screw (7) M6 x 20
i - Coil Plate Screw (& Washer) (3) M6 x 30
j - Fuel Pump
k - Water Separating Fuel Filter
Page 4A-14 90-883065 APRIL 2001

CYLINDER HEAD
Installation
1. Install valve cover seal into groove.
2. If removed, reinstall baffle plate. Tighten screws securely.
a - Baffle Plate
b - Screw (4) M4x10
c - Cover Seal
90-883065 APRIL 2001 Page 4A-15

CYLINDER HEAD
3. Reinstall the valve cover. Tighten screws to the specified torque.

4. Install water separating fuel filter onto bracket and tighten nut.
5. Install coil plate. Install screws (and washers) and tighten screws to specified torque.
Be sure coil ground wires are secured with screws.
6. Install fuel pump. Tighten screws to specified torque.
7. Connect fuel pump in/out hoses, fuel cooler in/out hoses, crankcase breather and vent
hose. Secure all with sta-straps. Connect high pressure fuel line to fuel distribution man-
ifold.
8. Reinstall spark plugs and spark plug leads.
k
l
e a
i
c
j
d l
f 58814
a - Crankcase Breather Hose

b - Crankcase Vent Hose
c - Fuel Pump Outlet Hose
d - Fuel Pump Inlet Hose
e - Fuel Cooler IN Hose
f - Fuel Cooler OUT Hose
g - Valve Cover
h - Screw (7) M6 x 20
i - Coil Plate Screw (& Washer) (3) M6 x 30
j - Fuel Pump
k - Water Separating Fuel Filter
l - Coil Ground Wire (2)
Valve Cover Screw Torque
70 lb-in. (8 Nm)
Page 4A-16 90-883065 APRIL 2001

CYLINDER HEAD
9. Install flywheel cover.
a - Flywheel Cover
b - Screw (4) - M6x25
Flywheel Cover Screw Torque
45 lb. in. (5.1 N·m)
90-883065 APRIL 2001 Page 4A-17

CYLINDER HEAD
Valve Clearance Adjustment

NOTE: Valves should be adjusted when engine is cold.
WARNING
Engine could possibly start when turning flywheel during adjustment. To prevent
this type of accidental engine starting and possible serious injury, always remove
spark plug leads from spark plugs.
Adjusting Valves
1. Remove valve cover as outlined in “Valve Cover Removal”.
2. Measure valve clearance with a feeler gauge. Adjust if out of specification.
NOTE: When loosening lock nuts, hold the adjusting screw with a screw driver to prevent
it from moving.
a - Lock nut
b - Adjusting Screw
Page 4A-18 90-883065 APRIL 2001

CYLINDER HEAD
NO. 1 AND NO. 2 INTAKE VALVES

NO. 1 AND NO. 3 EXHAUST VALVES
1. Turn the driven gear and align the “” mark on the gear with the cylinder head mark “”.
2. Adjust the valve clearance for No. 1 and No. 2 intake valves and No. 1 and No. 3 exhaust
valves.
(b) (a)
58268
#1 (b)
#1 (a)
#2 (a)
#3 (b)
Valve Clearance Specifications (Cold)

Intake Valve (a) 0.006 - 0.010 in.
(0.15 - 0.25 mm)
Exhaust Valve (b) 0.010 - 0.014 in.
(0.25 - 0.35 mm)
Valve Adjusting Nut Torque

120 lb-in. (13.5 Nm)
90-883065 APRIL 2001 Page 4A-19

CYLINDER HEAD
NO. 3 AND NO. 4 INTAKE VALVES

NO. 2 AND NO. 4 EXHAUST VALVES
1. Turn the driven gear and align the “•” mark on the gear with the cylinder head mark “”.
2. Adjust the valve clearance for No. 3 and No. 4 intake valves and No. 2 and No. 4 exhaust
valves.
(b) (a) •
58268
#2 (b)
#3 (a)
#4 (b)
#4 (a)
Valve Clearance Specifications (Cold)

Intake Valve (a) 0.006 - 0.010 in.
(0.15 - 0.25 mm)
Exhaust Valve (b) 0.010 - 0.014 in.
(0.25 - 0.35 mm)
Valve Adjusting Nut Torque

120 lb-in. (13.5 Nm)
Page 4A-20 90-883065 APRIL 2001

CYLINDER HEAD
Timing Belt
Removal
1. Remove flywheel and stator. Refer to section 2B Charging and Starting System.
2. Remove timing belt from driven gear and drive gear.
a - Timing Belt
90-883065 APRIL 2001 Page 4A-21

CYLINDER HEAD
Installation
Timing Belt Installation Notes:
• Protect the timing belt from water and oil.
• Use care not to scratch the belt.
• Do not use any metal device to help stretch the belt onto the driven gear.
1. Align marks on drive and driven gear with marks on cylinder block as shown.
2. Install timing belt onto drive gear as shown. Numbers/letters on belt should be readable
once belt is installed.
3. Install stator and flywheel. Refer to section 2B Charging & Starting System.
a
1
b
c c e
a - Drive Gear Mark d - Timing Belt Installed Correctly

b - Driven Gear Mark e - Timing Belt Installed Incorrectly
c - Cylinder Block Marks
Page 4A-22 90-883065 APRIL 2001

CYLINDER HEAD
Cylinder Head Removal

1. Remove valve cover. Refer to Valve Cover Removal.
2. Remove timing belt from driven gear.
a - Timing Belt b - Driven Gear

3. Remove the throttle and shift levers from side of cylinder head.
4. Remove the cylinder head and intake manifold assembly mounting bolts.
5. Separate the cylinder head from the block.
NOTE: Cylinder head gasket is not reusable.
d
a
58818 58249
a - Center Bolts (10) M9x95 c - Throttle/Shift Levers

b - Flange Bolts (5) M6x25 d - Intake Manifold Screw (8) M6x25
90-883065 APRIL 2001 Page 4A-23

CYLINDER HEAD
Cylinder Head Disassembly

Rocker Arm Assembly Removal
1. Remove five screws and the rocker arm shaft.
58249
a - Rocker Arm Shaft

b - Screw (5) M8x23
Oil Pump Removal

IMPORTANT: Do not twist/turn oil pump from side to side while removing oil pump
from cylinder head as oil pump sealing o-rings will be cut. Pull oil pump away from
cylinder head using pry points on oil pump body as needed.
1. Remove four screws and pull out the oil pump assembly.
58269
b
a - Oil Pump Assembly
b - Oil Pump Mounting Screw (4) M6x40
Page 4A-24 90-883065 APRIL 2001

CYLINDER HEAD
Camshaft Removal
1. Hold driven gear using tool (91-83163M) and remove screw and flat washer. Remove
driven gear.
2. Remove camshaft retaining pin. Slide camshaft/oil seal out of cylinder head.
NOTE: The cam can also be removed from the top without removing the cylinder head from
engine.
91-83163M
58287 58477
a - Driven Gear
b - Camshaft
c - Camshaft Retaining Pin with Seal
90-883065 APRIL 2001 Page 4A-25

CYLINDER HEAD
Valve Removal
VALVE COMPONENTS
e
d
c
b
a
a - Valve d - Spring Retainer
b - Valve Seal e - Valve Keepers
c - Valve Spring
REMOVING VALVES
1. Anytime a valve is removed, replace the valve seal.
2. Remove valves as shown.
91-809494A1
b
58256
a - Use Spring Compressor Tool (91-809494A1) to compress the springs for

removal
b - Compress the spring and remove the valve keepers
Page 4A-26 90-883065 APRIL 2001

CYLINDER HEAD
Rocker Shaft and Rocker Arm

1. Measure rocker shaft diameter. Replace shaft if out of specification.
Rocker Shaft Diameter

0.6288 - 0.6296 in. (15.971 -15.991 mm)
2. Measure rocker arm inside diameter. Replace rocker arms if out of specification.
55804
Rocker Arm Inside Diameter

0.6299 - 0.6306 in. (16.000 -16.018 mm)
90-883065 APRIL 2001 Page 4A-27

CYLINDER HEAD
Camshaft
Manual start models are equipped with a cam shaft featuring a compression release mecha-
nism. The compression relief mechanism releases a percentage of the cylinder compres-
sion during engine cranking which lowers the starter rope pull force.
At cranking speeds (RPM) the cam shaft decompression levers rest against the side of the
exhaust cam lobes, protruding out from the heal of the lobe. This protrusion contacts the
exhaust valve rocker arms during the compression stroke, slightly opening the exhaust
valve.
With the increase of centrifugal force at engine running speeds, the decompression levers
swing out of contact with the exhaust valve rocker arms, allowing the exhaust valves to oper-
ate normally (fully closed) during the compression stroke.
a - Exhaust Valve Rocker Arm

b - Decompression Lever
1. Inspect the camshaft for pitting, heat discoloration, scratches and for the following mea-
surements. Replace camshaft if worn or not within specification.
2. Inspect the compression relief cam lever (if equipped) for free movement. Replace cam-
shaft if necessary.
a - Compression Relief Cam
Page 4A-28 90-883065 APRIL 2001

CYLINDER HEAD
3. Measure the cam lobe length (a) and width (b).
a 55805
b
Cam Lobe Specifications

a Intake 1.214 - 1.222 in.
(30.83 - 31.03 mm)
Exhaust 1.214 - 1.222 in.
(30.83 - 31.03 mm)
b Intake 1.020 - 1.028 in.
(25.90 -26.10 mm)
Exhaust 1.020 - 1.028 in.
(25.90 -26.10 mm)
4. Measure the camshaft bore diameters (a) and camshaft bearing diameters (b).
a a a a
b b b b
58255
Camshaft Bore Inside Diameter “a”

1.4567 - 1.4577 in. (37.000 - 37.025 mm)
Camshaft Bearing Diameter “b”

1.4541 - 1.4549 in. (36.935 - 36.955 mm)
90-883065 APRIL 2001 Page 4A-29

CYLINDER HEAD
Cylinder Head
1. Inspect the cylinder head for the following conditions:
• Mineral deposits/corrosion in water passage ways.
• Carbon deposits in combustion chamber (use round scraper to clean away depos-
its). Be careful not to scratch or remove material.
2. Inspect cylinder head for warpage. Replace cylinder head If out of specification.
58271
Cylinder Head Warpage Limit

0.004 in. (0.1 mm)
Valve Guides
NOTE: Inspect the valve guides for wear or damage. If valve guide wear is out of specifica-
tion, replace the valve guide.
Measure valve guide bore.
58257
Valve Guide Inside Diameter

Intake Valve 0.2165 - 0.2170 in.
Exhaust Valve (5.500 - 5.512 mm)
Page 4A-30 90-883065 APRIL 2001

CYLINDER HEAD
Valve Guide Replacement

1. Heat the cylinder head in an oven to 390° F (200° C). This will help to ease guide removal
and installation and to maintain correct interference fit.
2. Remove the valve guide using a valve guide remover.
55806
a - Valve Guide Remover (91-809495A1)
3. Install the new valve guide and circlip using a valve guide installer bushing along with
the valve guide remover.
a
b
55807
a - Valve Guide Remover (91-809495A1)

b - Valve Guide Installer Bushing (91-809496A1)
4. After installing the valve guide, ream the valve guide using a valve guide reamer to ob-
tain proper stem-to-guide clearance.
55808
a - Valve Guide Reamer (91-809497A1)
90-883065 APRIL 2001 Page 4A-31

CYLINDER HEAD
Valves
1. Clean the carbon deposits from the valve. Discard any cracked, warped, or burned
valves.
2. Measure the valve stem to check for wear. Replace valves if not in specification.
55810
Valve Stem Diameter “a”

(5.475 - 5.490 mm)
Exhaust Valve 0.2150 - 0.2156 in.
(5.460 - 5.475 mm)
3. Check the valve face for pitting. Valves faces that are pitted must be refaced.
NOTE: Several different types of equipment are available for refacing valves. Follow the
equipment manufacturer’s instructions.
NOTE: After refacing valve seat or replacing the valve and valve guide, the valve seat and
valve face should be lapped.
4. Check the margin thickness of the valves after the valves have been ground. Any valve
with a margin thickness of less than the specification, should be replaced.
45 °
55809
Margin Thickness “a”

(0.5 - 0.9 mm)
Exhaust Valve 0.020 - 0.035 in.
(0.5 - 0.9 mm)
Page 4A-32 90-883065 APRIL 2001

CYLINDER HEAD
5. Measure valve stem runout, replace if out of specification.
Valve Stem Runout Limit (Max.)

Intake Valve
0.0006 in. (0.016 mm)
Exhaust Valve
Valve Springs
1. Check each spring under load on a spring tester. Replace any weak springs.
2. Check free length limit of each spring. Replace valve springs if not in specification.
55846
Valve Spring Free Length

1.491 - 1.569 in. (37.85 - 39.85 mm)
90-883065 APRIL 2001 Page 4A-33

CYLINDER HEAD
3. Check each spring on a flat surface using a square. Rotate spring and check space be-
tween the top coil and square. Replace valve springs if not in specification.
55797
Valve Spring Tilt Specification “a”

Less than 0.06 in. (1.7 mm)
Page 4A-34 90-883065 APRIL 2001

CYLINDER HEAD
Valve Seat Reconditioning

Clean the carbon deposits from the combustion chambers and valve seats and check for
pitting.
Several different types of equipment are available for reseating valve seats. Follow the
equipment manufacturer’s instructions.
Reface valve seat; use a 60°, 45°, 15° valve seat cutter.
Measure valve seat width (a). Resurface the valve seat If not in specification.
Valve Seat Width Specification “a”

Intake Valve 0.035 - 0.043 in. (0.9 - 1.1 mm)
Exhaust Valve
If resurfacing the valve seats is required, resurface the valve seats to the specified angles
shown in chart.
c
b
a
55798
Valve Seat Angle Specifications

a 15°
b 45°
c 60°
90-883065 APRIL 2001 Page 4A-35

CYLINDER HEAD
Valve Refacing Steps

Condition: The valve seat is centered on valve face but it is too wide.
55799
Valve Seat Cutter Set Desired Results

Use 15° Cutter To reduce valve seat width
Lightly
Li htl 60° Cutter
Condition: The valve seat is in the middle of the valve face but it is too narrow.
55800

Use 45° Cutter To achieve a uniform valve
seatt width
idth
Condition: Valve seat is too narrow and it is near valve margin.
55801

Use 15° Cutter, First To center the seat and to
45° Cutter achieve
hi itits width
idth
Page 4A-36 90-883065 APRIL 2001

CYLINDER HEAD
Condition: Valve seat is too narrow and is located near the bottom edge of the valve face.
55802

Use 60° Cutter, First To center the seat and to in-
45° Cutter crease itits Width
Cylinder Head Reassembly

Valve Installation
INTAKE AND EXHAUST VALVE COMPONENTS
e
d
c
b
a
a - Valve
b - Valve Seal
c - Valve Spring
d - Spring Retainer
e - Valve Keepers
90-883065 APRIL 2001 Page 4A-37

CYLINDER HEAD
INSTALLING VALVES
1. Always use new valve seals.
2. Apply engine oil to the valves and valve seats.
3. Install valves as shown.
NOTE: Valve springs are symmetrical and may be installed in either direction.
b
91-809494A1
58256
a - Use spring compressor tool to compress the springs for installation.

b - Compress the spring and retainer and install the valve keepers around the
valve stem. You may have to tap lightly on end of valve to seat the keepers.
Camshaft Oil Seal Installation

1. If removed, install new oil seal. Position seal so part number side is facing outward.
Press seal in until it makes contact with the inside flat surface.
58261
a - Upper Camshaft Oil Seal
Page 4A-38 90-883065 APRIL 2001

CYLINDER HEAD
Camshaft Installation
1. Apply engine oil to the main journals (5 places) on the camshaft.
2. Slide camshaft into cylinder head (threaded end towards driven gear).
NOTE: Camshaft retaining pin groove must align with retaining pin hole in cylinder head.
3. Install camshaft retaining pin. Install seal over pin.
4. Place driven gear on camshaft so alignment pin is in hole. Hold gear with tool
(91-83163M) and fasten with washer and screw. Tighten screw to the specified torque.
5. Remove any oil from the camshaft lobes and apply Moly Grease to the lift portion of the
lobes. Obtain Moly Grease from a local source.
NOTE: Rotate camshaft after assembly to ensure it rotates smoothly.
f e
d c
a
b
58477
91-83163M
58287
58278
a - Camshaft d - Driven Gear
b - Camshaft Retaining Pin w/Seal e - Washer
c - Alignment Pin f - Screw M10x40
Driven Gear Screw Torque (f)
28 lb-ft (38 Nm)
90-883065 APRIL 2001 Page 4A-39

CYLINDER HEAD
Oil Pump Installation

1. Place O-ring seals on the oil pump. Lubricate the O-rings with oil.
2. Prime the oil pump by pouring approximately 1 fl oz (30 ml) of engine oil into the oil pump
body.
b
a
a
a - O-Ring Seals
b - Pour Approximately 1 fl oz (30 ml) of Engine Oil into the Oil Pump Body
3. Align oil pump shaft with the camshaft and install the oil pump.
4. Fasten with 4 screws. Tighten screws to the specified torque.
58256
b
a c
58259
a - Oil Pump Assembly

b - Align Slot with Camshaft Projection
c - Screw (4) M6x40
Oil Pump Mounting Screw Torque
70 lb-in. (8 Nm)
Page 4A-40 90-883065 APRIL 2001

CYLINDER HEAD
Rocker Arm Shaft Assembly

1. Apply engine oil to the rocker shaft and arms.
2. Locate the end of the rocker shaft that gets installed towards driven gear (oil holes will
line-up with the mating oil holes in the cylinder head).
3. Slide the rocker arms onto rocker shaft as shown.
a
b
53739
a - Rocker Shaft
b - Rocker Arms
Rocker Arm Shaft Installation

1. Install the rocker arm shaft assembly as shown. Tighten screws to the specified torque.
NOTE: Leave all adjustment screws loose at this time.
b
e
c d
58249
a - Rocker Arm Retainer (1)
b - Rocker Arm Retainer (2) Arrow Must Point Towards Driven Gear
c - Rocker Arm Retainer (2)
d - Mounting Screw (5) M8 x 23
e - Adjustment Screw Loose
Rocker Arm Shaft Mounting Bolt Torque
160 lb-in. (18 Nm)
90-883065 APRIL 2001 Page 4A-41

CYLINDER HEAD
Cylinder Head Gasket

1. Install new cylinder head gasket and dowel pins.
58270
a - Dowel Pin (2)

b - Gasket (new)
Page 4A-42 90-883065 APRIL 2001

CYLINDER HEAD
Cylinder Head Installation

1. Apply engine oil to the threads of each bolt and seat surface.
2. Fasten cylinder head with bolts shown.
58249
a - Center Bolts (10) M9x95

b - Flange Bolts (5) M6x25
90-883065 APRIL 2001 Page 4A-43

CYLINDER HEAD
3. Torque center bolts in sequence and in two steps, then torque the cylinder head and EFI
intake manifold screws.
4. Refer to “Timing Belt Installation” preceding, and install timing belt.
5. Refer to “Valve Clearance Adjustment” preceding, to perform valve clearance adjust-
ments.
6. Refer to “Valve Cover Installation” preceding, and install valve cover.
8 7
8
3
3
3 4
4
1
2
1
1
5
2 6
2
5
7
4 6
9 10
58249
Cylinder Head Bolt Torque

Center Bolts Qty. 10 (Larger Dia. M9)
1st: 17 lb-ft (23 Nm)
2nd: 34.7 lb-ft (47 Nm)
Cyl. Head Flange Bolts Qty. 5 (Smaller Dia. M6)
1st: 53 lb-in. (6 Nm)
2nd: 106 lb-in. (12 Nm)
Intake Manifold Screws Qty. 8 (Smaller Dia. M6)
70 lb-in. (8 Nm)
Page 4A-44 90-883065 APRIL 2001

CYLINDER BLOCK/CRANKCASE
POWERHEAD
Section 4B - Cylinder Block/Crankcase
Table of Contents
Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4B-1 Selecting New Main Bearings . . . . . . . . . . 4B-25
Special Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4B-2 Main Bearing Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4B-26
Crankshaft . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4B-4 Selecting New Connecting Rod Bearings 4B-27
Cylinder Block and Crankcase . . . . . . . . . . . . 4B-6 Installing Connecting Rod Bearings . . . . . 4B-27
Torque Sequence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4B-8 Connecting Rod Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . 4B-28
Powerhead Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4B-9 Piston Ring Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4B-29
Removing Powerhead Components . . . . . . . 4B-12 Piston Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4B-30
Cylinder Block Disassembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4B-13 Crankshaft Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4B-30
Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cylinder Bore . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4B-17
4B-17
Crankcase Cover Installation . . . . . . . . . . .
Exhaust Cover Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4B-32
4B-33
4
Piston . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4B-18 Drive Gear Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4B-34 B
Piston Pin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4B-18 Installing Powerhead Components . . . . . . 4B-35
Piston Rings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4B-19 Engine Wiring Harness and
Crankshaft . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4B-20 Ignition/Electrical Component Installation 4B-35
Main Bearing Clearance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4B-21 Ignition Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4B-35
Connecting Rod Bearing Clearance . . . . . 4B-23 Charging/Starting System Components . 4B-35
Thermostat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4B-24 Fuel Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4B-35
Oil Pressure Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4B-24 Powerhead Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4B-36
Cylinder Block Reassembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4B-25 Tiller Handle Models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4B-38
Specifications
Type 4 Stroke Cycle – Over Head Camshaft
CYLINDER
Displacement 60.8 cu. in. (995 cc)
BLOCK
Number of Cylinders 4
STROKE Length 2.953 in. (75 mm)
Diameter
Standard 2.5591 in. (65 mm)
CYLINDER Oversize-0.010 in. (0.25 mm) 2.5689 in. (65.25 mm)
BORE Oversize-0.020 in. (0.50 mm) 2.5787 in. (65.5 mm)
Taper/Out of Round Maximum 0.003 in. (0.08 mm)
Bore Type Cast Iron
Piston Type Aluminum
O.D. at Skirt
PISTON Standard 2.5570 - 2.5578 in. (64.950 - 64.965 mm)
PISTON Piston to Cylinder Clearance 0.0014 - .0026 in. (0.035 - 0.065 mm)
CLEARANCE
Ring End Gap (Installed)
Top 0.006 - 0.012 in. (0.15 - 0.03 mm)
Middle 0.012 - 0.020 in. (0.30 - 0.50 mm)
RINGS Bottom (Oil Ring) 0.008 - 0.028 in. (0.20 - 0.70 mm)
Side Clearance:
Top 0.0008 - 0.0024 in. (0.02 - 0.06 mm)
Middle 0.0008 - 0.0024 in. (0.02 - 0.06 mm)
90-883065 APRIL 2001 Page 4B-1

Compression Ratio 9.7:1

COMPRESSION Cylinder Compression* 180 -210 psi (Peak)
RATIO (Electric Models Only, Cold Engine @
W.O.T.)
PISTON PIN Piston Pin Diameter 0.6285 - 0.6287 in. (15.965 - 15.970 mm)
CONNECTING Oil Clearance (Big End) 0.0008 - 0.0020 in. (0.020 - 0.052 mm)
ROD Small End Inside Diameter 0.6293 - 0.6298 in. (15.985 - 15.998 mm)
Main Bearing Clearance 0.0005 - 0.0017 in. (0.012 - 0.044 mm)
CRANKSHAFT
Crankshaft Run-out 0.0018 in. (0.046 mm)
Special Tools
1. Oil Filter Wrench (P/N 91-802653)
2. Flywheel Holder (P/N 91-83163M)
3. Flywheel Puller (P/N 91-83164M)
4. Piston Ring Compressor (P/N FT2997)
5. Piston Ring Expander (P/N 91-24697)
Page 4B-2 90-883065 APRIL 2001

NOTES:
90-883065 APRIL 2001 Page 4B-3

CRANKSHAFT
110
12
2
8
9
10
110 7
110 6
11
1 110
12
5 110
4
110
110
Page 4B-4 90-883065 APRIL 2001

CRANKSHAFT
TORQUE
REF.
REF
1 1 CRANKSHAFT
2 1 OIL SEAL
3 1 OIL SEAL
4 4 CONNECTING ROD
5 8 BOLT 150 12.5 17
8 BEARING (BROWN)
6 8 BEARING (BLACK)
8 BEARING (BLUE)
7 4 PISTON
8 4 PISTON RING (TOP)
9 4 PISTON RING (SECOND)
10 4 PISTON OIL RING
11 4 PISTON PIN
12 8 RETAINER
90-883065 APRIL 2001 Page 4B-5

CYLINDER BLOCK AND CRANKCASE
23
6
3 24
12
12
2
13
3 15 16
17
18
3
14
2 19
20
7
1 25
4 5 22
9 110
21
11
8 26
110
25
10
A
12 Loctite Master Gasket (92-12564-2)

A – TO VST COOLER
Page 4B-6 90-883065 APRIL 2001

CYLINDER BLOCK AND CRANKCASE

TORQUE
REF.
REF
1 1 CYLINDER BLOCK
2 2 DOWEL PIN
3 3 PLUG 79 8.9
4 1 PIPE PLUG (1/2-14) 24.3 33
5 1 PIPE PLUG (3/4-14) 24.3 33
10 BEARING (BROWN)
6 10 BEARING (BLACK)
10 BEARING (BLUE)
7 1 NIPPLE 29.5 40
8 10 SCREW (M8 X 82) 22 29.8
9 10 SCREW (M6 X 35) 102 12
10 1 GASKET
11 1 OIL FILTER 70 7.9
12 1 GASKET
13 1 EXHAUST COVER
14 1 PIPE PLUG Drive Tight
15 1 THERMOSTAT
16 1 GASKET
17 1 GASKET
18 1 COVER
19 12 SCREW (M6 X 35) 106 11.9
20 1 ELBOW Drive Tight
21 1 ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE (ECT) SENSOR 15 1.7
22 1 O RING
23 1 LIFTING EYE
24 1 SCREW (M8 X 35) 29.2 39.6
25 2 STA STRAP
90-883065 APRIL 2001 Page 4B-7

Torque Sequence
11
9 10
8
7 19
20
4
3
15 5 6 16
2 11 1 2 12
5
14 4 3 13
6
9 18 17
10
12 7
8
Exhaust Cover Crankcase Cover
3
4
1
2
5
6
Intake Manifold Flange
Page 4B-8 90-883065 APRIL 2001

Powerhead Removal
WARNING
The possibility exists that the engine could start when turning the flywheel. To avoid
possible serious injury, always disconnect the battery and remove spark plug leads
from spark plugs before working on motor.
1. On electric start models, disconnect the battery cables from the battery. Remove battery
cables from engine.
2. Disconnect the power trim wires (if so equipped).
3. Remove the bottom cowls.
a
b
a - Screw (6)-M6x30 c - Screw-M6x60

b - Lower Cowl
4. Drain the engine oil.
5. Remove the control cable anchor bracket screws (remote control models).
6. Remove the throttle/shift lever screw and swing the entire shift linkage to the side.
REMOTE CONTROL MODEL
a
58810
a - Control Cable Anchor Bracket Screw (2) M6 x 16

b - Throttle/Shift Lever
c - Shift Lever Screw (1) M8 x 70
90-883065 APRIL 2001 Page 4B-9

7. Remove the shift guide bracket bolts.

TILLER HANDLE MODEL
58479
a - Shift Guide Bracket
b - Screw (2) M6 x 25
8. Disconnect the crankcase vent hose.
9. Disconnect inlet hose from fuel pump.
IMPORTANT: The hose fittings on the fuel pump can break if you try twisting or pull-
ing off the hoses. Remove hoses by slowly prying off the hoses using a small screw-
driver.
a - Crankcase Vent Hose

b - Fuel Pump Inlet hose
Page 4B-10 90-883065 APRIL 2001

10. Remove powerhead mounting bolts.

11. Lift powerhead from driveshaft housing.
a - Powerhead Mounting Bolts (4 Each Side) M8 x 45

b - Hoist
90-883065 APRIL 2001 Page 4B-11

Removing Powerhead Components

1. Place powerhead on bench.
2. Remove intake assembly. Refer to section 3C Intake Assembly Removal.
3. Remove Vapor Separator Assembly. Refer to section 3C Vapor Separator Removal.
4. Remove flywheel, stator and starter. Refer to section 2B Charging & Starting System.
5. Disconnect/Remove components in the following order: ECM bracket screws(3), main
harness ground wire screws (near bottom of starter), starter solenoid mounting screws,
oil pressure switch, ECT sensor, regulator/rectifier mounting screws, crank position sen-
sor mounting screws, ignition coil mounting screws.
6. Remove electrical components as an assembly. Disconnect wiring and cut sta-straps
as necessary.
7. Remove cylinder head. Refer to section 4A Cylinder Head Removal.
Page 4B-12 90-883065 APRIL 2001

Cylinder Block Disassembly

1. Remove the drive gear components.
a - Load Ring
b - Drive Gear
c - Woodruff Key
2. Remove exhaust cover and gasket.

3. Remove oil filter.
c
d
e
g 91-802653
a
f
h
a - Exhaust Cover
b - Gasket
c - Thermostat and Gasket
d - Gasket
e - Thermostat Cover
f - Oil Filter
g - Oil Filter Wrench
h - Exhaust Cover Screw (12) M6 x 35
90-883065 APRIL 2001 Page 4B-13

4. Remove crankcase cover bolts.
58276
a - Crankcase Cover
b - Crankcase Cover Bolts (10) M6 x 35
c - Crankcase Cover Bolts (10) M8 x 82
5. With a rubber or plastic hammer, lightly strike the crankcase cover in order to separate
it from the block. If the cover will not separate, try prying it off with a screwdriver. Do not
damage the split line sealing surface when prying the cover off.
Page 4B-14 90-883065 APRIL 2001

6. Use a 5/16 in. 12 point socket and remove connecting rod bolts.
7. Remove carbon ridge from the cylinder bore using a burr knife. Push out the pistons.
Keep each piston, connecting rod, and cap together as an assembly.
NOTE: Use piston ring expander tool to prevent rings from breaking. If reusing rings, mark
their location (piston #1, #2, #3, or #4) for correct installation.
NOTE: Each connecting rod and cap are a matched set. They must not be interchanged.
91-24697
d c
b a
53824
a - Remove Circlips with a Needle Nose Pliers

b - Connecting Rod and Cap are a Matched Set, Don’t Interchange
c - Scribe the Cylinder Number (1 thru 4) on Inside of Each Piston and Connecting
Rod so they can be Reinstalled in their Original Location
d - Connecting Rod Bearings – Do Not Interchange. Reinstall in Original Locations
90-883065 APRIL 2001 Page 4B-15

8. Remove crankshaft from block.
a - Main Bearings – Do Not Interchange. Reinstall in Original Locations
Page 4B-16 90-883065 APRIL 2001

Inspection
Cylinder Bore
MEASURING CYLINDER BORE
1. Measure the cylinder bore diameter at three locations in both X and Y axis.
2. If the cylinder bore is beyond the standard limits listed in the tables below, it will be nec-
essary to re-bore the cylinder to accept the oversize piston.
NOTE: Measure at three locations (L1 , L2 , and L3 ) in both X and Y axis (D1-6 ).
L1 =0.8 in. (20 mm)
L2 =1.6 in. (40 mm)
L3 =2.4 in. (60 mm)
1. Inspect:
a. Water jacket for mineral deposits/corrosion, clean if necessary.
b. Inner surface for score marks, repair if necessary.
2. Measure bore diameter with a cylinder gauge, re-bore or replace if necessary.
L1
D1,2
L2
L3
D3,4
D5,6
55837
Cylinder Bore Specifications

Bore Size Maximum Taper/Out-of-Round
Standard Bore
2.5591 in. (65 mm) 0.003 in.(0.08 mm)
Oversize Bore-0.10 in. (0.25 mm)
2.5689 in. (65.25 mm) 0.003 in.(0.08 mm)
Oversize Bore-0.20 in. (0.50 mm)
2.5787 in. (65.5 mm) 0.003 in.(0.08 mm)
NOTE: Taper=(Maximum of D1 or D2 )–(Minimum of D5 or D6 )
90-883065 APRIL 2001 Page 4B-17

Piston
1. Inspect piston wall wear/damage, replace if necessary.
2. Measure the piston at a point 0.2 in (5.0 mm) from the bottom, replace if out of specifica-
tion.
a
b
a - Piston Diameter b - 0.2 in. (5.0 mm)

Piston Diameter “a”
Piston Size Diameter
Standard 2.5570 - 2.5578 in. (64.950 - 64.965 mm)
Oversize -0.020 in. (0.50 mm) 2.5768 - 2.5774 in. (65.450 - 65.465 mm)
3. Measure piston to cylinder clearance. If out of specification examine piston and cylinder
bore further to determine repair/replacement.
a. Piston to Cylinder Clearance can be defined by:
MBM–MPM=PCC where:
MBM=Minimum Bore Measurement
MPM=Maximum Piston Measurement
PCC=Piston to Cylinder Clearance
Piston to Cylinder Clearance

0.0014 - 0.0026 in. (0.035 - 0.065 mm)
Piston Pin
1. Measure piston pin diameter. Replace piston pin if out of specification.
55839
Piston Pin Diameter

0.6285 - 0.6287 in. (15.965 - 15.970 mm)
Page 4B-18 90-883065 APRIL 2001

1. Place the piston pin into the connecting rod and check for free play. There should be no
noticeable free play.
55840
2. Place the piston pin into the piston and check for free play. There should be no notice-
able free play.
55841
Piston Rings
PISTON RING SIDE CLEARANCE
1. Measure piston ring side clearance. Replace piston and/or piston rings if out of specifi-
cation.
55842
Piston Ring Side Clearance

Top 0.0008 - 0.0024 in. (0.02 - 0.06 mm)
Middle 0.0008 - 0.0024 in. (0.02 - 0.06 mm)
90-883065 APRIL 2001 Page 4B-19

PISTON RING END GAP CLEARANCE

1. Measure piston ring end gap clearance. Replace piston ring if out of specification.
53747
a - Push Piston Rings into Cylinder 0.8 in. (20 mm) Deep. Push in the Rings Using
the Piston.
Piston Ring End Gap
Top 0.006 - 0.012 in. (0.15 - 0.30 mm)
2nd 0.012 - 0.020 in. (0.30 - 0.50 mm)
Oil 0.008 - 0.028 in. (0.20 - 0.70 mm)
Crankshaft
1. Thoroughly clean crankshaft and inspect bearing surfaces. Replace crankshaft if bear-
ing surfaces are pitted, scored, or discolored.
2. Measure Run-out. Replace crankshaft if out of specification.
Crankshaft Run-out
0.0018 in. (0.046 mm)
Page 4B-20 90-883065 APRIL 2001

Checking Main Bearing Clearance

IMPORTANT: Do not interchange the main bearings. Reinstall in their original posi-
tion.
1. Clean all the old sealing material from the split line on the crankcase cover and cylinder
block.
2. Clean all the oil from the following areas:
• Main bearing surfaces on the cylinder block and crankcase cover.
• Main bearings.
• Crankshaft bearing surfaces.
NOTE: Refer to instructions in Cylinder Block Reassembly for selecting and installing main
bearings.
3. Install main bearings.
4. Place crankshaft into cylinder block.
53811
5. Place a piece of plastigauge onto each crankshaft bearing surface.
53812
a - Plastigauge
NOTE: Do not put plastigauge over the oil hole on the bearing surface of the crankshaft.
90-883065 APRIL 2001 Page 4B-21

6. Install crankcase cover. Apply oil to the cover bolts and torque cover bolts in sequence
and in two steps.
9 10
19 20
15 5 6 16
11 1 2 12
14 4 3 13
18 17
8 7
Crankcase Cover Bolt Torque

Center Bolts Qty. 10 1st Torque: 11 lb-ft. (15 Nm)
(M8x82) 2nd Torque: 22 lb-ft. (30 Nm)
Outer Bolts Qty. 10 1st Torque: 53 lb-in. (6 Nm)
(M6x35) 2nd Torque: 106 lb-in. (12 Nm)
7. Remove the crankcase cover. Measure the compressed plastigauge to check the main
bearing clearance. Replace bearings if clearance is not in specification.
53751
Main Bearing Clearance

0.0005 - 0.0017 in. (0.012 - 0.044 mm)
8. If replacement of the main bearings is required, refer to Main Bearing Selection and
Installation in Cylinder Block Reassembly.
Page 4B-22 90-883065 APRIL 2001

Checking Connecting Rod Bearing Clearance

IMPORTANT: Do not interchange used connecting rod bearings. Reinstall bearings
in their original position.
1. Clean all the oil from the connecting rod bearing surfaces and connecting rod journals
on the crankshaft.
NOTE: Refer to instructions in Cylinder Block Reassembly for selecting and installing con-
necting rod bearings.
2. Place a piece of plastigauge on the connecting rod journals.
a
53751
a - Plastigauge
IMPORTANT: Do not rotate connecting rod when checking clearance.
3. Install the connecting rod to the respective journal. Tighten connecting rod bolts in se-
quence and in two steps to the specified torque.
a d
c
c
b
a - Connecting Rod Cap

b - Crankpin
c - Scribe Marks on Cap and Rod
d - Connecting Rod Bolts
Connecting Rod Bolt Torque
1st Torque: 53 lb-in. (6 Nm)
2nd Torque: 150 lb-in. (17 Nm)
90-883065 APRIL 2001 Page 4B-23

4. Remove the connecting rod cap. Measure the compressed plastigauge to check the
connecting rod oil clearance. Replace bearings if oil clearance is not in specification.
53810
Connecting Rod Oil Clearance

0.0008 – 0.0020 in. (0.020 - 0.052 mm)
Thermostat
1. Measure the lift of the thermostat at the operating water temperature listed.
Water Temperature Valve Lift

118 - 123° F (48° - 51° C) Starts to Open
Above 145° F (63° C) Minimum 0.12 in. (3 mm)
Oil Pressure Switch

1. Check continuity of switch.
55845
Oil Switch Continuity Check

Below 2.9 psi (20.0 kPa) Continuity
Above 2.9 psi (20.0 kPa) No Continuity
Page 4B-24 90-883065 APRIL 2001

Cylinder Block Reassembly

Selecting New Main Bearings
1. Locate the main bearing code letters on the cylinder block.
2. Refer to the following reference chart to select the correct main bearings.
3. Use the color coded main bearings that match the main bearing code letter.
Main Bearing Code Main Bearing Color Code

Letter
A Blue
B Black
C Brown
#1
#2
a
#3
A B C
#4
#1
#5 #2
#3
#4
b
#5
53819
a - Main Bearing Code Letters

b - Main Bearing Identification Color Location
90-883065 APRIL 2001 Page 4B-25

Main Bearing Installation

IMPORTANT: Do not interchange used main bearings. Reinstall in their original posi-
tion.
1. Check clearance of each bearing, following procedure in Cleaning and Inspection.
2. Clean all the oil from the main bearing surfaces on the cylinder block and crankcase
cover.
3. Install main bearings. Make sure the locking tab on each bearing fits into its notch in the
cylinder block.
a - Main Bearings
b - Locking Tab
c - Notch in Cylinder Block
Page 4B-26 90-883065 APRIL 2001

Selecting New Connecting Rod Bearings

1. Locate the connecting rod bearing code letter that is scribed on the side of the connect-
ing rod.
2. Refer to the following reference chart to select the correct connecting rod bearings.
3. Use the color coded connecting rod bearings that match the connecting rod bearing
code letter.
Connecting Rod Connecting Rod

Bearing Code Letter Bearing Color Code
A Blue
B Black
C Brown
A
B
C
53816
a - Connecting Rod Bearing Code Letters

b - Connecting Rod Bearing Identification Color Location
Installing Connecting Rod Bearings

IMPORTANT: Do not interchange used connecting rod bearings. Reinstall bearings
in their original position.
1. Clean all the oil from the bearing surfaces on the connecting rod.
2. Install connecting rod bearings. Make sure the locking lug on each bearing fits into its
notch.
b 53815
a - Connecting Rod Bearings

b - Fit the Locking Lugs into the Notches
90-883065 APRIL 2001 Page 4B-27

Connecting Rod Installation

1. Lubricate the piston pin with oil and assemble the piston to the connecting rod. Always
use new circlips.
IMPORTANT: Install the split end of the circlip into the groove first, push the other end
down until it snaps into the groove. If the shape of the circlip is permanently distorted
when attempting installation, discard it and use a new one.
IMPORTANT: Install side of connecting rod marked with a “Y” towards “UP” on piston
face.
IMPORTANT: Piston pin clip should be installed with end gap facing opposite of pry
point.
b e
110
c
d
a - Connecting Rod
b - Piston
c - Piston Pin
d - Piston Pin Clip (2)
e - Piston Pin Clip End Gap
f - Pry Point
Page 4B-28 90-883065 APRIL 2001

Piston Ring Installation

IMPORTANT: Use caution when installing piston rings to avoid scratching piston.
1. Install the oil ring components as shown. Spread rings just enough to slip over piston.
2. Install the second and top compression rings (“T” side up). Spread rings just enough to
slip over piston.
3. Offset the piston ring end gaps.
110 e
110
f
c
a
d
b
50°
g
UP
91-24697 h
i
j
k
a - Oil Ring Spacer
b - Bottom Rail
c - Top Rail
d - Second Compression Ring (“T” side up)
e - Top Compression Ring (“T” side up)
f - “T” Mark Should Face Piston Crown
g - End Gap – Top Compression Ring
h - End Gap – Second Compression Ring
i - End Gap – Upper Oil Ring Rail
j - End Gap – Lower Oil Ring Rail
k - End Gap – Oil Ring Spacer
90-883065 APRIL 2001 Page 4B-29

Piston Installation
NOTE: Cylinder bores must be clean before installing pistons. Clean with light honing, as
necessary. After honing, clean cylinder bores with water and detergent. After cleaning, swab
cylinder bores several times with engine oil and a clean cloth, then wipe with a clean dry
cloth.
1. Lubricate pistons, rings. and cylinder walls with engine oil.
2. Install piston/connecting rod assembly using piston ring compressor tool.
NOTE: Install used pistons in their original locations(cylinders). Install piston with “UP” mark
on piston crown facing toward the flywheel end of block.
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
a
P/N FT2997
a - Piston Ring Compressor (FT2997)

b - Flywheel End
Crankshaft Installation
1. Lubricate the crankshaft bearing surfaces with engine oil.
a a a a a
53822
a - Crankshaft Bearing Surface
2. Lubricate the connecting rod journals with engine oil.

3. Lubricate the oil seals lips with oil.
Page 4B-30 90-883065 APRIL 2001

4. Install upper and lower oil seals on crankshaft. Position oil seal lips as shown.
5. If removed, install dowel pins
6. Carefully lower crankshaft into place.
IMPORTANT: Make sure the lower oil seal notch is positioned into the groove in the
crankcase.
c b
d
a
a
58273 53824
a - Dowel Pin (2) c - Lower Oil Seal (Raised Rib)

b - Upper Oil Seal d - Oil Seal Groove
7. Assemble the connecting rods to the crankshaft. Install the connecting rod caps, align-
ing the code letter marked on the connecting rod and cap.
8. Apply oil to the connecting rod bolts. Tighten bolts in sequence and in two steps to the
specified torque.
a a
53823
a - Apply Oil to Bolt Threads

Connecting Rod Bolt Torque
90-883065 APRIL 2001 Page 4B-31

Crankcase Cover Installation

1. Clean off all oil from the contacting surfaces of the crankcase cover and cylinder block.
IMPORTANT: Make sure the contacting surface of the crankcase cover and cylinder
block are clean before applying gasket sealant.
2. Apply a smooth even coat of Loctite Master Gasket Sealant to the contacting surfaces
on the crankcase cover. Use a small (paint type) roller to spread out the sealant for a
smooth even coverage. Instructions in gasket sealant kit must be followed exactly.
NOTE: Do not apply gasket sealant to the main bearings or the bolt holes.
b a 12
12 Loctite Master Gasket “514” (92-12564-2) 53821
a - Apply Loctite Master Gasket Sealant

b - Use a Roller to Apply a Smooth Even Coat
3. Install crankcase cover on cylinder block. Dowel pins will lineup the two mating surfaces,
be sure they are installed.
4. Apply oil to bolt threads. Torque the bolts in the sequence shown below. Tighten to the
1st torque value specified below. Repeat this torque sequence for the 2nd torque value.
9 10
19 20
15 5 6 16
11 1 2 12
14 4 3
13
18 17
8 7
Crankcase Cover Bolt Torque

Center Bolts Qty. 10 1st Torque: 11 lb-ft. (15 Nm)
(M8x82) 2nd Torque: 22 lb-ft. (30 Nm)
Outer Bolts Qty. 10 1st Torque: 53 lb-in. (6 Nm)
(M6x35) 2nd Torque: 106 lb-in. (12 Nm)
Page 4B-32 90-883065 APRIL 2001

Exhaust Cover Installation

1. Install oil filter. Tighten to specified torque using wrench p/n 91-802653.
2. Install exhaust cover along with the thermostat and thermostat cover. Use new gaskets.
3. Tighten screws to the first torque value in the sequence shown below. Repeat this proce-
dure for the second torque value.
4. Install the oil pressure and temperature switch.
f g b
11 c
d
8 e
7 4
3
a
2
h j
5
9 i
10
12 91-802653
53746
a - Exhaust Cover
b - Gasket
c - Thermostat
d - Gasket
e - Thermostat Cover
f - Oil Pressure Switch
g - Engine Coolant Temperature (ECT) Sensor
h - Oil Filter
i - Oil Filter Wrench
j - Exhaust Cover Screw (12) M6 x 35
Exhaust and Thermostat Cover Screw Torque
Oil Filter Torque

70 lb-in. (8 Nm)
90-883065 APRIL 2001 Page 4B-33

Drive Gear Installation

1. Install the drive gear components.
NOTE: Load Ring is for one time use and must be replaced if flywheel is removed.
a
a - Load Ring
b - Drive Gear
c - Drive Key
Page 4B-34 90-883065 APRIL 2001

Installing Powerhead Components

1. Reinstall cylinder head. Refer to Section 4A for installation and torque values.
53740
Engine Wiring Harness and Ignition/Electrical Component Installation

1. Install the wiring harness assembly to the powerhead in the same order removed. Refer
to the appropriate section for each components torque value.
Ignition Components
1. Refer to the appropriate section of the service manual for installation and torque values
of the following ignition components.
a. Timing Belt (Section 4A)
b. Ignition Coils (section 2A)
c. ECM (section 3C)
d. Crank Position Sensor (section 3C)
Charging and Starting System Components
1. Refer to Section 2B for installation and torque values of the following components:
a. Starter Motor
b. Voltage Regulator
c. Stator
d. Flywheel
Fuel Components
1. Refer to Section 3C for Intake Assembly/Vapor Separator Installation.
90-883065 APRIL 2001 Page 4B-35

Powerhead Installation
CAUTION
When lubricating the driveshaft splines do not allow any grease on top of the drive-
shaft. Grease on top of the driveshaft will force the shaft down when installing the
gearcase, causing the pinion gear to bind with the forward gear. This can result in
damage or failure of the gears.
1. Install powerhead and new base gasket. Tighten mounting bolts to specified torque.
IMPORTANT: If the crank shaft splines do not line up with the driveshaft splines, shift
the gearcase into forward, place a prop on the propshaft and rotate it counterclock-
wise. This will allow the splines to line up.
a
a - Powerhead Mounting Bolts (4 Each Side) M8 x 110
b - Hoist
c - Base Gasket
Powerhead Mounting Bolt Torque
33 lb-ft. (44.7 Nm)
Page 4B-36 90-883065 APRIL 2001

2. Re-connect throttle/shift linkage and control cable anchor bracket. Torque fasteners to
specified torque.
Remote Control Model
a
58810
a - Control Cable Anchor Bracket Screw (2) M6 x 16

b - Throttle/Shift Lever
c - Throttle/Shift Lever Screw (1) M8 x 70
Throttle/Shift Lever Mounting Screw Torque
100 lb-in. (11.3 Nm)
Cable Anchor Bracket Mounting Screw Torque

75 lb-in. (8.5 Nm)
3. Install the shift guide bracket screws. Tighten to specified torque.

Tiller Handle Model
58479
a - Shift Guide Bracket b - Screw (2) M6 x 25
Shift Guide Bracket Mounting Screw Torque
70 lb-in. (8 Nm)
90-883065 APRIL 2001 Page 4B-37

4. Reconnect hoses. Use sta-straps to fasten all hose connections.
d
a
a - Crankcase Vent Hose c - Fuel Hose (In)

b - Crankcase Breather Hose d - Fuel Hose (Out)
5. Reconnect the power trim harness wires.
6. Install spark plugs
7. Install bottom cowl. Tighten screws to specified torque.
a
b

b - Lower Cowl
Bottom Cowl Screw Torque
60 lb-in. (6.8 Nm)
8. Connect battery cables to battery terminals (red goes to positive terminal).

9. Check engine oil level.
Tiller Handle Models
1. Refer to section 7B for installation of throttle cables, shift rod and tiller handle wiring.
Page 4B-38 90-883065 APRIL 2001

LUBRICATION
POWERHEAD
Section 4C - Lubrication
Table of Contents
Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4C-1 Cleaning and Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4C-3
Oil Pump Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4C-2 Oil Pump Reassembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4C-4
Oil Pump Disassembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4C-2 Oil Pump Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4C-5
Specifications
4
Pump Type Trochoid C
Engine Oil Pressure (Warm Engine)
@ 3000 rpm 30-40 psi (207-278 kPa)
Engine Oil Pan Capacity Either 3 Qts. or 3 Liters
Oil Pump:
Outer Rotor to Housing “a” 0.0045 - 0.009 in. (0.11 - 0.23 mm)
Inner Rotor to Outer Rotor “b” 0.005 in. (0.12 mm)
Rotor to Housing “c” 0.0015 - 0.003 in. (0.04 - 0.08 mm)
LUBRICATION a
SYSTEM bb
cc
90-883065 APRIL 2001 Page 4C-1

LUBRICATION
Oil Pump Removal

IMPORTANT: Do not twist/turn oil pump from side to side while removing it from cylin-
der head, as oil pump sealing o-rings will be cut. Pull oil pump away from cylinder
head by inserting a screwdriver in the pry points on oil pump body.
1. Refer to section 4A for Cylinder Head Removal.
2. Remove oil pump mounting screws. Separate oil pump from cylinder head.
a - Mounting Screw (4) M6x40
Oil Pump Disassembly

1. If screws cannot be loosened with a screwdriver, heat them with a non-flame type heat
source (heat lamp). This will loosen the Loctite sealant on the screw threads. Remove
screws.
a - Screw (2)
Page 4C-2 90-883065 APRIL 2001

LUBRICATION
2. Disassemble Oil Pump.
c a
a - Cover Seal
b - Outer Rotor
c - Inner Rotor
d - Shaft
e - Cross Pin
Cleaning and Inspection

Oil Pump
1. Check oil pump components for pitting, scratches, and for the following measurements.
Replace oil pump if worn or out of specification.
2. Using a feeler gauge, measure the following oil pump clearances:
a. Between outer rotor and pump housing (a).
b. Between the inner rotor and outer rotor (b).
c. Between the outer rotor and pump housing (c).
55803
a
b
c
Oil Pump Clearances

a 0.0045 - 0.009 in. (0.03 - 0.15 mm)
b 0.005 in. (0.12 mm)
c 0.0015 - 0.003 in. (0.03 - 0.08 mm)
90-883065 APRIL 2001 Page 4C-3

LUBRICATION
Oil Pump Reassembly

1. Reassemble the oil pump assembly.
2. Lubricate the outer and inner rotors thoroughly with engine oil.
c a
a - Cover Seal
b - Outer Rotor
c - Inner Rotor
d - Shaft
e - Cross Pin
3. Fasten cover with two screws. Apply Loctite 222 to threads. Tighten screws to the speci-
fied torque.
a 51
51 Loctite “222” (92-809818)

a - Screw (2) M6 X 16
Oil Pump Cover Screw Torque
70 lb-in. (8 Nm)
Page 4C-4 90-883065 APRIL 2001

LUBRICATION

1. Place O-ring seals on the oil pump. Lubricate the O-rings with oil.
2. Prime the oil pump by pouring approximately 1 fl oz (30 ml) of engine oil into the oil pump
body.
a
a
58260
a - O-Ring Seals
b - 30 ml of Engine Oil
IMPORTANT: When the oil pump mounting surface gets close to the mating surface
of the cylinder head, do not twist/turn oil pump from side to side. The sharp edges
on the cylinder head will cut the oil pump sealing o-rings.
3. Align oil pump shaft with the camshaft and install the oil pump.
4. Fasten with 4 screws. Tighten screws to the specified torque.
e
d
c
b a
a - Oil Pump Assembly d - Oil Pump Mounting Surface

b - Align Slot with Camshaft Projection e - Cylinder Head/Oil Pump Mating Sur-
c - Screw (4)-M6x40 face
Oil Pump Mounting Screw Torque
70 lb-in. (8 Nm)
90-883065 APRIL 2001 Page 4C-5

CLAMP/SWIVEL BRACKETS & DRIVE SHAFT HOUSING
MID-SECTION
Section 5A - Clamp/Swivel Brackets & Drive Shaft Housing
Table of Contents
Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5A-1 Bottom Cowl Removal/Installation . . . . . . . . . 5A-14
Swivel Bracket . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5A-2 Adaptor Plate Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5A-15
Steering Arm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5A-4 Cleaning Oil Sump . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5A-19
Transom Bracket . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5A-6 Adaptor Plate Inspection/Cleaning . . . . . . 5A-19
Adaptor Plate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5A-8 Adaptor Plate Reassembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5A-20
Driveshaft Housing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5A-10 Driveshaft Housing Reassembly . . . . . . . . . . . 5A-21
Bottom Cowl . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5A-12
Specifications
Transom Height: 5
Long Shaft 20 in. (51 cm) A
Steering Pivot Range:
MID-SECTION Tiller 90°
Remote 60°
Full Tilt Up Angle 71°
Allowable Transom Thickness 2-3/4 in. (69.8 mm)
Part No. Description

92-809822 Loctite Pipe Sealant w/Teflon
92-850735A1 Anti-Corrosion Grease
92-850736A1 2-4-C w/Teflon
92-828000A12 4-Stroke Outboard Oil
90-883065 APRIL 2001 Page 5A-1

SWIVEL BRACKET
1
A
95 4
5
95
3
7
2
6
10 9
16
15
10
11
12
8
95 10 (HANDLE VERSION)
13
14
95
95 2-4-C With Teflon (92-825407A12)

A = TORQUE NUT 120 LB. (13.5 N_M) AND THEN BACK OFF 1/4 TURN.
Page 5A-2 90-883065 APRIL 2001

SWIVEL BRACKET
TORQUE
REF.
REF
1 1 LINK ROD
2 1 SCREW (1-1/2 IN.) 20 27.0
3 1 WASHER ELECTRIC NON HANDLE
4 2 WASHER
5 2 NUT (.375-24) 120 13.5
6 1 PUCK
7 1 BUSHING
8 1 SWIVEL BRACKET
9 2 BEARING
10 2 GREASE FITTING (Qty. of 3 required on Handle Versions
11 1 DECAL-Co-Pilot (HANDLE)
12 1 DECAL-Serial Overlaminate
13 1 BUSHING (LOWER)
14 1 SEAL
1 SCREW (M8 x 10) (HANDLE)
15
1 SCREW (M8 x 25) NON-HANDLE
16 1 SEAL
90-883065 APRIL 2001 Page 5A-3

STEERING ARM
1
2
5
3
8
5 6 9
4
95 10
11
95 12
19
20
95
21
22 13
94
23
18
24
15
25
14
27 26
17
94 Anti-Corrosion Grease (92-78376-A6)

16
95 2-4-C With Teflon (92-825407A12)
Page 5A-4 90-883065 APRIL 2001

STEERING ARM
TORQUE
REF.
REF
1 2 NUT 50 5.7
2 1 STRAP
3 2 MOUNT
4 8 SCREW (M6 X 20) 130 14.7
5 2 BUMPER
6 1 RETAINING RING
7 1 STEERING ARM
8 1 BRACKET (NON-HANDLE)
9 1 TAB WASHER (NON-HANDLE)
10 2 SCREW (M10 X 30) 32 3.7
11 2 SCREW (M12 X 154) 50 67.8
12 1 SPACER
13 1 SWIVEL TUBE
14 1 GROUND STRAP
15 1 GROUND STRAP
16 2 SCREW (M10 X 105) 32.5 44
17 1 STRAP - LOWER MOUNT
18 3 SCREW (SELF-TAPPING) Drive Tight
19 1 NUT (.375-24) (HANDLE)
20 1 LEVER - CO-PILOT (HANDLE)
21 1 WASHER (HANDLE)
22 1 ROD (THREADED) (HANDLE)
23 1 BRACKET PLATE (HANDLE)
24 1 DISC (HANDLE)
25 1 PLATE (HANDLE)
26 1 DISC (HANDLE)
27 2 SCREW (HEX SHOULDER) (HANDLE) 70 7.9
90-883065 APRIL 2001 Page 5A-5

TRANSOM BRACKET
9
8
7 10
95
5
21
11
4
2
3
11
6
25 17
26
27 95
16
95 18
20
21 31
12
19 1
23 13
15
28
24 14
33 32
22 29
30
95 2-4-C With Teflon (92-825407A12)
Page 5A-6 90-883065 APRIL 2001

TRANSOM BRACKET
TORQUE
REF.
REF
1 1 TRANSOM BRACKET (PORT)
2 1 GREASE FITTING
3 1 GROOVE PIN
4 1 TRANSOM BRACKET (STARBOARD)
5 1 TILT LOCK LEVER
6 1 SPRING
7 1 NYLINER
8 1 SPRING
9 1 KNOB
10 1 GROOVE PIN
11 2 WASHER
12 1 ANCHOR BRACKET
13 1 ANODE ASSEMBLY
14 2 SCREW (M6 X 25) 60 6.8
15 2 WASHER
16 5 SCREW (30 MM) 25 33.9
17 1 SCREW (35 MM) 32.5 44
18 4 LOCKWASHER
19 2 NUT
20 1 TILT TUBE
Tighten nut to 32
21 2 NUT lb-ft and then back
off 1/4 turn.
22 1 SEAL KIT (NON-HANDLE)
23 1 O RING (NON-HANDLE)
24 1 SPACER (NON-HANDLE)
25 2 CLIP
26 1 C-WASHER
27 1 SCREW (10-16 X 5/8) Drive Tight
28 4 SCREW Drive Tight
29 4 WASHER Drive Tight
30 4 NUT
31 2 SCREW (M10 X 40)
32 2 WASHER
33 2 NUT
90-883065 APRIL 2001 Page 5A-7

ADAPTOR PLATE
4
1
2
7
5 6
21 9
8 10
11
12
5
5
13
14
15
15 17
9 Loctite PST Pipe Sealant (92-809822)
20
110 4 Stroke Outboard Oil (92-828000A12)
18
110
20 16
19
Page 5A-8 90-883065 APRIL 2001

ADAPTOR PLATE
TORQUE
REF.
REF
1 1 DIPSTICK
2 1 DIPSTICK TUBE
3 1 SEAL
4 1 HEAT SHIELD
5 4 DOWEL PIN
6 1 ELBOW
7 2 STA-STRAP
8 1 SEAL-DRIVESHAFT
9 1 BUSHING
10 1 PLUG-OIL PASSAGE 24.3 33
11 1 ADAPTOR PLATE
12 1 PLUG
13 1 GASKET
14 1 O RING
15 3 SCREW (M6 X 20) 75 8.5
16 1 OIL PRESSURE RELIEF VALVE 34 3.8
17 1 PLATE-TOP OIL PICKUP
18 1 HOSE-OIL PICKUP
19 1 BAFFLE
20 2 CLAMP
21 1 SCREW (M6 X 55) 150 17
90-883065 APRIL 2001 Page 5A-9

DRIVESHAFT HOUSING
1
15
5
7 6
4
3
24
25
18
14 8
19
26
20
23
10
22 12
11
21
13
16
17
Page 5A-10 90-883065 APRIL 2001

DRIVESHAFT HOUSING
TORQUE
REF.
REF
1 1 SEAL–water tube
2 1 EXHAUST PIPE
3 8 SCREW (M8x110) 33 44.7
4 5 SCREW (M8 x 45) 28 38
5 1 DRAIN PLUG 210 17.5 23.5
6 1 GASKET
7 2 BUMPER
8 1 GROMMET
1 STUD (M10 x 50) (NON-BIGFOOT) 12 16.3
9
1 STUD (M10 x 100) (BIGFOOT) 12 16.3
10 1 WASHER
11 1 NUT 40 54.5
12 1 WATER TUBE
13 1 GUIDE
14 1 BUMPER (LONG)
15 1 DRIVESHAFT HOUSING
16 1 PLATE
17 1 SCREW (M10 X 25) 26 35.3
18 1 SPEEDOMETER PICK UP
19 1 CONNECTOR
20 1 FITTING
21 1 SPACER
22 1 COUPLING
23 1 BUSHING
24 2 WASHER
25 2 NUT
26 1 STA-STRAP
90-883065 APRIL 2001 Page 5A-11

BOTTOM COWL
1
7
9
12 10
14 6
13
15
13
8
14
16 5
3
19
3
11
17
18
4
2
95 2-4-C With Teflon (92-850736A1)
Page 5A-12 90-883065 APRIL 2001

BOTTOM COWL
TORQUE
REF.
REF
1 1 BOTTOM COWL (LONG-PORT)
2 1 BOTTOM COWL (LONG-STBD.)
3 6 SCREW (M6 X 30) 60 6.8
4 1 WASHER
5 1 SEAL
6 1 WASHER
7 1 GASKET
8 1 SCREW (M6 X 60) 60 6.8
9 1 FITTING-TELLTALE
10 1 BOOT
11 1 STA-STRAP
12 1 LEVER-COWL LATCH
13 2 BUSHING
14 2 WAVE WASHER
15 1 LATCH HOOK
16 1 SCREW (M6 X 16) 60 6.8
17 1 GROMMET
18 1 SWITCH
19 1 GROMMET
90-883065 APRIL 2001 Page 5A-13

Bottom Cowl Removal/Installation
a - Cowl Screws (6) M6 x 30

b - Cowl Screw (1) M6 x 60
c - Washer
d - Grommet
e - Boot
f - Gasket
Page 5A-14 90-883065 APRIL 2001

Adaptor Plate Removal

1. Remove powerhead, refer to section 4B.
2. Remove lower unit, refer to section 6.
3. Rotate shift linkage until the flat on the shift shaft bracket lines up with the flat on the
bushing. Pull the shift shaft straight up and out.
a c
58471
58294
a - Shift Bracket Flat
b - Bushing Flat
c - Shift Shaft
4. Remove wire grommet from adaptor plate. Pull power trim wires out of grommet.
58293
a - Trim Wire Grommet

b - Power Trim Wires
90-883065 APRIL 2001 Page 5A-15

5. Remove nuts and washers from lower mount bolts.

6. Remove ground strap bolt.
c d a
58297
a - Nut (2)
b - Lower Mount Bolt (2) M10 x 105
c - Washer (2)
d - Ground Strap Bolt
7. Remove nuts and washers from upper mount bolts.
f
e
c
a b
a
a
58295
a - Upper Mount Bolt (2) M12 x 154
b - Washer (2)
c - Bumper (2)
d - Mount (2)
e - Strap
f - Nut (2)
Page 5A-16 90-883065 APRIL 2001

8. Separate drive shaft housing from transom bracket mount bolts by pulling backward.
b a
58483
a - Driveshaft Housing
b - Transom Bracket
9. Remove drain plug on port side of driveshaft housing to drain remaining oil from sump.
a - Drain Plug
90-883065 APRIL 2001 Page 5A-17

10. Remove five (5) adaptor plate screws from aft/underside of driveshaft housing.
a a
58296
a - Screw (5) M8 x 45
11. Remove allen head screw on top of adaptor plate.
58480
a - Allen Head Screw M6 x 55
12. Remove adaptor plate from driveshaft housing.

13. Inspect powerhead base gasket and adaptor plate gasket before reassembly. Replace
if necessary.
Page 5A-18 90-883065 APRIL 2001

Cleaning Oil Sump

1. Inspect and clean oil sump thoroughly before reassembly.
58467
a - Oil Sump
Adaptor Plate Inspection/Cleaning
1. Disassemble, clean and inspect adaptor plate components as required.
2. Oil pick-up screen in baffle should be clean and free of damage.
3. Oil pick-up hose must be in good condition and clamped securely at either end.
4. Oil pressure relief valve must be clean and free to open and close without sticking.
b
d
c
e b
58488
a - Gasket
b - Dowel Pin (2)
c - Screw (3) M6 x 20
d - Oil Pressure Relief Valve/Deflector Cup Assembly
e - Oil Pick-up Hose
f - Baffle Screen
90-883065 APRIL 2001 Page 5A-19

Adaptor Plate Reassembly

1. If removed during cleaning/inspection, install adaptor plate components per the above
diagram. Tighten fasteners to specified torque.
Pickup Hose/Gasket Screw Torque

75 lb-in. (8.5 Nm)
Oil Pressure Relief Valve Torque (Oiled)

17 lb-ft. (23 Nm)
1. Place adaptor plate on to driveshaft housing, install five (5) screws on the aft/underside
of the driveshaft housing and tighten to specified torque.
a a
58296
a - Screw (5) M8 x 45
Adaptor Plate Screw Torque
33 lb-ft. (44.7 Nm)
2. Install allen head screw on top side of adaptor plate. Tighten to specified torque.
58480
a - Allen Head Screw M6 x 55

Adaptor Plate Screw Torque
150 lb-in. (16.9 Nm)
Page 5A-20 90-883065 APRIL 2001

Driveshaft Housing Reassembly

1. Replace driveshaft housing assembly to transom bracket. Two people may be required
for this, one to hold the driveshaft housing, the other to install the upper and lower bolts.
2. Tighten lower bolts to specified torque. Make sure washers are in the correct position.
3. Tighten ground strap screw.
c a
d 58297
a - Nut (2) c - Ground Strap Screw

b - Lower Mount Bolt (2) M10 x 105 d - Washer (2)
Driveshaft Housing Lower Bolt Torque
32.5 lb-ft. (44 Nm)
4. Tighten upper mount bolts to specified torque.
58295
a - Upper Mount Bolt(2) M12 x 154
Driveshaft Housing Upper Bolt Torque
50 lb-ft. (68 Nm)
90-883065 APRIL 2001 Page 5A-21

5. Replace drain plug into housing and torque to specified torque.
a - Drain Plug
Drain Plug Torque
17.5 lb-ft (24 Nm)
6. Slide the shift shaft through the bushing, into the driveshaft housing.
58294
a - Shift Shaft
b - Bushing
Page 5A-22 90-883065 APRIL 2001

7. Rotate shift shaft so the flat on the shift shaft bracket lines up with the flat on the bushing.
58471
a - Shift Shaft Bracket

b - Bushing Flat
8. Rotate shift shaft and position bracket in the neutral position.
58487
a - Shift Shaft Bracket
90-883065 APRIL 2001 Page 5A-23

9. Install grommet and pull power trim wires up thru adaptor plate grommet.
58293
a - Trim Wire Grommet

b - Power Trim Wires
10. Reinstall the following components:

• Lower unit, refer to section 6.
• Powerhead, refer to section 4B.
Page 5A-24 90-883065 APRIL 2001

POWER TRIM
MID-SECTION
Section 5B - Power Trim
Table of Contents
Special Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5B-2 Power Trim Disassembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5B-30
Quicksilver Lubricants and Service Aids . . . . 5B-2 Trim Motor Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5B-31
Power Trim . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5B-4 Pump and Components Removal . . . . . . . 5B-31
Theory Of Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5B-6 Manifold Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5B-32
Adjustments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5B-6 Shock Rod Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5B-33
Trimming Characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5B-6 Shock Rod Disassembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5B-33
Trailering Outboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5B-7 Memory Piston Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5B-36
Tilting Outboard Up and Down Manually . 5B-7 Cleaning/Inspection/Repair . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5B-37
Power Trim Flow Diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5B-8 Trim Motor Electrical Tests . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5B-37
Trim Up Circuit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5B-8 Reassembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5B-38
Tilt Circuit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5B-10 O-Ring and Seal Placement . . . . . . . . . . . 5B-38
Maximum Tilt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5B-12 O-ring Sizes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5B-39
Down Circuit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Shock Function Up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5B-14
5B-16
Power Trim Reassembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Shock Rod Reassembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5B-41
5B-41
5
Shock Function Return . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5B-18 Shock Rod Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5B-43 B
Manual Release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5B-20 Trim Limit Assembly Installation . . . . . . . . 5B-44
Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5B-22 Manual Release Valve Installation . . . . . . 5B-44
Preliminary Checks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5B-22 Manifold Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5B-45
Hydraulic System Troubleshooting Oil Pump Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5B-46
Flow Chart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5B-23 Pressure Operated Assembly Installation 5B-46
Troubleshooting the Power Trim Reservoir/Motor Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . 5B-47
Electrical System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5B-27 Bleeding Power Trim Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5B-48
Power Trim System Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5B-29 Installation of Power Trim System . . . . . . . . . 5B-48
90-883065 APRIL 2001 Page 5B-1

POWER TRIM
Special Tools
1. Spanner Wrench P/N 91-74951
2. Lock-Ring Pliers Snap-On P/N SRP2
3. Expanding Rod P/N CG 41-11*
4. Collet P/N CG 41-14*
5. Heat Lamp P/N 91-63209
Quicksilver Lubricants and Service Aids

92-90100A12 Power Trim Fluid
92-850736A1 2-4-C w/Teflon
Page 5B-2 90-883065 APRIL 2001

POWER TRIM
Notes:
90-883065 APRIL 2001 Page 5B-3

POWER TRIM
Power Trim
17 A
19
2 B
4
12
16
8 9
D
5 E
13
6 15
6 C 11
11 11 7
6 6 11
11 11
17
11 14
10
18 15
11
D
66 Loctite 242 (92-809821)
NOTE: Lubricate all O-rings using Quicksilver Power Trim and Steering Fluid. If not avail-
able, use automotive (ATF) automatic transmission fluid.
NOTE: It is recommended that all O-rings be replaced when servicing tilt system.
Page 5B-4 90-883065 APRIL 2001

POWER TRIM
Power Trim
TORQUE
REF.
REF
NO. QTY. DESCRIPTION lb-in. lb-ft Nm
– 1 POWER TRIM PUMP
1 1 SHOCK ROD KIT
2 1 MEMORY PISTON ASSEMBLY
3 1 O RING REBUILD KIT
4 2 O RING
5 1 CYLINDER ASSEMBLY
1 TRIM LIMIT VALVE KIT (NON-BIGFOOT)
6
1 TRIM LIMIT VALVE KIT (BIGFOOT)
7 1 PUMP ASSEMBLY
8 1 MOTOR KIT
9 1 RESERVOIR PLUG
10 1 MANUAL RELEASE ASSEMBLY
11 1 MANIFOLD KIT
12 1 SCREW KIT (MOTOR)
13 1 DRIVE SHAFT
14 1 FILTER KIT
15 1 P.O. CHECK ASSEMBLY KIT
16 1 CABLE
– 1 O RING KIT (COMPLETE TRIM)
17 2 GROOVE PIN
18 1 ANCHOR PIN
19 1 PIN
A - Torque cylinder cap to 45 lb-ft (61 Nm)

B - Torque screws to 80 lb-in. (9.0 Nm)
C - Torque screws to 70 lb-in. (7.9 Nm)
D - Torque plugs to 120 lb-in. (13.5 Nm)
E - Torque screws to 100 lb-in. (11 Nm)
F - Torque shock piston to 90 lb-ft (122 Nm)
90-883065 APRIL 2001 Page 5B-5

POWER TRIM
Theory Of Operation
The Power Trim system consists of an electric motor, pressurized fluid reservoir, pump and
trim cylinder.
The remote control (or trim panel) is equipped with a switch that is used for trimming the
outboard “up” and “down”, and for tilting the outboard for shallow water operation (at slow
speed) or for “trailering”. The outboard can be trimmed “up” or “down” while engine is under
power or when engine is not running.
Adjustments
Trimming Characteristics
NOTE: Because varying hull designs react differently in various degrees of rough water, it
is recommended to experiment with trim positions to determine whether trimming “up” or
“down” will improve the ride in rough water.
When trimming your outboard from a mid-trim position (trim tab in neutral, straight fore-and-
aft, position), you can expect the following results:
TRIMMING OUTBOARD “UP” (“OUT”)
WARNING
Excessive trim “out” may reduce the stability of some high speed hulls. To correct
instability at high speed, reduce the power gradually and trim the motor “In” slightly
before resuming high speed operation. (Rapid reduction in power will cause a sud-
den change of steering torque and may cause additional momentary boat instabili-
ty.)
• Will lift bow of boat, generally increasing top speed.
• Transfers steering torque harder to left on installations below 23 in. transom height.
• Increases clearance over submerged objects.
• In excess, can cause porpoising and/or ventilation.
• In excess, can cause insufficient water supply to water pump resulting in serious water
pump and/or powerhead overheating damage.
WARNING
Excessive engine trim angle will result in insufficient water supply to water pump
causing water pump and/or powerhead overheating damage. Make sure that water
level is above gear housing water intake holes whenever engine is running.
Operating “Up” circuit will actuate the “up” relay (located under engine cowl) and close the
electric motor circuit. The electric motor will drive the pump, thus forcing automatic transmis-
sion fluid through internal passageways into the “up” side of the trim cylinder.
The trim cylinder/trim rod will position the engine at the desired trim angle within the 20°
maximum trim range. The power trim system is designed so the engine cannot be trimmed
beyond the 20° maximum trim angle as long as engine RPM is above approximately 2000
RPM.
The engine can be raised beyond the 20° maximum trim angle for shallow water operation,
etc., by keeping the engine RPM below 2000 RPM. If engine RPM increases above 2000
RPM, the thrust created by the propeller (if deep enough in the water) will cause the trim
system to automatically lower the engine back to the 20° maximum trim angle.
Page 5B-6 90-883065 APRIL 2001

POWER TRIM
TRIMMING OUTBOARD “DOWN” (“IN”)
WARNING
Excessive speed at minimum trim “In” may cause undesirable and/or unsafe steer-
ing conditions. Each boat should be tested for handling characteristics after any
adjustment is made to the tilt angle (tilt pin relocation).
• Will help planing off, particularly with a heavy load.
• Usually improves ride in choppy water.
• In excess, can cause boat to veer to the left or right (bow steer).
• Transfers steering torque harder to right (or less to the left).
• Improves planing speed acceleration (by moving tilt pin one hole closer to transom).
Operating “Down” circuit will actuate the “down” relay (located under engine cowl) and close
the electric motor circuit (motor will run in opposite direction of the “Up” circuit). The electric
motor will drive the pump, thus forcing automatic transmission fluid through internal pas-
sageways into the “down” side of the trim cylinder. The trim rod will move the engine down-
ward to the desired angle.
Trailering Outboard
WARNING
Excessive engine trim angle will result in insufficient water supply to water pump
causing water pump and/or powerhead overheating damage. Make sure that water
level is above gear housing water intake holes whenever engine is running.
While operating “up” circuit, the cylinder rod will continue to tilt the outboard to a full up posi-
tion for trailering.
Tilting Outboard Up and Down Manually
WARNING
Before loosening the manual release valve, make sure all persons are clear of en-
gine, as engine will drop to full “down” position when valve is loosened.
With power trim installed, the outboard can be raised or lowered manually by opening the
manual release valve 3 to 4 turns (counterclockwise).
55170
a - Manual Release Valve
90-883065 APRIL 2001 Page 5B-7

POWER TRIM
Power Trim Flow Diagrams
TRIM UP CIRCUIT
a b
d
l
j
i k
v e
u h
m n Reservoir Oil
g f g
t
Í Í
Filtered Feed Oil
Í Í o
p
Return Oil
Oil Under Pressure
Up Pressure Impact Relief Pressure #22

1625 psi (3060 hp) 8801110 psi (3060 hp)
2800 psi (75125 hp) 12201420 psi (75125 hp)
mininmum s r Tilt Relief Pressure
250400 psi (3060 hp)
q 500700 psi (4060 hp Bigfoot)
540990 psi (75125 hp)
a - Piston Rod m - Shuttle Valve

b - End Cap n - Up Circuit Pressure Operated Valve
c - Electric Motor o - Manifold Reverse Suction Valve
d - Reservoir Oil p - Manual Release Valve
e - Down Circuit Pressure Relief Valve q - Manifold
f - Down Circuit Pressure Operated Valve r - Tilt Relief Valve
g - Filter (2 shown for clarity) s - Tilt Relief Piston
h - Shock Return Valve t - Memory Piston
i - Up Circuit Suction Port u - Shock Piston
j - Oil Pump v - Impact Relief Valve
k - Down Circuit Suction Port w - Cylinder
l - Oil Fill Cap
Page 5B-8 90-883065 APRIL 2001

POWER TRIM
Trim Up
When the trim switch is activated in the up position, the electric motor (c) begins to rotate
the oil pump gears (j), the oil pump draws a small amount of oil through the filter (g) and
through the up circuit suction port (i). The oil pump gear (j) rotation forces oil into the pas-
sages for the up circuit. Oil, under pressure, will slide the shuttle valve (m) against the down
circuit pressure operated valve (f). The shuttle valve will mechanically open the down pres-
sure operated valve, allowing oil from the down cavity of the trim cylinder to flow into the oil
pump. This returning oil, from the down cavity, will supply most of the oil required for the up
circuit. Oil in the up circuit is blocked from returning into the reservoir by the ball inside the
down circuit suction port (k). The pressure of the oil will force the up circuit pressure oper-
ated valve (n) to open, allowing the oil to enter the passages inside the manifold (q) leading
to the trim cylinder (w) up cavity. Oil is blocked from all other passages by the closed manual
release valve (p). Oil under pressure will enter the trim cylinder below the memory piston
(t). With an increasing amount of oil entering the cylinder, the memory piston contacts the
shock piston (u) and forces the piston rod (a) up and out, raising the outboard motor. Oil on
the top of the shock piston exits through a passage running down along the side of the cylin-
der and enters the manifold passages. The oil is drawn back into the pump (j) through the
open down circuit pressure operated valve (f) and enters the pump as supply for the up cir-
cuit.
90-883065 APRIL 2001 Page 5B-9

POWER TRIM
Tilt Circuit
a b
u v
h
d j l
i k
t
e
f Reservoir Oil
g m n
g
Í Í
Filtered Feed Oil
Í Í o
Return Oil
Oil Under Pressure

p
Impact Relief Pressure #22
Up Pressure 8801110 psi (3060 hp)
1625 psi (3060 hp) 12201420 psi (75125 hp)
2800 psi (75125 hp)
minimun s r
Tilt Relief Pressure
250400 psi (3060 hp)
q 500700 psi (4060 hp Bigfoot)
540990 psi (75125 hp)
l - Oil Fill Cap
Page 5B-10 90-883065 APRIL 2001

POWER TRIM
Tilt Up
In the up mode, as the piston rod (a) extends from the cylinder (w), the memory piston (t)
clears or uncovers the pressure relief passage. Oil from the up cavity will enter this passage
and, if required, causes the tilt relief piston (s) to open the tilt pressure relief valve (r). This
valve lowers the amount of pressure available to lift the outboard motor. With the engine in
forward gear, and at high engine rpm, the oil pressure available will not be able to overcome
the propeller thrust, limiting the trim range to below the pressure relief orifice. When the en-
gine rpm falls or if engine is not in forward gear, the oil pressure is available to extend the
piston rod (a) up into the tilt range.
90-883065 APRIL 2001 Page 5B-11

POWER TRIM
Maximum Tilt
a b
v
u h
t
c
d j l
i k
e
f Reservoir Oil
m n
g g Filtered Feed Oil
Í Í
Í Í
Return Oil
Oil Under Pressure

o
p Impact Relief Pressure #22
8801110 psi (3060 hp)
12201420 psi (75125 hp)
Up Pressure s r Tilt Relief Pressure

1625 psi (3060 hp) q 250400 psi (3060 hp)
2800 psi (75125 hp) 500700 psi (4060 hp Bigfoot)
minimum 540990 psi (75125 hp)

l - Oil Fill Cap
Page 5B-12 90-883065 APRIL 2001

POWER TRIM
Maximum Tilt
With the piston rod at maximum travel, and due to no rod movement, the pressure inside
of the trim cylinder (w) will increase to the pressure required to move the tilt relief piston (s).
The tilt relief piston’s “pin” opens the tilt relief valve (r). Up pressure flows into the trim relief
passage, and returns back into the reservoir.
90-883065 APRIL 2001 Page 5B-13

POWER TRIM
Down Circuit
a b
d
i j l
k
u v f m n Reservoir Oil
h g
g
Í ÍÍ
Filtered Feed Oil
Í ÍÍ
t Return Oil
o
p Oil Under Pressure
8801110 psi (3060 hp)
12201420 psi (75125 hp)
Up Pressure s r Tilt Relief Pressure

1625 psi (3060 hp) 250400 psi (3060 hp)
2800 psi (75125 hp) q 500700 psi (4060 hp Bigfoot)
minimum 540990 psi (75125 hp)

l - Oil Fill Cap
Page 5B-14 90-883065 APRIL 2001

POWER TRIM
Down Mode
When the trim switch is activated in the down position, the electric motor (c) will rotate the
pump (j) in the opposite direction. With the oil pump gears rotating backwards, the flow of
oil is reversed. Oil is drawn through the filter (g), through the down circuit suction port (k)
and into the oil pump (j). The pump forces pressurized oil into the down passages. Oil will
slide the shuttle valve (m) into the up circuit pressure operated valve (n). The shuttle valve
will mechanically open the up circuit pressure operated valve and allow oil, from the up cav-
ity of the trim cylinder (w), to return into the oil pump. This returning oil, from the up cavity,
will supply the oil required for the down circuit. The oil is blocked from returning into the res-
ervoir by the ball (i) inside the up circuit suction port. Oil, under pressure, opens the down
circuit pressure operated valve (f) and enters the down passages inside of the manifold (q).
The manifold passage connects into the trim cylinder passage leading to the top of the cylin-
der. The cavity, inside the cylinder, above the shock piston (u) is the down cavity. As the
down cavity fills with oil, the piston rod (a) retracts into the cylinder, lowering the outboard
motor. Oil from the up cavity exits the cylinder and is drawn back into the pump through the
open up circuit pressure operated valve (n). When the piston rod reached full travel, the oil
pressure inside the down circuit will rise until the down pressure regulating valve (e) opens,
bypassing oil back into the reservoir. When the trim button is released, and the oil pump
stops supplying pressure, both of the pressure operated valves (f & n) will close, and if open,
the down pressure relief valve (e) will close. The closed valves will lock the fluid on either
side of the shock piston (u) & memory piston (t), holding the outboard motor in position.
90-883065 APRIL 2001 Page 5B-15

POWER TRIM
Shock Function Up
a b
v
u h
d l
j
t i k
e
f Reservoir Oil
n
g m
Return Oil
g
Í Í Oil Under Pressure
Í Í p
o Impact Relief Pressure #22
8801110 psi (3060 hp)
12201420 psi (75125 hp)
s Tilt Relief Pressure

r
2800 psi (75125 hp) 540990 psi (75125 hp)
minimum
l - Oil Fill Cap
Page 5B-16 90-883065 APRIL 2001

POWER TRIM
Shock Function Up
Oil inside the down cavity is locked in a static position by the closed down circuit pressure
operated valve (f), the manual release valve (p) and the manifold reverse suction valve (o).
If the outboard strikes an underwater object while in forward gear, the piston rod (a) will try
to rapidly extend from the cylinder (w), and the pressure increases inside the trim cylinder
down cavity and connecting passages. When the pressure increases to the level required,
the impact relief valves (v), located inside the shock piston (u), will open and allow the fluid
to pass through it. As the fluid passes through the piston, the piston rod (a) will extend from
the trim cylinder. The memory piston (t) is held in position by vacuum, created by the oil in
the up cavity being locked in a static position. Therefore, oil passing through the shock pis-
ton is trapped between the memory piston (t) and shock piston (u).
90-883065 APRIL 2001 Page 5B-17

POWER TRIM
Shock Function Return
a b
v
h
u
d l
t i j k
e
f Reservoir Oil
m n
Í
g Return Oil
g
Í Í Oil Under Pressure
Í Í o
p
8801110 psi (3060 hp)
12201420 psi (75125 hp)
s r Tilt Relief Pressure

2800 psi (75125 hp) 540990 psi (75125 hp)
minimum

l - Oil Fill Cap
Page 5B-18 90-883065 APRIL 2001

POWER TRIM

After the engine clears the under water object, the weight of the engine will increase the oil
pressure between the memory piston (t) and shock piston (u) to the level required to open
the shock return valve (h), inside the shock piston, allowing the oil to bleed back through
the shock piston into the down cavity. If required, additional oil will enter the down cavity
through the manifold reverse suction valve (o). This will return the engine back against the
memory piston (t) and into the original running position.
90-883065 APRIL 2001 Page 5B-19

POWER TRIM
Manual Release
a b
Down
Pressure
525880 psi
v
h d
u l
i j k
t
e
f Reservoir Oil
m n
Return Oil
g
Í Í
g
Í Í
Filtered Oil
o Impact Relief Pressure #22

8801110 psi (3060 hp)
p 12201420 psi (75125 hp)
s r Tilt Relief Pressure

2800 psi (75125 hp) 540990 psi (75125 hp)
minimum
l - Oil Fill Cap
Page 5B-20 90-883065 APRIL 2001

POWER TRIM
Manual Tilt
To manually tilt the outboard engine, the owner will need to back out the manual release
valve (p) 3-4 turns. With the valve backed out, the internal passages inside the manifold are
connected together. These passages connect both the cylinder down and up cavities to-
gether, along with the reservoir, allowing the engine to be raised or lowered. Piston rod (a)
movement will continue until the manual release valve (p) is closed, locking the fluid inside
of the cylinder and manifold.
90-883065 APRIL 2001 Page 5B-21

POWER TRIM
Troubleshooting
Support outboard with tilt lock pin when servicing power trim system.
IMPORTANT: After debris or failed components have been found (during trouble-
shooting procedure), it is recommended that unit be disassembled completely and
ALL O-rings be replaced. Check ball valve components and castings must be
cleaned using engine cleaner and compressed air or replaced prior to re-assembly.
IMPORTANT: Power trim system is pressurized. Outboard must be in the full “UP” po-
sition (trim rod fully extended) prior to fill/drain plug, or manual release valve remov-
al.
Refer to instructions following if disassembly is required when servicing.
Follow preliminary checks before proceeding to troubleshooting flow diagrams (following).
Preliminary Checks
IMPORTANT: Operate Power Trim system after each check to see if problem has been
corrected. If problem has not been corrected proceed to next check.
1. Check that manual release valve is tightened to full right (clockwise) position.
2. Check trim pump fluid level with outboard in full “UP” position and fill if necessary. Refer
to “Bleeding Power Trim Unit”.
3. Check for external leaks in Power Trim system. Replace defective part(s) if leak is found.
4. Outboard not holding tilted position (falls down to trim position) indicates debris or defec-
tive components in trim assembly. Clean or replace components as required.
Page 5B-22 90-883065 APRIL 2001

POWER TRIM
Hydraulic System Troubleshooting Flow Chart
OUTBOARD WILL NOT HOLD TILTED

POSITION DURING REVERSE AND/OR
TRAILS OUT DURING HIGH SPEED
DECELERATION.
Manual release Manual release valve and

Inspect manual release valve.
valve and O-ring O-rings appear to be O.K. -
damaged. Clean and reinstall manual
release valve.
Trim will not hold

Replace manual re- reverse thrust. Trim system holds re-
lease valve and O-rings. verse thrust. Testing
complete.
Trim system holds re- Remove and inspect pis-

verse thrust. Testing ton rod assembly for de- Shock piston appears
complete. bris and/or shock ball O.K. - Clean and reinstall
hang up. piston rod assembly.
Debris and/or shock
ball hang up identi-
fied.
Trim will not hold
reverse thrust. Trim system holds re-
verse thrust. Testing
complete.
Replace piston
rod assembly.
Remove PO check valve
assembly, inspect O-rings
and seals for damage.
Trim system holds re-
complete.
Debris and/or dam- PO check valve appears

age identified. O.K. - Clean and reinstall
PO check valve assem-
bly.
Replace PO check
valve assembly. Trim system holds
reverse thrust. Test-
ing complete.
Trim will not hold
reverse thrust.
Trim system holds re-
complete.
continued on next page
90-883065 APRIL 2001 Page 5B-23

POWER TRIM

continued
Remove suction seat as-

sembly and inspect for
debris and/or damage.
Suction seat assembly

Debris and/or damage appears O.K. - Clean and
identified. reinstall suction seat
assembly.
Replace suction seat

assembly. Trim will not hold
reverse thrust. Trim system holds
ing complete.
Trim system holds
ing complete.
Replace trim system.
Page 5B-24 90-883065 APRIL 2001

POWER TRIM
TRIM SYSTEM LEAKS DOWN

WITH MANUAL RELEASE VALVE
CLOSED.
Manual release valve Inspect manual release valve. Manual release valve and O-
and O-ring damaged. rings appear to be O.K. - Clean
and reinstall manual release
valve.
Replace manual re- Trim system leaks

lease valve and down.
Trim system does
O-rings.
not leak down. Test-
ing complete.
Remove tilt relief valving
Trim system does and inspect O-rings and
not leak down. Test- seals for debris and/or
ing complete. damage.
Debris and/or dam- Tilt relief valving and O-rings

age identified. appear to be O.K. - Clean and
reinstall tilt relief valveing.
Replace tilt relief valve- Trim system leaks Trim system does
ing. down. not leak down. Test-
ing complete.
Trim system does Remove PO check valve

not leak down. Test- assembly, inspect O-
ing complete. rings and seals for dam-
age.
Debris and/or dam- PO check valve appears

age identified. O.K. - Clean and reinstall
PO check valve assem-
bly.
Replace PO check
valve assembly.
Trim system leaks down. Trim system does
not leak down.
Testing complete.
Trim system does
continued on next page
ing complete.
90-883065 APRIL 2001 Page 5B-25

POWER TRIM

continued
Inspect memory pis-

ton O-ring and cylinder
bore.
Cylinder bore appears
Cylinder bore appears
rough and/or debris
smooth with no debris.
found in cylinder.
Replace memory pis-

ton and shock piston Trim leaks down.
O-rings.
Trim system does

ing complete. Replace trim system.
Page 5B-26 90-883065 APRIL 2001

POWER TRIM
Troubleshooting the Power Trim Electrical System

UP UP
a DN
b DN
BLU/WHT
c
GRN/WHT
BLU/WHT or PUR
GRN/WHT or GRN
RED
1 3
RED/PUR
RED
n d
15 RED/PUR
RED 2
– + 2 4
GRN/WHT
f i
BLU/WHT
e
g
l
33
GRN/WHT GRN/WHT
GRN
14 BLK
RED GRN/WHT
BLK
LT.BLU/WHT LT. BLU/WHT

BLUE
14 BLK
RED
BLK
LT. BLU/WHT
m
44 11
h
UP
j
DN
k
a - Trim Switch (Remote Control Mounted) h - Up Relay

b - Trim Switch (Panel Mounted) i - Solenoid
c - Fuse Holder – Accessory j - Trim Pump Motor
d - Remote Control Wiring Plug Connector k - Cowl Switch
e - Battery l - Solenoid
f - Starter Bolt m - 3-Pin Connector
g - Down Relay n - Main Fuse Holder - Fuse #3
90-883065 APRIL 2001 Page 5B-27

POWER TRIM
Troubleshooting the Power Trim Electrical System

Refer to wiring diagram on preceding page for location of wire connections.
Problem Possible Cause Remedy
Trim Switch “UP” is inopera- 1. Open wire between Wire Connection (1) 1. Check for an open connection or cut
tive, but the Cowl Switch and Trim Switch. wire.
“UP” does operate. 2. Faulty Trim Switch. 2. Replace.
Cowl Switch “UP” is inopera- 1. Open wire between Wire Connection (2) 1. Check for an open connection or cut
tive, but the Trim Switch “UP” and Solenoid. wire.
does operate. 2. Faulty Cowl Switch. 2. Replace.
Trim Switch “UP” and Cowl 1. Open wire between Wire Connection (1) 1. Check for an open connection.
Switch “UP” are both inop- and the “Up” Relay.
erative. 2. Open BLK wire between ground and 2. Check for an open connection.
“UP” Relay.
3. Open RED wire between Solenoid and 3. Check for an open connection.
“UP” Relay.
4. Faulty “UP” Relay. 4. Replace.
Trim Switch “DOWN” is inop- 1. Open wire between Wire Connection (3) 1. Check for an open connection or cut
erative, but the Cowl Switch and Trim Switch. wire.
“DOWN” does operate. 2. Faulty Trim Switch. 2. Replace.
Cowl Switch “DOWN” is inop- 1. Open wire between Wire Connection (2) 1. Check for a open connection or cut
erative, but the Trim Switch and Solenoid. wire.
“DOWN” does operate. 2. Faulty Cowl Switch. 2. Replace
Trim Switch “DOWN” and 1. Open wire between Wire Connection (3) 1. Check for an open connection.
Cowl Switch “DOWN” are and the “UP” Relay.
both inoperative. 2. Open BLK wire between ground and 2. Check for an open connection.
“DOWN” Relay.
3. Open RED wire between Solenoid and 3. Check for an open connection.
“DOWN” Relay.
4. Faulty “DOWN” Relay 4. Replace.
Trim Switch “UP” and 1. 20 AMP Fuse blown. 1. Replace fuse. Locate the cause of
“DOWN” are both inopera- the blown fuse. Check electrical wiring
tive, but the Cowl Switch for a shorted circuit.
does operate. 2. Faulty trim switch. 2. Replace.
3. Wire is open between fuse holder and 3. Check for a open connection or cut
solenoid. wire.
4. Wire is open between fuse holder and 4. Check for a loose or corroded con-
trim switch. nection.
Trim Switch and Cowl Switch 1. One of the Trim Pump Motor wires is 1. Check wire connections (4) for loose
are both inoperative. open between the motor and the Relays. or corroded condition.
2. Faulty trim pump motor. 2. If voltage is present at connections
(4) when the appropriate trim button is
pressed, then motor is faulty. Replace
motor.
Trim system operates (motor 1. The Trim or Cowl switch is shorted. 1. Replace.
runs) without pressing the
switches.
Page 5B-28 90-883065 APRIL 2001

POWER TRIM
Power Trim System Removal

1. Tilt outboard to the full up position and support with tilt lock pin.
2. Disconnect the power trim wire harness and remove clamp.
b
a
c
55264
55464
a - Tilt Lock Pin

b - Power Trim Wire Harness Clamp
c - Harness
3. Remove the trilobe pin.

4. Drive out the upper pivot pin.
5. Remove the sacrificial anode.
a
b
c
55331
a - Trilobe Pin
b - Upper Pivot Pin
c - Sacrificial Anode
90-883065 APRIL 2001 Page 5B-29

POWER TRIM
6. Use suitable punch to remove (Drive Down) lower pin. Retain dowel pin.
7. Use suitable punch to drive out lower pivot pin.
a b 51144
51144
a - Dowel Pin
b - Lower Pivot Pin
Power Trim Disassembly

IMPORTANT: Power trim system is pressurized. Trim rod must be in the full “UP”
position (fully extended) prior to fill/drain plug, or manual release valve removal.
1. Remove reservoir cap.
2. Remove manual release valve assembly to drain oil.
55263
a - Reservoir Cap
b - Manual Release Valve
Page 5B-30 90-883065 APRIL 2001

POWER TRIM
Trim Motor Removal

1. Secure power trim assembly in a soft jaw vise.
2. Remove four (4) screws to remove motor/reservoir. Remove reservoir seal and coupler.
b
c
a - Screw (4)
b - Reservoir
c - Reservoir Seal
d - Coupler
e - Manifold Assembly
Pump and Components Removal
1. Remove pressure operated plugs on pump. Remove spring and check valve/poppet
(both sides). Use special tool CG 41-11 and special tool CG 41-14 with 5/16″ end to re-
move spool.
a
b
c
d
e
d
c
b
a
a - Plug (2)
b - Spring (2)
c - Check Valve/Poppet (2)
d - Seat (2)
e - Spool
90-883065 APRIL 2001 Page 5B-31

POWER TRIM
IMPORTANT: Inspect poppet assembly for debris in the area shown. If debris is found
on poppet replace poppet.
2. Remove three (3) screws to remove pump. Remove filter and filter seal under pump.
Remove suction seat assembly.
a
d
b
a - Debris Under Valve Tip

b - Rubber Seat
c - Screw (3)
d - Filter Seal
e - Filter
f - Suction Seat Assembly
Manifold Removal
1. Remove two (2) screws to remove manifold from cylinder.
2. Remove tilt relief components.
a
e
51146 51008
a - Screw (2)
b - Spring
c - Poppet
d - Spool Housing
e - Trim Limit Spool
Page 5B-32 90-883065 APRIL 2001

POWER TRIM
Shock Rod Removal

1. Unscrew end cap assembly from cylinder using spanner wrench [1/4 in. x 5/16 in.
(6.4mm x 8mm) long pegs].
2. Remove shock rod assembly from cylinder.
Shock Rod Disassembly

NOTE: The only serviceable items on the shock rod assembly are the O-rings and wiper
ring. If shock rod requires any other repair, replace shock rod assembly.
b
b
a - End Cap
b - O-ring (2)
c - Wiper Ring
1. Place shock rod assembly on clean work surface.

2. Remove three (3) screws and remove plate from shock rod piston.
51143
a - Screw (3)
b - Plate
c - Shock Rod Piston
90-883065 APRIL 2001 Page 5B-33

POWER TRIM
3. Remove check ball components from shock rod piston.

4. Remove o-ring from shock rod piston.
c
b
a
d
51147
a - Spring (5)
b - Seat (5)
c - Ball (5)
d - O-ring
CAUTION
When removing shock piston, spanner wrench must have 1/4 in. x 5/16 in. long pegs
to avoid damage to shock piston.
5. Place shock rod into soft jawed vise and apply heat to loosen piston using torch lamp
(P/N 91-63209).
6. Loosen shock rod piston using spanner wrench [1/4 in. x 5/16 in. (6.4mm x 8mm) long
pegs].
7. Allow shock rod piston to cool. Remove from shock rod.
a
b
51146
51146
a - Spanner Wrench
b - Shock Rod Piston
Page 5B-34 90-883065 APRIL 2001

POWER TRIM
8. Inspect check valve for debris; clean debris from check valve if found. If debris cannot
be cleaned from check valve, replace shock piston as an assembly.
9. Clean shock and components with compressed air.
10. Remove inner o-ring from shock rod piston.
a b
51199
a - Shock Piston
b - O-ring
11. Remove cylinder end cap assembly from shock rod.

12. Inspect shock. If wiper (located in cap) has failed to keep rod clean, replace wiper.
13. Place end cap on clean work surface.
14. Remove rod wiper, inner o-ring, and outer o-ring.
c
b
51145
a - Rod Wiper
b - Inner O-ring
c - Outer O-ring
90-883065 APRIL 2001 Page 5B-35

POWER TRIM
Memory Piston Removal

1. Remove memory piston from cylinder using one of two methods:
a. Using lock ring pliers (P/N 91-822778A3) or suitable tool.
51144
b. Blowing compressed air into manual release valve hole using air nozzle.
WARNING
Memory piston cup may be expelled at a high velocity when air pressure is applied.
Failure to place cylinder as shown below could result in personal injury.
NOTE: Point cylinder opening down and away. Use a shop rag or towel to avoid damage
to the memory piston.
2. Remove o-ring from memory piston.
a d
e
c
51144
55466
a - Adaptor/Air Hose
b - Memory Piston Exit
c - Shop Rag
d - O-Ring
e - Memory Piston
Page 5B-36 90-883065 APRIL 2001

POWER TRIM
IMPORTANT: Components must be dirt and lint free. Slightest amount of debris in
Power Trim system could cause system to malfunction.
Clean shock rod and components with parts cleaner and dry with compressed air.
It is recommended that all O-rings in trim system be replaced. Use O-Ring Kit 25-809880A1.
Lubricate all o-rings with Quicksilver Power Trim Fluid (92-90100A12). If not available, use
automotive (ATF) automatic transmission fluid.
Trim Motor Electrical Tests
1. Connect a 12 volt supply to motor leads. If motor fails to run, replace pump motor.
IMPORTANT: Trim Motor is not serviceable. If motor fails to run, replace motor assem-
bly.
90-883065 APRIL 2001 Page 5B-37

POWER TRIM
Reassembly
O-Ring and Seal Placement
O-Rings and Seals are part of O-Ring Kit 25-809880A1.
22
33
22
20
8
9
19 10
21
21 11
12 13
14
18 9
15
10 16
9 17
8
Page 5B-38 90-883065 APRIL 2001

POWER TRIM
O-ring Sizes
11 22
99
33
77
22 4
13
13
5
18 17 12 14
14
20 15
66
16
16
19
19 Cutaway View of O-Ring
8
8
Width
10 21
21
10
11
11 O-RINGS SHOWN ARE ACTUAL O.D. I.D.
SIZE
90-883065 APRIL 2001 Page 5B-39

POWER TRIM
O-ring Description and Sizes

O-Ring Description O-Ring I.D. O-Ring O.D. O-Ring Width
1 Wiper Ring (412585)
2 Cyl. Cap, Inner12586) 0.671 in. (17.04 mm) 0.949 in. (24.10 mm) 0.139 in. (3.53 mm)
3 Cyl. Cap8134) 1.864 in. (47.34 mm) 2.004 in. (50.90 mm) 0.07 in. (1.78 mm)
4 Shock Piston2579) 1.6 in. (40.64 mm) 2.02 in. (53.086 mm) 0.21 in. (5.334 mm)
5 Piston Bolt05797) 0.676 in. (17.17 mm) .816 in. (20.726 mm) 0.07 in. (1.78 mm)
6 Reservoir Plug01271) 0.549 in. (13.94 mm) 0.755 in. (19.17 mm) 0.103 in. (2.616 mm)
7 Motor Seal12599)
8 (2) P.O. Check Plug06484) 0.489 in. (12.42 mm) 0.629 in. (15.97 mm) 0.07 in. (1.78 mm)
9 (3) Poppet Assy.74585)
10 (2) P.O. Check Seat07328) 0.364 in. (9.25 mm) 0.504 in. (12.80 mm) 0.07 in. (1.78 mm)
11 (2) Pump Port 0.145 in. (3.683 mm) 0.285 in. (7.239 mm) 0.07 in. (1.78 mm)
12 Suction Seat 0.239 in. (6.07 mm) 0.379 in. (9.626 mm) 0.07 in. (1.78 mm)
13 Filter Seal12607)
14 Filter12590)
15 Manual Release406483) 0.114 in. (2.90 mm) 0.254 in. (6.451 mm) 0.07 in. (1.78 mm)
18 Spool09051) 0.239 in. (6.07 mm) 0.379 in. (9.626 mm) 0.07 in. (1.78 mm)
19 (3) Spool Housing09005) 0.301 in. (7.645 mm) 0.441 in. (11.20 mm) 0.07 in. (1.78 mm)
20 Trim Limit Spool06483) 0.114 in. (2.895 mm) 0.254 in. (6.451 mm) 0.07 in. (1.78 mm)
21 (2) Manifold405387) 0.208 in. (5.283 mm) 0.348 in. (8.839 mm) 0.07 in. (1.78 mm)
22 Memory Piston412579) 1.6 in. (40.64 mm) 2.02 in. (53.086 mm) 0.21 in. (5.334 mm)
Page 5B-40 90-883065 APRIL 2001

POWER TRIM
Power Trim Reassembly

IMPORTANT: Lubricate all o-rings with Quicksilver Power Trim Fluid (92-90100A12).
If not available, use automotive (ATF) automatic transmission fluid.
Shock Rod Reassembly
1. Install lubricated o-rings to end cap.
2. Install rod wiper.
3. Install lubricated o-rings to shock piston.
c
b
e f
51145
d 51199
a - Rod Wiper
b - Inner O-ring
c - Outer O-ring
d - Shock Piston
e - O-ring
f - O-ring
4. Clamp shock rod in soft jawed vise.
5. Position cylinder end cap onto rod as shown.
51146
CAUTION
When installing shock rod piston, spanner wrench must have 1/4 in. x 5/16 in.
(6.4mm x 8mm) long pegs to avoid damage to shock rod piston.
6. Apply Loctite Grade “A” (271) to threads on shock rod.
7. Install shock rod piston.
90-883065 APRIL 2001 Page 5B-41

POWER TRIM
8. Tighten shock rod piston securely using spanner wrench (1/4 in. x 5/16 in. long pegs).
If a torquing type spanner tool is used to tighten shock piston, then torque to 90 lb-ft (122
Nm).
b a
51146
a - Shock Rod Piston - Torque to 90 lb-ft (122 Nm)

b - Spanner Wrench
9. Remove shock rod assembly from vise.

10. Install ball, seat, and spring (five sets) to shock rod piston.
11. Secure components with plate. Torque screws to 35 lb-in. (4.0 Nm).
e
d
c
a
b 51147
a - Screw (3) Torque to 35 lb-in. (4.0 Nm)

b - Plate
c - Spring (5)
d - Seat (5)
e - Ball (5)
Page 5B-42 90-883065 APRIL 2001

POWER TRIM
Shock Rod Installation

1. Place trim cylinder in soft jawed vice.
2. Install lubricated o-ring to memory piston and place into cylinder. Push memory piston
all the way to bottom.
3. Fill cylinder three inches (76.2 mm) from top of cylinder using Quicksilver Power Trim
and Steering Fluid. If not available, use automotive (ATF) automatic transmission fluid.
4. Install shock rod into cylinder until power trim fluid flows through oil blow off ball passage.
Fill remaining cylinder to just below the cylinder threads.
b
c
a - Memory Piston
b - O-ring
c - Oil Blow Off Ball Passage
CAUTION
End cap must not make contact with shock rod piston when tightening. Shock rod
piston must be positioned in cylinder deep enough to avoid contact.
5. Tighten end cap securely using spanner wrench [1/4 in. x 5/16 in. (6.4mm x 8mm) long
pegs]. If a torquing type spanner tool is used to tighten end cap, then torque to 45 lb-ft
(61.0 Nm).
90-883065 APRIL 2001 Page 5B-43

POWER TRIM
Trim Limit Assembly Installation

1. Lubricate all O-rings. Install spring, poppet, spool housing and trim limit spool into man-
ifold.
NOTE: There are three different size springs used in this manifold. The heavy spring is used
on 75-125 hp outboards. The medium spring is used on 40-60 hp Bigfoot outboards. The
light spring is used on 30-60 hp outboards.
or or a
d
51008
a - Spring
b - Poppet
c - Spool Housing
d - Trim Limit Spool
Manual Release Valve Installation

1. Install “E” clip (if removed) and lubricate o-rings to manual release valve.
2. Install manual release valve assembly into manifold.
b
a - Manifold
c - E Clip
Page 5B-44 90-883065 APRIL 2001

POWER TRIM
Manifold Installation
1. Install dowel pin and two (2) lubricated o-rings into trim cylinder.
a - O-Ring (2)
b - Dowel Pin
2. Align the trim cylinder and pump/reservoir assembly together.
3. Install the two (2) long screws and torque to 100 lb-in. (11 Nm).
c
b
51146
a - Trim Cylinder Assembly

b - Reservoir/Manifold Assembly
c - Screw (2) Torque to 100 lb-in. (11 Nm)
90-883065 APRIL 2001 Page 5B-45

POWER TRIM

1. Install spring, ball, lubricated o-ring and plastic seat to manifold.
2. Check to see that o-rings are placed on bottom of pump.
3. Install filter and filter seal under pump. Install pump onto manifold. Torque screws to 70
lb-in. (7.7 Nm).

b - Suction Seat Assembly
Pressure Operated Assembly Installation

IMPORTANT: Inspect poppet assembly for debris in the area shown. If debris is found
on poppet, replace poppet.
a
b
a - Debris Under Valve Tip

b - Rubber Seat
1. Lubricate o-rings.
Page 5B-46 90-883065 APRIL 2001

POWER TRIM
2. Install spool, seat with o-ring, check valve/poppet, spring and plug with o-ring into pump.
Repeat for other side. Torque plugs to 120 lb-in. (13.5 Nm).
a
b
c
d
e
d
c
b
a
a - Plug (2) Torque to 120 lb-in. (13.5 Nm)
b - Spring (2)
c - Check Valve/Poppet (2)
d - Seat (2)
e - Spool
Reservoir/Motor Installation
1. Install coupler into top of pump. Make sure reservoir seal is in the reservoir groove and
place reservoir onto pump/manifold assembly. Install ground strap under screw shown
Torque screws to 80 lb-in. (9 Nm).
a - Screw (4) Torque to 80 lb-in. (9 Nm)

b - Reservoir
c - Reservoir Seal
d - Coupler
e - Manifold Assembly
f - Ground Strap
2. Fill reservoir to bottom of fill hole using Quicksilver Power Trim Fluid (92-90100A12). If
not available, use automotive (ATF) automatic transmission fluid.
90-883065 APRIL 2001 Page 5B-47

POWER TRIM
Bleeding Power Trim Unit

1. Secure power trim unit in soft jawed vise.
2. Add power trim fluid until it’s even with the bottom of the fill hole. Reinstall plug.
3. Close the manual release valve. (Turn full clockwise).
55263
a - Reservoir Plug/Fill Hole

4. Using a 12 volt power supply, connect the positive lead to (blue) trim motor wire and neg-
ative lead to (green) trim motor wire and drive shock rod to the up position. Repeat three
times.
5. Connect the positive lead to the (green) trim motor wire, and the negative lead to the
(blue) trim motor wire and drive the shock rod to the down position.
6. Recheck fluid level, add fluid if required and repeat cycle until fluid level stays even with
the bottom of the fill hole.
Installation of Power Trim System

1. Lubricate lower pivot pin, mounting holes with 2-4-C Marine Lubricant.
2. Start lower pivot pin into pivot pin bore and position lower dowel pin (retained) in its re-
spective hole.
a 95
51148
95 2-4-C w/Teflon (92-850736A1)

a - Lower Pivot Pin
b - Lower Dowel Pin
Page 5B-48 90-883065 APRIL 2001

POWER TRIM
3. Position trim cylinder assembly (bottom first) between clamp brackets.

4. Apply 2-4-C Marine Lubricant to lower pivot pin. Using a suitable punch, drive lower pivot
pin into clamp bracket and trim cylinder assembly until pivot pin is flush with outside sur-
face.
a 95
b
51147
55467
95 2-4-C w/Teflon (92-850736A1)

a - Trim Cylinder Assembly
b - Lower Pivot Pin
5. Using a suitable punch, drive lower dowel pin into its hole until seated.
6. Apply 2-4-C Marine Lubricant to surface of upper pivot pin, pivot pin bore and trim ram
bore.
b
d
a
c
95
51148 51148
95 2-4-C w/Teflon (92-850736A1)

a - Lower Dowel Pin
b - Pivot Pin
c - Pivot Pin Bore
d - Trim Ram Bore
90-883065 APRIL 2001 Page 5B-49

POWER TRIM
7. Using a suitable mallet, drive upper pivot pin into swivel bracket and through trim ram
until pivot pin is flush with swivel bracket.
8. Drive pivot pin into its hole until seated.
51148
55464
a - Pivot Pin
b - Swivel Bracket
c - Trim Ram
d - Trilobe Pin
9. Install sacrificial aluminum anode to reservoir bracket placing ground strap between
bracket and anode, as shown.
10. Route trim harness through clamp bracket and cowling.
b
a
c 55465
55264
a - Sacrificial Anode
b - Ground Strap
c - Bracket
d - Trim Harness
Page 5B-50 90-883065 APRIL 2001

POWER TRIM
11. Secure trim harness with clamp, as shown.
55264
a - Clamp
90-883065 APRIL 2001 Page 5B-51

MANUAL TILT ASSIST
MID-SECTION
Section 5C - Manual Tilt Assist
Table of Contents
Special Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5C-1 Memory Piston Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5C-24
Manual Tilt Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5C-2 Valve Block Disassembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5C-26
Manual Trim Flow Diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5C-4 Reassembly - O-Ring and Seal Placement . 5C-27
Up Circuit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5C-4 Actual O-Ring Sizes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5C-28
Down Circuit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5C-6 O-ring Description and Sizes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5C-29
Slow Tilt Down Under High Thrust . . . . . . 5C-8 Manual Tilt System Cleaning and Inspection 5C-29
Under Water Strike (Valves Open) . . . . . . 5C-10 Manual Tilt System Reassembly . . . . . . . . . . 5C-29
Shock Function (Valve Closed) . . . . . . . . . 5C-12 Valve Block Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5C-32
Shock Function Return . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5C-14 Shock Rod Reassembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5C-33
Hydraulic System Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . 5C-16 Shock Rod Installation and Fluid
Manual Tilt System Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5C-18 Filling Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5C-35
Manual Tilt System Disassembly . . . . . . . . . . 5C-19 Filling Procedure Option Two Instructions
Accumulator Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Shock Rod Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5C-20
5C-21
for Making Retaining Tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Bleeding Manual Tilt System . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5C-37
5C-38
5
Shock Rod Disassembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5C-21 Manual Tilt System Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . 5C-40 C
Valve Block Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5C-24 Manual Release Valve Adjustment . . . . . . 5C-42
Special Tools
1. Spanner Wrench P/N 91-74951
2. Lock-Ring Pliers P/N 91-822778A3
3. Heat Lamp P/N 91-63209
90-883065 APRIL 2001 Page 5C-1

MANUAL TILT ASSIST
Manual Tilt Components

13
a
1 12
f
95
2
4
7
b
e 11
8
6
7
5 d
6 11 8 11
13
8 9
11 8
11
12
9
95
8 10
c
7 Loctite 271 (92-809819)
95 2-4-C With Teflon (92-850736A1)
NOTE: It is recommended that all o-rings be replaced when servicing tilt system.
Page 5C-2 90-883065 APRIL 2001

MANUAL TILT ASSIST
Manual Tilt Components

TORQUE
REF.
REF
NO. QTY. DESCRIPTION lb-in. lb-ft Nm
1 SHOCK ROD ASSEMBLY 45 61
1
1 SHOCK ROD ASSEMBLY (BEACHING)
2 1 MEMORY PISTON ASSEMBLY
3 1 O RING REBUILD KIT-Cylinder
4 2 O RING
5 1 CYLINDER ASSEMBLY
6 1 SCREW AND SEAL KIT
7 1 ACCUMULATOR ASSEMBLY 35 47
8 1 VALVE BODY ASSEMBLY
9 1 CAM KIT
10 1 VELOCITY VALVE KIT 75 6.2 8.5
11 1 CHECK SYSTEM REPAIR KIT 75 6.2 8.5
– 1 O RING KIT
12 2 PIN
13 2 GROOVE PIN
a – Torque cylinder cap to 45 lb-ft (61 Nm)
b – Torque Accumulator to 35 lb-ft (47 Nm)
c – Torque Velocity Valve to 75 lb-in. (8.5 Nm)
d – Torque Transfer Valve Plug to 75 lb-in. (8.5 Nm)
e – Torque Screw to 100 lb-in. (11 Nm)
f – Torque Shock Piston to 90 lb-ft (122 Nm)
90-883065 APRIL 2001 Page 5C-3

MANUAL TILT ASSIST
Manual Trim Flow Diagrams

Up Circuit
b
a
p
e
o
f
n
k
m
j i h g
l
a - Shock Rod i - Down Circuit Slow Transfer Valve

b - End Cap j - Up Circuit Fast Transfer Valve
c - Accumulator k - Surge Valve
d - Accumulator Piston l - Cylinder
e - Accumulator Check Valve m - Memory Piston
f - Camshaft Lever n - Shock Piston
g - Manifold o - Shock Return Valve
h - Down Circuit Fast Transfer Valve p - Impact Relief Valve
Page 5C-4 90-883065 APRIL 2001

MANUAL TILT ASSIST
Up Circuit
With the engine in the down position, the accumulator piston (d) will be at the top of the accu-
mulator (c) with the gas at maximum pressure. To raise the engine, the camshaft lever (f)
is rotated all the way down. The internal shaft connected to the camshaft lever will move the
push rods, opening the accumulator check valve (e), both fast transfer valves (h & j) and
the down circuit slow transfer valve (i). As the operator lifts the engine, oil, under pressure
inside the accumulator, will flow around both the slow transfer valve (i) and the down circuit
fast transfer valve (h). Oil flows into the bottom of the tilt cylinder forcing the memory piston
(m) into the shock piston (n) and then forcing the shock rod up and out. Oil above the shock
piston exits the cylinder (l) through an interconnecting passage along side of the cylinder
and returns into the manifold (g). Inside the manifold the oil flows past the groove in the
surge valve (k), through the up circuit fast transfer valve (j) and mixes with the oil flowing
from the accumulator into the up cavity. With the engine in the correct position, the camshaft
lever (f) is rotated up and the push rods allow the check valves (e, h, i, & j) to close. The
closed check valves prevent the oil from traveling between cavities and locks the engine into
position.
90-883065 APRIL 2001 Page 5C-5

MANUAL TILT ASSIST
Down Circuit
b
a
p
e
f
n
m k
j i h g
l

Page 5C-6 90-883065 APRIL 2001

MANUAL TILT ASSIST
Down Circuit
With the engine tilted up, the piston (inside the accumulator (d)) will be at the bottom of the
accumulator, (c) and the gas pressure low. To lower the engine, the camshaft lever (f) is ro-
tated down, the internal cam will cause the push rods to open the accumulator check valve
(e), both fast transfer valves (h & j) and the down circuit slow transfer valve (i). The operator
will have to press down on the engine cowl to overcome the pressure inside cylinder. Fluid
will flow out of the bottom of the cylinder, past both the down circuit fast transfer valve (h)
and down circuit slow transfer valve (i). Fluid will flow past the up circuit fast transfer valve
(j), surge valve (k) and through the interconnecting passage into the top of the cylinder (l).
Due to the shock rod (a), the tilt cylinder cavities differ in volume, the extra fluid from the up
cavity [forced into the accumulator (c)] will cause the internal accumulator piston (d) to com-
press the gas. With the engine in the correct position, the camshaft lever is rotated up and
the push rods allow the check valves (e, h, i, & j) to close.
90-883065 APRIL 2001 Page 5C-7

MANUAL TILT ASSIST
Slow Tilt Down Under High Thrust
b
a
p f
e
o
n
k
m
j i h g
l

Page 5C-8 90-883065 APRIL 2001

MANUAL TILT ASSIST
Slow Tilt Down Under High Thrust

To tilt the engine down under high thrust conditions [where the propeller thrust forces the
shock rod down, creating higher pressure below the memory piston (m)], the camshaft lever
(f) is rotated slightly downward. The internal shaft connected to the lever will open the down
circuit slow transfer valve (i) allowing oil under pressure into the cavity around the shaft. The
higher oil pressure will open the up circuit fast transfer valve (j) allowing oil from the bottom
of the cylinder to flow above the shock piston (n) while lowering the engine. Additional oil
will flow into the accumulator (c) as the internal pressure forces the accumulator check valve
(e) to open. Oil flowing into the accumulator moves the accumulator piston (d) and compres-
ses the gas.
90-883065 APRIL 2001 Page 5C-9

MANUAL TILT ASSIST
Under Water Strike (Valves Open)
b
a
f
n
k
m
j i h g
l

Page 5C-10 90-883065 APRIL 2001

MANUAL TILT ASSIST
Under Water Strike (Valves Open)

Should the drive unit strike a submerged object while in forward motion, the shock rod (a)
will extend from the tilt cylinder (l). Fluid will attempt to exit the cylinder through the intercon-
necting passage. The rapid fluid flow will increase the pressure below the surge valve (k),
causing the valve to move, closing the oil return passage back into the accumulator (c). Oil
inside the up cavity is locked in a static position by the closed surge valve. As the shock rod
extends outward, the pressure inside the up cavity will reach sufficient pressure to open the
shock valve (p) which opens at 880-1110 PSI. Oil will flow into the cavity created as the
shock rod & shock piston (a & n) moves away from the memory piston (m).
90-883065 APRIL 2001 Page 5C-11

MANUAL TILT ASSIST
Shock Function (Valve Closed)
b
a
c
Accumulator
Gas Pressure
400 PSI
d
o
e
n
f
k
m
j i h g
l

Page 5C-12 90-883065 APRIL 2001

MANUAL TILT ASSIST
Shock Function (Valves Closed)

Should the drive unit strike a submerged object while in forward motion, the shock rod (a)
will extend from the cylinder (l). Oil inside the up cavity is locked in a static position by the
closed up circuit fast transfer valve (j), the closed down circuit slow transfer valve (i) and
closed down circuit fast transfer valve (h). Fluid will attempt to exit the cylinder through the
interconnecting passage back into the accumulator (c). The closed up circuit fast transfer
valve (j) will prevent the fluid return. As the shock rod extends outward, the pressure inside
the up cavity will reach sufficient pressure to open the shock valve (p) which opens at
880-1110 PSI. Oil will flow into the cavity created as the shock rod & shock piston (n) moves
away from the memory piston (m).
90-883065 APRIL 2001 Page 5C-13

MANUAL TILT ASSIST
b
a
o
e
n
f
k
m
j i h g
l

Page 5C-14 90-883065 APRIL 2001

MANUAL TILT ASSIST

After the drive clears the object, the shock return valve (o) will allow the oil to flow from be-
tween the shock piston (n) and memory piston (m) onto the down cavity as the drive returns
to its original running position.
90-883065 APRIL 2001 Page 5C-15

MANUAL TILT ASSIST
Hydraulic System Troubleshooting

Refer to disassembly/reassembly instructions (following) if disassembly is required when
servicing.
IMPORTANT: After debris or failed components have been found (during trouble-
shooting procedure), it is recommended that unit be disassembled completely and
all o-rings be replaced. Check ball components and castings must be cleaned using
engine cleaner and compressed air or replaced prior to reassembly.
Support outboard with tilt lock lever when servicing manual tilt system.
1. Check manual release cam adjustment. Cam must open and close freely. Adjust cam
link rod as necessary.
51143
a - Link Rod
b - Manual Release Lever
c - Accumulator
Page 5C-16 90-883065 APRIL 2001

MANUAL TILT ASSIST
2. Check for external leaks in the manual tilt system. Replace defective part(s) if leak is
found.
IMPORTANT: If cut or damaged o-rings are found, inspect machined surfaces for
scoring, burrs or debris.
3. Check for discharged accumulator. 35 to 50 lb-ft (47-68 Nm) of pulling force must be at-
tained when tilting outboard from full “down” to full “up” position. If more than 50 lb-ft (68
Nm) of force is required, replace accumulator.
a
50431
a - Weight Scale
b - Valve Lever (open position)
90-883065 APRIL 2001 Page 5C-17

MANUAL TILT ASSIST
Manual Tilt System Removal

CAUTION
Remove cowling and remove all spark plug leads from spark plugs to prevent acci-
dental starting while servicing outboard.
WARNING
Service or installation of the tilt system may result in loss of pressure in the shock
cylinder. If the outboard is not in the full down position, such loss of pressure will
cause the engine to fall to the full down position with a potential for damaging en-
gine or causing personal injury. To avoid such injury support outboard in the up po-
sition using tilt lock lever.
WARNING
Manual tilt system is pressurized. Accumulator must be removed when shock rod
is in the full up position, prior to servicing, otherwise oil spray-back may occur.
1. Support outboard in the up position using tilt lock lever.

2. Remove link rod.
3. Position piece of wood under transom bracket instead of tilt lock for access of removing
pin. Use suitable punch to remove (DRIVE DOWN) upper dowel pin. Retain dowel pin.
b
d
51144
51143
a - Link Rod
b - Accumulator
c - Dowel Pin
d - Wood
Page 5C-18 90-883065 APRIL 2001

MANUAL TILT ASSIST
4. Position tilt lock and remove piece of wood. Use suitable punch to drive out upper pivot
pin.
5. Use punch to remove (Drive Down) lower dowel pin. Retain dowel pin.
b c
51144 51144
a - Pivot Pin
b - Tilt Lock
c - Dowel Pin
6. Use suitable punch to drive out lower pivot pin.

7. Tilt shock absorber assembly (TOP FIRST) out from clamp bracket and remove assem-
bly.
b 1
a 51144
2
51144
a - Pivot Pin
b - Manual Tilt System
Manual Tilt System Disassembly

NOTE: Accumulator contains a high pressure nitrogen charge and is NOT SERVICEABLE.
Replace if necessary.
WARNING
This tilt system is pressurized. Remove accumulator only when shock rod is in full
up position.
90-883065 APRIL 2001 Page 5C-19

MANUAL TILT ASSIST
Accumulator Removal
1. Place manual tilt system in soft jawed vise.
2. Position shock rod to full up position.
3. Open cam shaft valve (Down Position).
4. Loosen velocity valve enough to drip, wait until dripping stops.
5. When fluid stops dripping, loosen and remove accumulator.
6. If plunger can be compressed into accumulator by hand, accumulator is defective. Re-
place accumulator.
a
b
c
51143
51143
a - Accumulator
b - Cam Lever
c - Velocity Valve
d - Plunger
7. Once accumulator is removed, remove o-ring, conical spring, steel ball and plunger.
a
b
c
d
51145
a - Conical Spring
b - Steel Ball
c - Plunger
d - O-ring
Page 5C-20 90-883065 APRIL 2001

MANUAL TILT ASSIST
Shock Rod Removal

1. Unscrew cylinder end cap assembly using spanner wrench [1/4 in. x 5/16 in. long pegs].
2. Remove shock rod assembly from cylinder.
91-74951
51145
Shock Rod Disassembly

NOTE: The only serviceable items on the shock rod assembly are the O-rings and wiper
ring. If shock rod requires any other repair, replace shock rod assembly.
a
a - End Cap
b - O-ring (2)
c - Wiper Ring
1. Place shock rod assembly on clean work surface.

2. Remove three (3) screws and remove plate from shock rod piston.
a
b
c
51143
a - Screw (3)
b - Plate
c - Shock Rod Piston
90-883065 APRIL 2001 Page 5C-21

MANUAL TILT ASSIST
3. Remove check ball components from shock rod piston.

4. Remove o-ring.
c
b
a
d 51147
a - Spring (5)
b - Seat (5)
c - Ball (5)
d - O-ring
CAUTION
When removing shock piston, spanner wrench must have 1/4 in. x 5/16 in. long pegs
to avoid damage to shock piston.
5. Place shock rod into soft jawed vise and apply heat to loosen piston using torch lamp
(P/N 91-63209).
6. Loosen shock rod piston using spanner wrench [1/4 in. x 5/16 in. (6.4mm x 8mm) long
pegs].
7. Allow shock rod piston to cool. Remove from shock rod.
a
b
91-74951
91-63209
a - Spanner Wrench
b - Shock Rod Piston
Page 5C-22 90-883065 APRIL 2001

MANUAL TILT ASSIST
8. Inspect check valve for debris; clean debris from check valve if found. If debris cannot
be cleaned from check valve, replace shock piston as an assembly.
9. Clean shock and components with compressed air.
10. Remove inner O-ring.
b
a 51199
a - Shock Piston
b - O-ring
11. Remove cylinder end cap assembly from shock rod.

12. Inspect shock. If wiper (located in cap) has failed to keep rod clean, replace wiper.
13. Place end cap on clean work surface.
14. Remove rod wiper, inner o-ring, and outer o-ring.
c
b
51147 51145
a - Rod Wiper
b - Inner O-ring
c - Outer O-ring
90-883065 APRIL 2001 Page 5C-23

MANUAL TILT ASSIST
Valve Block Removal

1. Remove two screws from the shock rod cylinder to separate the valve block.
2. Remove o-rings and dowel pins.
e
b
aa
51148
c
51146
a - Screw
b - Valve Block
c - Shock Rod Cylinder
d - O-ring (2)
e - Dowel Pin (2)
Memory Piston Removal

1. Remove memory piston from cylinder using one of two methods:
a. Using lock ring pliers.
51144
91-822778A3
Page 5C-24 90-883065 APRIL 2001

MANUAL TILT ASSIST
b. Blowing compressed air into center o-ring hole.
WARNING
Memory piston cup may be expelled at a high velocity when air pressure is applied.
Failure to place cylinder as shown below could result in personal injury.
NOTE: Point cylinder opening down and away. Use a shop rag or towel to avoid damage
to the memory piston. Fluid will blow out also.
2. Remove O-ring from memory piston.
a
d
51144
55466
a - Adaptor/Air Hose
b - Memory Piston Exit
c - Shop Rag
d - O-Ring
e - Memory Piston
90-883065 APRIL 2001 Page 5C-25

MANUAL TILT ASSIST
Valve Block Disassembly

1. Remove check retainer plug and components.
2. Remove hydraulic oil transfer valve plugs and components.
3. Remove surge valve assembly.
c
d
e
f
a
b 51142
a - Transfer Valve Plug Assembly (2)

b - Check Retainer Plug or Screw Assembly
c - Spool
d - Spring
e - O-ring
f - Velocity Valve
4. Remove screw and remove cam assembly.

e
d
b c
a
a - Spacer Retainer Clip

b - Retainer Clip
c - Screw
d - Shaft Seal
e - Cam
Page 5C-26 90-883065 APRIL 2001

MANUAL TILT ASSIST
Reassembly - O-Ring and Seal Placement

1
14
7
9
6
11 12
10
13
NOTE: It is recommended that all o-rings be replaced when servicing tilt system.
90-883065 APRIL 2001 Page 5C-27

MANUAL TILT ASSIST
Actual O-Ring Sizes

1
2 9
14
4
5 10
13 Cutaway View of O-Ring

6 (2) 11
Width
7 12
O.D. I.D.
8 (2)
O-RINGS SHOWN ARE ACTUAL SIZE
Page 5C-28 90-883065 APRIL 2001

MANUAL TILT ASSIST
O-Ring Description and Sizes

O-Ring Description O-Ring I.D. O-Ring O.D. O-Ring Width
1 Wiper Ring
2 Cyl. Cap, Inner 0.671 in. (17.04 mm) 0.949 in. (24.10 mm) 0.139 in. (3.53 mm)
3 Cyl. Cap 1.864 in. (47.34 mm) 2.004 in. (50.90 mm) 0.07 in. (1.78 mm)
4 Shock Piston 1.6 in. (40.64 mm) 2.02 in. (53.086 mm) 0.21 in. (5.334 mm)
5 Piston Bolt 0.676 in. (17.17 mm) .816 in. (20.726 mm) 0.07 in. (1.78 mm)
6 (2) Manifold Split Line 0.208 in. (5.283 mm) 0.348 in. (8.839 mm) 0.07 in. (1.78 mm)
7 Slow Valve 0.114 in. (2.90 mm) 0.254 in. (6.451 mm) 0.07 in. (1.78 mm)
8 (2) Plug 0.489 in. (12.42 mm) 0.629 in. (15.97 mm) 0.07 in. (1.78 mm)
9 Accumulator 2.114 in. (53.69 mm) 2.254 in. (57.25 mm) 0.07 in. (1.78 mm)
10 Lip Seal
11 Cam Shaft 0.301 in. (7.645 mm) 0.441 in. (11.20 mm) 0.07 in. (1.78 mm)
12 Back Up Ring
13 Surge Valve02664) 0.301 in. (7.645 mm) 0.441 in. (11.20 mm) 0.07 in. (1.78 mm)
14 Memory Piston 1.6 in. (40.64 mm) 2.02 in. (53.086 mm) 0.21 in. (5.334 mm)
Manual Tilt System Cleaning and Inspection

1. It is recommended that all o-rings exposed during disassembly be replaced.
2. Clean components, filter, and check valve seats using engine cleaner and compressed
air. Do not use cloth rags.
3. Inspect all machined surfaces for burrs or scoring to assure o-ring longevity.
4. Inspect shock rod. If scraper (located in cap) has failed to keep rod clean, replace scrap-
er.
Manual Tilt System Reassembly

IMPORTANT: Components must be dirt and lint free. Slightest amount of debris in tilt
system could cause system to malfunction.
Apply Quicksilver Power Trim and Steering Fluid to all o-rings during reassembly. If not
available, use automotive (ATF) automatic transmission fluid.
90-883065 APRIL 2001 Page 5C-29

MANUAL TILT ASSIST
CAM SHAFT REASSEMBLY

IMPORTANT: Cam shaft O-ring must be lubricated using 2-4-C with Teflon.
1. Install lubricated o-ring and back up seal to cam.
2. Install shaft seal in valve block with lips facing out.
3. Install cam shaft assembly in valve block.
4. Secure cam shaft in place using insulator, retainer plate, and screw. Tighten screw se-
curely.
f g
e
d
c
b
a
95
95 2-4-C w/Teflon (92-850736A1)

a - Spacer Retainer Clip
b - Retainer Clip
c - Screw
d - Shaft Seal
e - O-ring
f - Back up Seal
g - Cam
VALVE BODY CHECK REASSEMBLY

1. Install lubricated o-ring, plunger, steel ball and conical spring to valve block.
a
b
c
51145
a - Conical Spring
b - Steel Ball
c - Plunger
d - O-ring
Page 5C-30 90-883065 APRIL 2001

MANUAL TILT ASSIST
VELOCITY VALVE REASSEMBLY

1. Install spool, spring, lubricated o-ring and screw plug (surge valve assembly) into valve
block.
2. Torque velocity valve to 75 lb-in. (8.5 Nm).
a
b
c
d
a - Spool
b - Spring
c - O-ring
d - Velocity Valve - Torque to 75 lb-in. (8.5 Nm)
CHECK RETAINER REASSEMBLY

1. Install plunger, spring (large), ball, spring (small), and plug into valve block.
c
d
e 51142
a - Plunger
b - Spring (Large)
c - Ball
d - Spring (Small)
e - Plug
90-883065 APRIL 2001 Page 5C-31

MANUAL TILT ASSIST
VALVE PLUG REASSEMBLY

1. Install plunger, steel ball, spring, lubricated o-ring and screw plug. Torque screw plugs
to 75 lb-in. (8.5 Nm).
b
c
d
e
51142
a - Plunger (2)
b - Steel Ball (2)
c - Spring (2)
d - O-ring (2)
e - Screw Plug (2) Torque to 75 lb-in. (8.5 Nm)
Valve Block Installation

1. Install lubricated O-rings and dowel pins.
2. Install valve block to shock rod cylinder. Insert screws to shock rod cylinder and torque
to 100 lb-in. (11 Nm).
b c
1
d
e
51148
51146
a - O-ring (2)
b - Dowel Pin (2)
c - Valve Block
d - Screw (2) Torque to 100 lb-in. (11 Nm)
e - Shock Rod Cylinder
Page 5C-32 90-883065 APRIL 2001

MANUAL TILT ASSIST
Shock Rod Reassembly

1. Install lubricated o-rings to end cap.
2. Install rod wiper.
3. Install lubricated o-rings to shock piston.
c e
b f
51145
d 51199
a - Rod Wiper
b - Inner O-ring
c - Outer O-ring
d - Shock Piston
e - O-ring
f - O-ring
4. Clamp shock rod in soft jawed vise.

5. Position cylinder end cap onto rod, as shown.
51146
90-883065 APRIL 2001 Page 5C-33

MANUAL TILT ASSIST
CAUTION
When installing shock rod piston, spanner wrench must have1/4 in. x 5/16 in.
(6.4mm x8mm) long pegs to avoid damage to shock rod piston.
6. Apply Loctite Grade “A” (271) to threads on shock rod.
7. Install shock rod piston.
8. Tighten shock rod piston securely using spanner wrench [1/4 in. x 5/16 in. (6.4mm x
8mm) long pegs]. If a torquing type spanner tool is used to tighten shock piston, then
torque to 90 lb-ft (122 Nm).
a b
91-74951
7
7 Loctite “271” (92-809819)

51146
a - Spanner Wrench
b - Shock Rod Piston - Torque to 90 lb-ft (122 Nm)
9. Install ball, seat, and spring (five sets) to shock rod piston.
10. Secure components with plate. Torque screws to 35 lb-in. (3.9 Nm).
11. Remove shock rod assembly from vise.
e
d
c
a
b 51147

b - Plate
c - Spring (5)
d - Seat (5)
e - Ball (5)
Page 5C-34 90-883065 APRIL 2001

MANUAL TILT ASSIST
Shock Rod Installation and Fluid Filling Procedure

NOTE: There are two ways for the filling procedure. The first is the easiest and less time
consuming.
Filling Procedure Option One
1. Place trim cylinder in soft jawed vice.
2. With manifold cam lever closed (Up Position), fill cylinder and manifold to top with Quick-
silver Power trim and steering fluid, or (ATF) automatic transmission fluid. Let bubbles
disperse.
3. Install lubricated o-ring to memory piston.
4. Using lock ring pliers (P/N 91-822778A3). Set memory piston in top of cylinder then open
cam lever (Down Position) and push memory piston down just below cylinder treads.
Close cam lever (Up Position).
51144
5. Fill top of cylinder again with fluid to top and install shock rod assembly on top memory
piston. Open cam lever (Down Position) and push shock rod assembly down to 1/8″ be-
low cylinder threads. Close cam lever (Up Position).
6. Fill top of shock rod assembly with fluid to top of cylinder. Open cam lever (Down Posi-
tion) and screw cylinder cap down.
7. Tighten end cap securely using spanner wrench [1/4 in. x 5/16 in. (6.4mm x 8mm) long
pegs]. If a torquing type spanner tool is used to tighten end cap, then torque the end cap
to 45 lb-ft (61.0 Nm). Close cam lever (Up Position).
51145
90-883065 APRIL 2001 Page 5C-35

MANUAL TILT ASSIST
8. Open and close cam lever, watching for bubbles coming from accumulator check ball
hole. When bubbles stop, fill accumulator opening to top with fluid. Grease threads on
accumulator and opening with 2-4-C with Teflon. Start accumulator in threads and open
cam lever (Down Position). Torque accumulator to 35 lb–ft (47 Nm).
a b
51143
a - Accumulator
b - Cam Lever (Down Position)
NOTE: If filling procedure is done correctly, it should be hard to turn cylinder rod assembly
by hand.
Page 5C-36 90-883065 APRIL 2001

MANUAL TILT ASSIST
Filling Procedure Option Two Instructions for Making

Retaining Tool
3/16 in x 3 in.
(5 x 7.5 cm)
Steel Plate
3/8 in. x 13 in.

(10 mm x 33 cm)
Threaded Rod
4in. x 1/4 in. min.

(10cm x 6.4 mm) minimum
Channel Iron
10 in.
(25 cm)
1 in. 8 in.
(25mm) (20 cm)
3 in.
(76mm)
2 holes, 7/16 in. dia. (11 mm)
5 in. 1 1/4 in. dia.

(125mm) (30m)
20 in.
(508mm)
2 in.
(50mm)
4 in.
(100 mm)
6 in. 8 in. 3/8 in. dia. 2 holes

(152mm) (203mm)
90-883065 APRIL 2001 Page 5C-37

MANUAL TILT ASSIST
Bleeding Manual Tilt System

IMPORTANT: While bleeding tilt system, time must be allowed between each stroke
to allow air bubbles to dissipate.
1. With shock rod in the full up position and manifold cam lever open (facing down), secure
tilt system to retaining tool and container. (A No. 10 can or 3 lb coffee can could be used.)
2. Fill container to near full level using Quicksilver Power Trim and Steering Fluid. If not
available, use automotive (ATF) automatic transmission fluid.
IMPORTANT: Fluid level must remain above accumulator opening during bleeding
process.
e b
c
a
d 50447
a - Retaining Tool
b - Tilt System
c - Container
d - Cam Lever
e - Accumulator Opening
3. Bleed unit by pushing rod down slowly (18-20 seconds per stroke) until stopped at base.
Wait until all air bubbles exit accumulator base.
50432
Page 5C-38 90-883065 APRIL 2001

MANUAL TILT ASSIST
4. During up stroke, pull up on rod slowly 3 in. (76 mm) from base.
5. Wait until all air bubbles to exit accumulator base.
50433
6. Slowly cycle unit 5-8 times (round trip per cycle) using short strokes 3 in. (76 mm) from
base allowing bubbles to disappear during each stroke.
7. Allow unit to stand five minutes, then proceed to cycle unit 2-3 more times using short
strokes. No air bubbles should appear from accumulator port at this time.
8. With oil level well above accumulator port, slowly pull rod to full up position.
9. Install accumulator making sure air bubbles do not enter system.
10. Tighten accumulator snugly at this time.
50432
50432
90-883065 APRIL 2001 Page 5C-39

MANUAL TILT ASSIST
11. With cam lever remaining open (facing down), remove tilt assembly from oil and secure
in soft jawed vise. Torque accumulator to 35 lb-ft (47 Nm).
50433
Manual Tilt System Installation

1. Apply 2-4-C Marine Lubricant to lower pivot pin hole and pivot pin surface.
2. Start lower pivot pin into pivot pin hole and position lower dowel pin (retained) in its hole.
3. Reinstall manual tilt system, bottom first. Reconnect release valve link rod.
a
95
51148 1
51144
95 2-4-C w/Teflon (92-850736A1)
a - Lower Pivot Pin

b - Lower Dowel Pin
c - Manual Tilt System
Page 5C-40 90-883065 APRIL 2001

MANUAL TILT ASSIST
4. Using a suitable punch, drive lower pivot pin into clamp bracket and trim cylinder assem-
bly until pivot pin is flush with outside surface.
5. Using a punch, drive lower dowel pin in until seated.
a b
51147 51148
a - Lower Pivot Pin

b - Lower Dowel Pin
6. Apply 2-4-C Marine Lubricant to surface of upper pivot pin, pivot pin hole and shock rod
hole.
7. Using a mallet, drive upper pivot pin into swivel bracket and through shock rod until pivot
pin is flush with swivel bracket.
a
c
e
f
b
d
95
51148
95 2-4-C w/Teflon (92-850736A1) 51148
a - Pivot Pin
b - Pivot Pin Bore
c - Shock Rod Bore
d - Pivot Pin
e - Swivel Bracket
f - Shock Rod
90-883065 APRIL 2001 Page 5C-41

MANUAL TILT ASSIST
8. Drive upper dowel pin (a) into its hole until seated.
51147
a - Dowel Pin
9. Check manual release cam adjustment. Cam must open and close freely. Adjust link rod
as necessary.
Manual Release Valve Adjustment

1. With outboard in full up position, place tilt lock lever forward.
2. Lift cam lever (with link rod) to full up position.
b
51143
a - Tilt Lock Lever

b - Cam Lever
c - Link Rod
3. Link rod end must snap onto ball of tilt lock lever without moving tilt lock lever or cam
lever.
Page 5C-42 90-883065 APRIL 2001

NON-BIGFOOT GEAR HOUSING
LOWER UNIT
Section 6A - Non-Bigfoot Gear Housing
Table of Contents
Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6A-1 Propeller Shaft . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6A-26
Special Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6A-2 Forward Gear Bearing Race . . . . . . . . . . . 6A-28
Quicksilver Lubricants and Service Aids . . . . 6A-5 Bearing Carrier . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6A-28
Gear Housing (Drive Shaft - 1.83:1) . . . . . . . 6A-6 Reverse Gear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6A-31
Gear Housing (Prop Shaft - 1.83:1) . . . . . . . . 6A-8 Forward Gear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6A-32
General Service Recommendations . . . . . . . 6A-10 Lower Driveshaft Bearing Installation . . . 6A-33
Bearings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6A-10 Upper Driveshaft Bearing Installation . . . 6A-34
Seals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6A-10 Forward Gear, Pinion Gear and
Draining and Inspecting Gear Lubricant . . . . 6A-11 Driveshaft Assembly Installation . . . . . . . 6A-35
Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6A-12 Pinion Gear Location and
Disassembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6A-13 Forward Gear Backlash . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6A-36
Water Pump . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6A-13 Determining Pinion Gear Location . . . . . . 6A-36
Bearing Carrier and Propeller Shaft . . . . . 6A-15 Determining Forward Gear Backlash . . . . 6A-39
Propeller Shaft Disassembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6A-18 Bearing Carrier and
Pinion Gear, Driveshaft and Forward Gear . . 6A-20 Propeller Shaft Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . 6A-41
Upper Driveshaft Bearing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6A-21 Water Pump Re-Assembly/Installation . . 6A-42
Lower Driveshaft Bearing . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Forward Gear Bearing Race . . . . . . . . . . .
6A-22
6A-22
Gear Housing Pressure Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Gear Housing Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6A-47
6A-48
6
Shift Shaft . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6A-23 Filling Gear Housing with Lubricant . . . . . . . . 6A-50 A
Gear Housing Reassembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6A-25 Trim Tab Adjustment and Replacement . . . . 6A-51
Shift Shaft . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6A-25
Specifications
Gear Ratio 1.83:1

Forward Gear
Pinion Gear
GEAR HOUSING Pinion Gear Locating Tool
(1.83:1) (91-817008A2)
Backlash Indicator Tool (91-19660--1)
MARK #4 or 0.366 in. (9.3 mm)
Water Pressure (Warm Engine)
@ 800 rpm 1-3 psi (7-21 kPa)
@ 6000 rpm (WOT) 12-25 psi (83-172 kPa)
for 5 Minutes
90-883065 APRIL 2001 Page 6A-1

Special Tools
1. Bearing Preload Tool 91-14311A2
2. Backlash Indicator Tool 91-19660--1
19660-1
3. Puller 91-27780
4. Universal Puller Plate 91-37241
5. Driver Head 91-37312.
6. Driver Rod (91-37323)
Page 6A-2 90-883065 APRIL 2001

7. Bearing Retaining Tool 91-43506.
8. Puller Jaws (91-46086A1)
9. Dial Indicator (91-58222A1)
10. Dial Indicator Adaptor Kit (91-83155)
11. Puller Bolt (91-85716)
12. Forward Gear Bearing Installer 91-817005.
13. Water Pump Base Seal Installer 91-817006.
90-883065 APRIL 2001 Page 6A-3

14. Bearing Carrier Seal Installer 91-817007.
15. Pinion Gear Location Tool 91-817008A2.
16. Forward Gear Bearing Race Driver Cup 91-817009.
17. Needle Bearing Installer 91-817011.
18. Backlash Indicator Tool 91-817057A1.
d
a
c
51043
Ref. Description Qty.

a Plate 1
b Nut 1
c Stud 1
d Sleeve 1
91-817057A-1 Update Kit (Converts 91-14311A-1 Bearing Preload Kit Tool to a 91-14311A-2)
Page 6A-4 90-883065 APRIL 2001

19. Lower Driveshaft Bearing Driver Assembly 91-817058A1.
20. Driveshaft Holding Tool 91-817070 55/60 (2–stroke).
21. Driveshaft Holding Tool 91-877840A1 50/60 (4–stroke).

92-809820 Loctite “271”
92-90113--2 RTV Silicone Sealer
92-850737A1 Premium Blend Gear Lubricant
92-850736A1 2-4-C w/Teflon
90-883065 APRIL 2001 Page 6A-5

GEAR HOUSING (DRIVE SHAFT)(1.83:1 GEAR RATIO)

95
7 3.44 IN./87.37MM
36 TORPEDO DIA.
34
30 22
28 21
95
27 29 20
95 19
32 29
34
95
33
7 Loctite 271 (92-809820)

31 87 Premium Gear Lubricant (92-850737A1)
7 95 2-4-C With Teflon (92-825407A12)
23
95 18
24
26 7
25
95 10
87 95
6
7
7
17
7 9
15
8 16
5
1 14 95
4
3
35
13
11
12
3 4
7
4
2
Page 6A-6 90-883065 APRIL 2001


TORQUE
REF.
REF
1 1 GEAR HOUSING
2 1 DRAIN SCREW 58 6.5
3 2 SCREW 58 6.5
4 3 WASHER-sealing
5 1 DOWEL PIN
6 1 DOWEL PIN
7 1 PIPE PLUG
8 1 ROLLER BEARING
9 1 SEAL KIT
10 1 FILLER PLATE
11 1 PINION GEAR (14 TEETH)
12 1 NUT 50 67.8
13 1 SHIFT SHAFT ASSEMBLY
14 1 RETAINING RING
15 1 BUSHING ASSEMBLY
16 1 O-RING
17 1 OIL SEAL
18 1 DRIVE SHAFT
19 AR SHIM SET (SIZES 006 THRU 038)
20 1 TAPERED ROLLER BEARING
21 1 CUP
22 1 NUT 75 101.7
23 1 WATER PUMP BASE
24 1 O-RING
25 1 OIL SEAL
26 1 OIL SEAL
27 1 IMPELLER
28 1 KEY
29 2 WASHER
30 1 WATER PUMP
31 1 GASKET (LOWER)
32 1 GASKET (UPPER)
33 1 FACE PLATE
34 6 SCREW (M6x16) 60 6.8
35 1 SHIFT CAM
36 1 COUPLER
90-883065 APRIL 2001 Page 6A-7

GEAR HOUSING (PROP SHAFT)(1.83:1 GEAR RATIO)

3.44 IN./87.37MM
TORPEDO DIA.
59
65
61
60
1
95 95
63 46
45
64 47
43
42 66
7 40
41 67
56 38
57
58 39
37
62
55
54
95 53 7
51
95
95 52
50
49
94 48
44
7 Loctite 271 (92-809820)

94 Anti-Corrosion Grease (92-78376A6)
95 2-4-C With Teflon (92-825407A12)
Page 6A-8 90-883065 APRIL 2001


TORQUE
REF.
REF
1 1 GEAR HOUSING
37 AR SHIM SET (SIZES 006 THRU 048)
39 1 CUP
40 1 FORWARD GEAR (23 TEETH)
41 1 ROLLER BEARING
42 1 CAM FOLLOWER
43 1 SLIDE
44 1 SPRING
45 1 CLUTCH
46 1 CROSS PIN
47 1 SPRING
48 1 PROPELLER SHAFT
49 1 REVERSE GEAR (23 TEETH)
50 1 BALL BEARING
51 1 BEARING CARRIER ASSEMBLY
52 1 O-RING
53 1 ROLLER BEARING
54 1 OIL SEAL
55 1 OIL SEAL
56 2 SCREW (M8x30) 225 18.8 25.5
57 2 WASHER
58 2 THREADED INSERT
59 1 TRIM TAB
60 1 SCREW (M10 x 30) 186 21.0
61 1 WASHER
62 1 THRUST HUB
63 1 PROPELLER NUT 55 74.6
64 1 TAB WASHER
65 1 DECAL- Gear Ratio
66 4 WASHER
67 4 SCREW (M10 x 45) 40 54
90-883065 APRIL 2001 Page 6A-9

General Service Recommendations

There may be more than one way to “disassemble” or “reassemble” a particular part(s),
therefore, it is recommended that the entire procedure be read prior to repair.
IMPORTANT: Read the following before attempting any repairs.
In many cases, disassembly of a sub-assembly may not be necessary until cleaning and
inspection reveals that disassembly is required for replacement of one or more components.
Service procedure order in this section is a normal disassembly-reassembly sequence.
Threaded parts are right hand (RH), unless otherwise indicated.
When holding, pressing or driving is required, use soft metal vise jaw protectors or wood
for protection of parts. Use a suitable mandrel (one that will contact only the bearing race)
when pressing or driving bearings.
Whenever compressed air is used to dry a part, verify that no water is present in air line.
Bearings
WARNING
To avoid personal injury, wear eye protection and regulate air pressure to not more
than 25 p.s.i. (172 kPa) when drying bearings with compressed air. Do not spin bear-
ings with compressed air as this may cause bearings to score from lack of lubrica-
tion.
All bearings must be cleaned and inspected. Clean bearings with solvent and dry with com-
pressed air. Air should be directed at the bearing so that it passes through the bearing. Do
not spin bearing with compressed air (see above warning). After cleaning, lubricate bear-
ings with Quicksilver Gear Lubricant. DO NOT lubricate tapered bearing cups until after in-
spection.
Inspect all bearings for roughness, catches and bearing race side wear. Work inner bearing
race in-and-out, while holding outer race, to check for side wear. When inspecting tapered
bearings, determine condition of rollers and inner bearing race by inspecting bearing cup
for pitting, scoring, grooves, uneven wear, imbedded particles and/or discoloration from
over-heating. Always replace tapered bearing and race as a set.
Inspect gear housing for bearing races that have spun in their respective bores. If race(s)
have spun, gear housing must be replaced.
Roller bearing condition is determined by inspecting the surface of the shaft that the roller
bearing supports. Check shaft surface for pitting scoring, grooving, imbedded particles, un-
even wear and/or discoloration from overheating. The shaft and bearing must be replaced
if such a condition exists.
Seals
As a normal procedure, all O-rings and oil seals should be replaced without regard to ap-
pearance. To prevent leakage around seals, apply Loctite 271 to outer diameter of all seals.
When using Loctite on seals or threads, surfaces must be clean and dry. Apply 2-4-C w/Te-
flon on all O-rings and on I.D. of oil seals. Apply 2-4-C w/Teflon to external surfaces of bear-
ing carrier.
Page 6A-10 90-883065 APRIL 2001

Draining and Inspecting Gear Lubricant

WARNING
If gear housing is installed on engine, to avoid accidental starting, disconnect (and
isolate) spark plug leads from spark plugs before working near the propeller.
1. With gear housing in normal running position, place a clean pan under housing and re-
move the two vent screws and one fill/drain screw (with gaskets).
b
53922
a - Vent Plug
b - Fill/Drain Plug
2. Inspect gear lubricant for metal particles (lubricant will have a “metal flake” appearance).
Presence of fine metal particles (resembling powder) in the drain pan indicates normal
wear. The presence of metal chips in the drain pan indicates the need for gear housing
disassembly and component inspection.
3. Note color of gear lubricant. White or cream color MAY indicate presence of water in lu-
bricant. Gear lubricant which has been drained from a gear case recently in operation
will have a yellowish color due to lubricant agitation/aeration. Gear lube which is mixed
with assembly lubricant (Special Lube 101 or 2-4-C w/Teflon) will also be creamy white
in color. This is normal and should not be confused with the presence of water. If water
is suspected to be present in gearcase, a pressure check of gearcase should be made
(with no lubricant in gearcase). Gearcase should hold 10-12 psi of pressure for 5 min-
utes without leaking down. Pouring a portion of the gear lubricant into a glass jar and
allowing the lubricant to settle will allow any water in the lube to separate and settle to
the bottom of the jar.
4. Presence of water in gear lubricant indicates the need for disassembly and inspection
of oil seals, seal surfaces, O-rings, water pump gaskets, bearings and bearing surfaces,
as well as gear housing components. If gearcase is rebuilt, gearcase should be pressure
checked before filling with lubricant.
90-883065 APRIL 2001 Page 6A-11

Removal
WARNING
To prevent accidental engine starting, remove (and isolate) spark plug leads from
spark plugs before removing gear housing.
1. Remove (and isolate) spark plug leads from spark plugs.
2. Shift engine into forward gear.
3. Tilt engine to full “Up” position.
4. Remove 4 bolts and washers, two from each side.
5. Remove trim tab.
6. Remove locknut and washer in trim tab recess.
7. Remove gear housing.
a c
53992
a - Trim Tab
b - Locknut and Washer
c - Bolts(4) M10 x 45 and Washers(4)
Page 6A-12 90-883065 APRIL 2001

Disassembly
Water Pump
NOTE: If water tube seal stayed on water tube (inside of drive shaft housing) when gear
housing was removed, pull water tube seal from water tube.
1. Replace water tube seal, if damaged.
2. Remove 6 screws, washers, and isolators (Design 1).
3. Remove cover.
NOTE: Isolators from forward 2 screws are shorter than the other isolators. Retain these
for proper reassembly (Design 1).
NOTE: Design 1 included isolators on the water pump housing screws. Newer design ver-
sions did not use these isolators.
a
e
b
b
c
d
a - Water Tube Seal d - Isolators (6) If so equipped

b - Screw (6) M6x30 e - Cover
c - Washers (6)
IMPORTANT: The circular groove formed by the impeller sealing bead should be dis-
regarded when inspecting cover and plate, as the depth of the groove will not affect
water pump output.
4. Replace cover if thickness of steel at the discharge slots is 0.060 in. (1.524 mm) or less,
or if groove(s) (other than impeller sealing bead groove) in cover roof are more than
0.030 in. (0.762 mm) deep.
5. Lift impeller, drive key, and gasket from drive shaft.
c b
19220
a - Impeller
b - Drive Key
c - Gasket
90-883065 APRIL 2001 Page 6A-13

6. Inspect impeller. Replace impeller if any of the following conditions exist:

• Impeller blade(s) are cracked, torn, or worn.
• Impeller is glazed or melted (caused by operation without sufficient water sup-
ply).
• Rubber portion of impeller is not bonded to impeller hub.
7. Remove plate and gasket.
8. Replace plate if groove(s) (other than impeller sealing bead groove) in plate are more
than 0.030 in. (0.762 mm) deep.
a - Plate
b - Gasket
Old Style Base
9. Remove water pump base by lifting gently as shown. Inspect carefully for cracks.
51206
a - Water Pump Base

New Style Base
10. Remove water pump base by lifting gently as shown. Inspect carefully for cracks.
55874
a - Water Pump Base
Page 6A-14 90-883065 APRIL 2001

11. Remove (and discard) seals, if damaged. Secure the base to a bench top or lightly
clamp base in vise when removing seals.
51205
a - Seals
12. Remove seal and plate if damaged or worn.
ÉÉÉÉÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉÉÉÉÉ
b
ÉÉÉÉÉÉÉ
a
51268
a - Seal
b - Plate
Bearing Carrier and Propeller Shaft
1. Remove fasteners.
a 51117
a - Fasteners
90-883065 APRIL 2001 Page 6A-15

2. With propeller shaft horizontal, use bearing puller to remove carrier from gear housing.
Remove propeller shaft components as an assembly, taking care not to lose cam follow-
er.
b
e
c a 91-46086A1 Puller Jaws
91–58716 Puller Bolt
d 51116
a - Bearing Carrier
b - Puller Jaws (91-46086A1)
c - Puller Bolt (91-85716)
d - Thrust Hub
e - Propeller Shaft
3. Replace reverse gear if gear teeth or clutch teeth on reverse gear are chipped or worn.
If reverse gear must be replaced, pinion and sliding clutch should also be inspected for
damage.
4. If reverse gear bearing is rusted or does not roll freely, replace bearing. Remove bearing
and reverse gear using bearing puller.
a
91-27780
a - Bearing Puller (91-27780)
Page 6A-16 90-883065 APRIL 2001

5. Remove ball bearing from reverse gear using Universal Puller Plate and mandrel.
a
d
91-37312 91-37241
b c
51269
a - Ball Bearing
b - Reverse Gear
c - Universal Puller Plate (91-37241)
d - Driver Head (91-37312)
6. If bearing is rusted or does not roll freely, replace bearing. Remove bearing and oil seals.
Discard oil seals.
91-37323
a
b 91-37312
a - Driver Rod (91-37323)

b - Driver Head (91-37312)
c - Propeller Shaft Needle Bearing
d - Oil Seals (2)
7. Remove propeller shaft seals and bearing carrier O-ring.
51263
a - O-ring
90-883065 APRIL 2001 Page 6A-17

Propeller Shaft Disassembly

1. Remove spring. Push out cross pin.
d
b
c
a
a - Spring
b - Cam Follower
c - Apply Pressure as Shown
d - Punch
e - Cross Pin
2. Replace cam follower if worn or pitted on either end.

3. Replace sliding clutch if jaws are rounded or chipped. Rounded jaws indicate the follow-
ing:
• Improper shift cable adjustment.
• Engine idle speed too high while shifting.
• Shifting too slowly.
a e c
b
d 51265
a - Cam Follower
b - Guide Block
c - Spring
d - Sliding Clutch
e - Jaws
Page 6A-18 90-883065 APRIL 2001

4. Check bearing surfaces of propeller shaft. If shaft is worn/pitted, replace shaft and corre-
sponding bearing.
5. Replace propeller shaft if:
a. Splines are twisted or worn.
b. Bearing surfaces of propeller shaft are pitted or worn.
c. Oil seal surface is grooved in excess of 0.005 in. (0.12mm).
d. Shaft has a noticeable “wobble” or is bent more than 0.006 in. (.152 mm). Check with
a dial indicator and V-blocks.
c b
51139
a
a - V-Blocks
b - Bearing Surfaces
c - Check with Dial Indicator Here
90-883065 APRIL 2001 Page 6A-19

Pinion Gear, Driveshaft and Forward Gear

1. Hold driveshaft using Driveshaft Holding Tool. Remove (and discard) pinion nut.
Model Drive Shaft Holding Tool

40/50/60 (4-Stroke) 91-877840A1
55/60 Bigfoot (2–Stroke) 91-817070
2. Remove driveshaft, pinion gear, and forward gear.

3. Replace pinion gear if chipped or worn.
4. Replace lower driveshaft bearing if rusted or damaged; or does not roll freely. To re-
move, refer to “Lower Driveshaft Bearing”, following.
5. Replace forward gear if gear teeth are chipped or worn.
e
a d
a - Pinion Nut
b - Driveshaft
c - Pinion Gear
d - Bearing
e - Forward Gear
6. Replace forward gear needle bearing if rusted or does not roll freely after cleaning in
solvent. Remove as shown.
a - Needle Bearing
Page 6A-20 90-883065 APRIL 2001

7. Replace forward gear tapered roller bearing and race if either bearing or race are rusted
or damaged; or if bearing does not roll freely after cleaning in solvent. Remove bearing
from gear using Universal Puller Plate and Mandrel. To remove race, refer to “Forward
Gear Bearing Race”, following.
a c
91-37241
b
51119
a - Bearing/Race
b - Puller Plate (91-37241)
c - Mandrel
Upper Driveshaft Bearing

1. Replace bearing and race if either bearing or race are rusted or damaged; or if bearing
does not roll freely after cleaning in solvent.
51271
a - Bearing
90-883065 APRIL 2001 Page 6A-21

Lower Driveshaft Bearing

1. Remove lower driveshaft bearing using tool (91-817058A1) with bushing installed.
c
a
91-817058A1
51260
a - Bearing
b - Removal Tool (91-817058A1)
c - Bushing
Forward Gear Bearing Race

IMPORTANT: Retain shim(s) for re-assembly.
1. Remove race and shim(s) using bearing puller.
91-27780
c b
a
a - Race
b - Shim(s)
c - Bearing Puller (91-27780)
Page 6A-22 90-883065 APRIL 2001

Shift Shaft
1. Remove shift shaft coupler and spacer.
51271
a - Coupler
b - Spacer
2. Remove shift shaft bushing and shift shaft. Protect shift shaft to prevent spline damage.
51205
a - Shift Shaft Bushing

b - Shift Shaft
3. Remove shift shaft cam, replace if worn.
51117
a - Shift Shaft Cam (55/60 2–Stroke shown)
90-883065 APRIL 2001 Page 6A-23

NOTE: Remove any burrs or sharp edges on the shift shaft splines before removing the shift
shaft bushing.
4. Remove shift shaft bushing and “E” clip from shift shaft. Replace shift shaft if splines are
twisted or damaged on either end of shaft. Remove (and discard) O-ring if damaged.
d
b c
a
51264
a - Shift Shaft Bushing

b - “E” Clip
c - Shift Shaft
d - O-ring
5. Remove (and discard) seal if damaged.
51265
a - Seal
Page 6A-24 90-883065 APRIL 2001

Gear Housing Reassembly

Shift Shaft
1. Apply Loctite 271 on O.D. of new seal. Install with seal lip up, as shown.
2. Press seal into shift shaft bushing until seal bottoms. Use a suitable tool.
3. Apply 2-4-C w/Teflon on O-ring and I.D. of seal.
95
a
7
51270
7 Loctite 271 (92-809820)
95 2-4-C With Teflon (92-825407A12)
a - Seal Lips Facing Up

b - Shift Shaft Bushing
c - Tool
4. Assemble components.
95 d
b
c
a
51264
95 2-4-C With Teflon (92-825407A12)
a - Shift Shaft
b - “E” Clip
c - Bushing
d - O-ring
90-883065 APRIL 2001 Page 6A-25

5. Install shift cam; align hole in shift cam with shift shaft pilot bore.
a a
b c
51117
a - Shift Shaft Pilot Bore

b - Shift Cam numbers up (2–Stroke)
c - Shift Shaft numbers down (4–Stroke)
6. Install shift shaft assembly; insert splines into shift cam.
51268
a - Shift Shaft Assembly

Propeller Shaft
1. Install components. Clutch should be installed with long end (non-ratcheting) toward
propshaft reverse shoulder.
d c a
95 e
b
95 2-4-C w/Teflon (92-850736A1)
a - Spring
b - Clutch (Align Hole with Slot in Prop Shaft)
c - Guide Block
d - Cam Follower (Hold in Place with 2-4-C w/Teflon)
e - Propshaft Shoulder
Page 6A-26 90-883065 APRIL 2001

2. Install cross pin.
b
a 51268
a - Cross Pin
b - Cam Follower
c - Apply Pressure in This Direction
3. Install spring.
NOTE: Spring windings must lay flat in clutch groove. DO NOT allow spring coils to overlap
each other.
a
51265
a - Spring
90-883065 APRIL 2001 Page 6A-27


1. Place shim(s), retained from disassembly, into housing. If shim(s) were lost or damaged,
or a new gearcase is being assembled, start with a .010 in. (.254mm) shim.
2. Drive bearing race into housing. Use a lead hammer to avoid damage to propshaft.
d c a
b 4
91-817009 51265
4 Needle Bearing Assy. Lub. (92-825265A1)

a - Shim(s)
b - Driver Cup (91-817009)
c - Propeller Shaft
d - Assembled Bearing Carrier
Bearing Carrier
1. Lubricate O.D. of needle bearing with 2-4-C w/Teflon.
2. Install needle bearing.
Installation Note: Push against numbered end of bearing.
b
a
91-817011
95
51269
95 2-4-C With Teflon (92-825407A12)

a - Needle Bearing
b - Installer (91-817011)
Page 6A-28 90-883065 APRIL 2001

3. Apply Loctite 271 on O.D. of small diameter oil seal. Seal lip should face away from
shoulder on Installation Tool. Press seal in until Installer Tool bottoms out.
7 a
91-817007
58209
7 Loctite “271” (92-809819)
a - Small Diameter Seal
b - Installer Tool (91-817007)
4. Apply Loctite 271 on O.D. of larger diameter oil seal. Seal lip should face towards shoul-
der on installation tool. Press in until Installer tool bottoms out.
7
a 91-817007
51263
7 Loctite “271” (92-809819)
a - Large Diameter Seal
b - Installer Tool (91-817007)
90-883065 APRIL 2001 Page 6A-29

Installation Note: If service tools are not available, the following reference dimensions ap-
ply for installing bearing and seals to proper depths.
.82 in. (20mm)
a
51275
a - Bearing
.44 in. (11mm)

.04 in. (1mm)
b
a
51275
a - Oil Seal (Install with Lip Down)

b - Oil Seal (Install With Lip Up)
Page 6A-30 90-883065 APRIL 2001

Reverse Gear
1. Lubricate I.D. of bearing with 2-4-C w/Teflon. Use suitable mandrel and press onto gear
until bearing bottoms.
b
a
95
51205
95 2-4-C With Teflon (92-825407A12)
a - Bearing
b - Suitable Mandrel
2. Lubricate O.D. of bearing with 2-4-c w/Teflon. Use suitable mandrel and press reverse
gear/bearing assembly into bearing carrier until bearing bottoms out.
c
95
51264
95 2-4-C With Teflon (92-825407A12)
a - Reverse Gear and Bearing Assembly
c - Bearing Carrier
90-883065 APRIL 2001 Page 6A-31

Forward Gear
1. Lubricate O.D. of bearing with 2-4-C w/Teflon. Press new propshaft bearing into gear
until Installer Tool bottoms.
91-817005
95
95 2-4-C With Teflon (92-825407A12) 51291
a - Installer Tool (91-817005)
2. Lubricate I.D. of bearing with 2-4-C w/Teflon. Use suitable mandrel and press tapered
roller bearing onto gear until bearing bottoms on gear.
b
95
a
51272
95 2-4-C With Teflon (92-825407A12)

a - Bearing (Lubricate I.D. Before Assembly)
Page 6A-32 90-883065 APRIL 2001

Lower Driveshaft Bearing Installation

1. Lubricate O.D. of bearing with 2-4-C w/Teflon.
2. Install bearing into housing. Press until Installer Tool bottoms out.
7.05 in.
7.07 in. ( )
179.0mm
179.5mm
b
95
c
91-817058A1
51260
95 2-4-C With Teflon (92-825407A12)
a - Needle Bearing (Lubricate O.D. Before Assembly)
b - Bearing Installer Tool (91-817058A1)
c - Reference (Bearing Depth)
90-883065 APRIL 2001 Page 6A-33

Upper Driveshaft Bearing Installation

1. Lubricate I.D. of bearing with 2-4-C w/Teflon. Using suitable mandrel press upper drive-
shaft bearing onto driveshaft until bearing contacts driveshaft shoulder.
95 a
51268
95 2-4-C With Teflon (92-825407A12)
a - Upper Driveshaft Bearing (Lubricate I.D. Before Assembly)
Page 6A-34 90-883065 APRIL 2001

Forward Gear, Pinion Gear, Upper Driveshaft Bearing Race, Retainer and
Driveshaft Installation
NOTE: If shim(s) were lost or are not reusable (damaged), start with approximately .015 in.
(0.361mm).
Install components in sequence shown.
g
91-43506
e
f
b
g a
51263
ASSEMBLY SEQUENCE
a - Forward Gear/Bearing: Apply Premium Blend Gear Lube to Bearing Rollers Be-
fore Installation
b - Pinion Gear
c - Driveshaft
d - Upper Driveshaft Bearing Race and Shim(s)
e - Upper Driveshaft Bearing Retainer. Tighten to Specified Torque using Tool
(91-43506)
f - Driveshaft Holding Tool
g - Pinion Nut (New) (See Note at “Pinion Gear Depth”, Following.) Recess in Nut
is Installed Toward Pinion Gear (See Inset).
40/50/60 (4-Stroke) 91-877840A1
55/60 (2-Stroke) 91-817070
Upper Driveshaft Bearing Retainer Torque

75 lb-ft (101.7 Nm)
90-883065 APRIL 2001 Page 6A-35

Pinion Gear Location and Forward Gear Backlash

DETERMINING PINION GEAR LOCATION
NOTE: Read entire procedure before attempting any change in shim thickness.
IMPORTANT: Forward gear assembly pilots the end of the pinion gage and must be
installed in gear housing when checking pinion gear depth. Without it an inaccurate
measurement will be obtained.
1. Clean the gear housing bearing carrier shoulder and diameter.
2. Position gear housing upright (driveshaft vertical). Install Bearing Preload Tool
(91–14311A2) in sequence shown.
h
3/4 in. (19mm) I.D.
i i
g
f
e
51270
INSTALLATION SEQUENCE: Bearing Preload Tool (91–14311A2)

a - Plate
b - Adaptor: Bearing surfaces clean and free of nicks
c - Thrust Bearing: Oiled and able to move freely
d - Thrust Washer: Clean and free of nicks and bends
e - Spring
f - Nut: Threaded all the way onto bolt
g - Bolt: Held snug against spring
h - Sleeve: Holes in sleeve must align with set screws
i - Set Screw (2): Tighten against drive shaft, bolt should not slide on driveshaft
Page 6A-36 90-883065 APRIL 2001

3. Measure distance between top of nut and bottom of bolt head.

4. Increase distance by 1 in. (25.4mm).
5. Rotate driveshaft 10 revolutions. This properly seats upper driveshaft tapered roller
bearing.
c
a
19884
a - Distance, 1 in. (25.4 mm)

b - Nut
c - Bolt
6. Insert Pinion Location Tool. Position access hole as shown. Insert feeler gauge between
gauging surface and pinion gear.
a b c d
91-817008A2
51265
a - Pinion Location Tool (91-817008A2)

b - Access Hole
c - Gauging Surface
d - Pinion Gear
90-883065 APRIL 2001 Page 6A-37

7. The correct clearance between the gauging surface and the pinion gear is .025 in.
(0.64mm).
8. If clearance is more than .025 in. (0.64mm) remove shims from under the upper bearing
cup. If clearance is less than 0.25 in., add shims under the upper bearing race.
9. After final adjustment to pinion height, and forward gear backlash has been estab-
lished, apply Loctite 271 to threads and torque new pinion nut to specified torque.
NOTE: Clean driveshaft and pinion nut threads with Loctite Primer of suitable de-greaser
before applying Loctite.
51285
51263
7 Loctite “271” (92-809819)
a - Bearing Race
b - Shim(s)
c - Pinion Nut (Recessed Side Toward Pinion)
Pinion Nut Torque
50 lb-ft (67 Nm)
Page 6A-38 90-883065 APRIL 2001

Determining Forward Gear Backlash

1. Obtain correct pinion gear location; refer to “Determining Pinion Gear Location”, preced-
ing.
2. Install Bearing Preload Tool on driveshaft; refer to “Determining Pinion Gear Location”,
preceding.
3. Install components as shown.
4. While holding the driveshaft, torque the puller bolt to 45 in-lb.
5. Rotate driveshaft 5-10 revolutions. This should properly seat the forward gear tapered
roller bearing. Repeat step 4.
91-46086A1 Puller Jaws

91–58716 Puller Bolt
d a b
51119
c
a - Propeller Shaft*
b - Bearing Carrier* (Assembled)
c - Puller Jaws (91-46086A1)
d - Puller Bolt (91-58716)
Puller Bolt Torque
45 lb-in. (5.1 Nm)
• *Refer to “Bearing Carrier and Propeller Shaft Installation”, following.
90-883065 APRIL 2001 Page 6A-39


e f
d c
91–83155 Dial Indicator Adapter Kit

a
91–58222A1 Dial Indicator
91–19660–1 Backlask Indicator

b c
51117
a - Threaded Rod (Obtain Locally) d - Dial Indicator Adaptor Kit (91-83155)
b - Washers e - Dial Indicator (91-58222A1)
c - Nuts f - Backlash Indicator Tool (91-19660-1)
7. Position Dial Indicator on appropriate line (from chart) marked on Backlash Indicator
Tool.
BACKLASH ALIGN POINTER OF DIAL INDI-
MODEL INDICATOR TOOL CATOR WITH MARK
40/50/60 (4-Stroke) 91-19660-1 4 OR 0.366 in. (9.3 mm)
55/60 (2-Stroke) 91-19660-1 3
8. Turn driveshaft back-and-forth (check for no rotation at the propeller shaft).

9. Dial Indicator registers amount of backlash, which must be between specifications
shown in chart.
MODEL DIAL INDICATOR MINIMUM DIAL INDICATOR MAXIMUM
40/50/60 (4-Stroke) 0.011 in. (0.28 mm) 0.017 in. (.43 mm)
55/60 (2-Stroke) 0.013 in. (0.33 mm) 0.019 in. (.48 mm)
10. If backlash is less than the minimum reading, remove shim(s) from in front of the forward
gear bearing race. If backlash is more than the maximum reading, add shim(s) in front
of the forward gear bearing race. When final measurement has been made, apply Loc-
tite 271 to threads of pinion nut.
NOTE: By adding or subtracting .001 in. (0.025mm) shim, the backlash will change 0.001
in. (0.032mm).
Page 6A-40 90-883065 APRIL 2001

Bearing Carrier and Propeller Shaft Installation

1. Lubricate O-ring, bearing carrier and related gearcase housing bores, in areas shown,
with Quicksilver 2-4-C w/Teflon.
2. Insert propeller shaft assembly into bearing carrier.
3. Install bearing carrier and propeller shaft assembly into gear housing. Use care not to
displace cam follower.
a b
95 51271
95 2-4-C w/Teflon (92-850736A1)

a - O-ring
b - Cam Follower
4. Discard the thin 0.063 in. (1.60 mm) flat washers and the 25 mm long bolts on models
listed. Install thicker flat washers and longer bolts.
55/60 (3 Cylinder - 2 Stroke) Non Big Foot
USA 0G662097 and below
Belgium NA
a
b
a - Bolt 25 mm Long - Discard

b - Thin Flat Washer 0.063 in. (1.60 mm) thick - Discard
5. Install thicker flat washers and longer bolts.

a
b
a - Bolt (10-855940-30) 1.18 in. (30 mm) Long

b - Washer (12-855941) 0.090 in. (2.29 mm)
90-883065 APRIL 2001 Page 6A-41

6. Torque bolts to specified torque.
51117
7
7 Loctite “271” (92-809819)
a - Bolts (2) M8x30
Bearing Carrier Bolt Torque
225 lb-in. / 18.8 lb-ft. (25.5 Nm)
Water Pump Re-Assembly and Installation

1. Place seal on longer shoulder side of tool. Seal spring should face the shoulder of the
tool during installation. Apply Loctite 271 to O.D. of seal.
2. Press into water pump base until tool bottoms.
7
91-817006
a
55876
7 Loctite 271 (92-809820)
a - Seal
b - Seal Installation Tool (91-817006)
Page 6A-42 90-883065 APRIL 2001

3. Place seal on shorter shoulder side of tool. Seal spring should face the shoulder of the
tool during installation. Apply Loctite 271 to O.D. of seal.
4. Press into water pump base until tool bottoms.
b 91-817006
a
55877
7 Loctite 271 (92-809820)
a - Seal
b - Shorter Side of Tool
c - Seal Installation Tool (91-817006)
NOTE: If installation tool is not available, press seals in as shown to depths indicated.
0.04 in. (1.02 mm)

a
55878
a - Seal (Install with spring visible when installed.)

b - Seal (Install with spring visible when installed.)
c - Seal Bottom
90-883065 APRIL 2001 Page 6A-43

5. Install O-ring. Apply Quicksilver 2-4-C w/Teflon to o-ring,seal lips and gear housing bore.
6. Install water pump base into gear case.
95
55879
95 2-4-C w/Teflon (92-850736A1)
a - O-ring
b - Water Pump Base
c - Gear Case
7. If removed previously, re-install seal and filler plate.
ÉÉÉÉÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉÉÉÉÉ
b
a
ÉÉÉÉÉÉÉ
51268
a - Seal
b - Filler Plate
Page 6A-44 90-883065 APRIL 2001

8. Install gasket and face plate.
51293
a - Gasket
b - Face Plate
IMPORTANT: If the old impeller is re-used, install in the original (clockwise) direction
of rotation.
9. Install drive key and impeller.
51292
a - Drive Key
b - Impeller
10. Lubricate I.D. of cover with Quicksilver 2-4-C w/Teflon. Install gasket with bead facing up.
95
b
a
51290
95 2-4-C With Teflon (92-825407A12)

a - Gasket
b - Bead Toward Cover
90-883065 APRIL 2001 Page 6A-45

11. Rotate driveshaft clockwise and push water pump housing down.
12. Apply Loctite 271 on threads and tighten screws to specified torque (in sequence
shown).
c d
d d
c
b b c 51275
a - Water Pump Housing Assembly

b - Isolators, (Design 1) Note: 2 isolators for forward screws are different from
remaining 4 isolators
c - Washers (6)
d - Screw (6) M6x16
NOTE: Torque cover screws as shown.
1 3
4 2
51271
Cover Screw Torque

60 lb-in. (6.8 Nm)
Page 6A-46 90-883065 APRIL 2001

13. If water tube seal stayed on water tube (in driveshaft housing), pull seal from water tube.
14. Lubricate I.D. of water tube seal with Quicksilver 2-4-C w/Teflon and install.
51206
a - Water Tube Seal
Gear Housing Pressure Test

1. Remove vent plug and install pressure test gauge. Tighten securely.
2. Pressurize housing to 10-12 PSI (69-83 kPa) and observe gauge for 5 minutes.
3. Rotate driveshaft, prop shaft and move shift rod while housing is pressurized to check
for leaks.
4. If pressure drop is noted, immerse housing in water.

5. Re-pressurize to 10-12 PSI (69-83 kPa) and check for air bubbles.
6. Replace leaking seals as necessary. Retest housing.
NOTE: Gearcase assembly should hold 10-12 PSI (69-83 kPa) for 5 minutes.
7. Remove tester from housing. Install vent plug and new sealing washers.
90-883065 APRIL 2001 Page 6A-47

Gear Housing Installation

WARNING
Disconnect (and isolate) spark plug leads before installing gear housing onto drive-
shaft housing.
1. Position shift linkage into forward gear position.
Remote Control Model Shown
b
a
c
a - Shift Lever 40/50/60 EFI (4-Stroke)
b - Shift Lever 40/50/60 Carb (4-Stroke)
c - Shift Lever 60 Carb (2-Stroke)
2. Tilt engine to full “Up” position. Engage tilt lock lever.
3. Shift gear housing into neutral. Propeller shaft will rotate freely in either direction.
4. Install water tube seal, spacer and shift shaft coupler.
95
a c
51206
95 2-4-C w/Teflon (92-850736A1)
a - Water Tube Seal
b - Spacer
c - Shift Shaft Coupler
Page 6A-48 90-883065 APRIL 2001

CAUTION
Do not lubricate top of driveshaft. Excess lubricant will not allow driveshaft to fully
engage crankshaft. Tightening the gear housing fasteners (if excess lubricant is on
top of driveshaft) will load the driveshaft/crankshaft and may damage either or both
powerhead and gear housing. Wipe the top of driveshaft free of lubricant.
5. Lightly apply Quicksilver 2-4-C w/Teflon onto the driveshaft splines.
6. Shift gear housing into forward gear. Gear housing will not engage when propeller shaft
is turned clockwise.
7. Position driveshaft into driveshaft housing. Move gear housing towards driveshaft hous-
ing while aligning shift shaft coupler, water tube seal and driveshaft splines.
NOTE: If the driveshaft splines will not align with the crankshaft splines, install a propeller
and turn the propeller shaft counterclockwise while pushing gear housing onto driveshaft
housing. It may also be necessary to move the shift block (on the powerhead) to align the
shift shaft splines for proper re-assembly.
8. Install 4 bolts and washers, (two each side). Apply Loctite 271 on bottom half of bolt
threads prior to installation.
9. Install locknut and washer.
10. Torque bolts and locknut to specified torque.
7 a
b
50551
7 Loctite “271” (92-809819)

a - Bolts and Washers (4) M10x45
Bolts and Locknut Torque
40 lb-ft (54 Nm)
11. Check shift operation.

a. Propeller shaft will not rotate in counterclockwise direction when in forward gear.
Clutch will ratchet (clicking noise) when rotated clockwise.
b. Propeller shaft will rotate freely in either direction when gearcase is in neutral.
c. Propeller shaft will not rotate in either direction when gearcase is in reverse.
IMPORTANT: If shift operation is not as described, remove the gear housing and cor-
rect the shift operation.
90-883065 APRIL 2001 Page 6A-49

Filling Gear Housing with Lubricant

NOTE: Gear housing lubricant capacity is approximately 11.5 fl. oz. (340 ml).
WARNING
If gear housing is installed on outboard, disconnect (and isolate) spark plug leads
from spark plugs before working near the propeller.
CAUTION
Do not use automotive grease in the gear housing. Use only Quicksilver Gear Lube.
1. Remove any gasket material from “Fill/Drain” and “Vent” plugs and gear housing. Install
new sealing washers on “Fill/Drain” and “Vent” plugs.
IMPORTANT: Never add lubricant without removing “Vent” plugs. Gear housing can-
not be filled because of trapped air. Fill gear housing when driveshaft is in a vertical
position.
2. Remove “Fill/Drain” plug and sealing washer.
3. Insert lubricant tube in “Fill/Drain” hole, then remove “Vent” plugs and sealing washer.
4. Fill until excess lubricant flows out of left “Vent” hole.
5. Replace left “Vent” plug and sealing washer and continue to fill until lubricant flows from
right “Vent” hole.
6. Replace right “Vent” plug and sealing washer.
7. Install “Fill/Drain” plug and sealing washer.
8. Torque screws to specified torque.
b
c
50558
a
a - “Fill/Drain” Plug
b - “Vent” Plug
c - “Vent” Plug
Screw Torque
58 lb-in. (6.5 Nm)
Page 6A-50 90-883065 APRIL 2001

Trim Tab Adjustment and Replacement

IMPORTANT: The trim tab is made of a special alloy to aid in protecting the drive shaft
housing and gear housing from galvanic corrosion (corrosion and pitting of metal
surfaces). Do not paint or place protective coating on the trim tab, or trim tab corro-
sion protection function will be lost.
1. Replace trim tab if 50% (or more) corroded. Mark location of old trim tab on anti-ventila-
tion plate before removal; install new trim tab in same location.
2. The trim tab will offset (balance) some of the “steering load” that is caused by “propeller
torque” at higher speeds. If at higher speeds the boat turns more easily to the left, loosen
screw, move the trim tab (trailing edge) to the left (when viewed from behind); re-tighten
screw. Turn trim tab (trailing edge) to the right if the boat turns more easily to the right.
a
c
50553
a - Trim Tab
b - Anti-Ventilation Plate
c - Retaining Screw (M10x30) and Washer
Retaining Screw Torque
22 lb-ft (29.8 Nm)
90-883065 APRIL 2001 Page 6A-51

BIGFOOT GEAR HOUSING
LOWER UNIT
Section 6B - Bigfoot Gear Housing
Table of Contents
Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6B-1 Reassembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6B-31
Special Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6B-2 Forward Gear Bearing Race . . . . . . . . . . . 6B-31
Quicksilver Lubricants and Service Aids . . . . 6B-6 Shift Shaft . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6B-31
Gear Housing (Drive Shaft) 2.31:1 . . . . . . . . . 6B-7 Bearing Carrier . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6B-34
Gear Housing (Prop Shaft) 2.31:1 . . . . . . . . . 6B-9 Forward Gear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6B-38
General Service Recommendations . . . . . . . 6B-11 Propeller Shaft . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6B-40
Bearings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6B-11 Drive Shaft Wear Sleeve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6B-41
Seals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6B-11 Drive Shaft Lower Bearing Race . . . . . . . . 6B-43
Draining and Inspecting Gear Lubricant . . . . 6B-12 Oil Sleeve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6B-44
Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6B-13 Drive Shaft Upper Bearing . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6B-44
Disassembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6B-14 Forward Gear, Drive Shaft Lower Bearing,
Water Pump . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6B-14 Pinion Gear, and Drive Shaft . . . . . . . . . . 6B-46
Bearing Carrier and Propeller Shaft . . . . . 6B-17 Pinion Gear Depth and
Pinion Gear, Drive Shaft, Forward Gear Backlash . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6B-47
and Forward Gear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6B-22 Bearing Carrier and Propeller Shaft . . . . . 6B-52
Upper Drive Shaft Bearing . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6B-25 Water Pump . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6B-54
Oil Sleeve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Lower Drive Shaft Bearing Race . . . . . . . .
6B-26
6B-27
Gear Housing Pressure Test . . . . . . . . . . .
Filling Gear Housing With Lubricant . . . . . . .
6B-58
6B-59 6
Shift Shaft . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6B-28 Gearcase Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6B-60 B
Forward Gear Bearing Race . . . . . . . . . . . 6B-30 Trim Tab Adjustment and Replacement . . 6B-65
Specifications
Gear Ratio 2.31:1
Forward Gear
Pinion Gear
GEAR HOUSING Pinion Gear Locating Tool 91-12349A2
BIGFOOT Flat Number #8
(2.31:1) Disc Number #3
Forward Gear Backlash 0.012 - 0.019 in. (0.30 - 0.48 mm)
Backlash Indicating Tool 91-78473
Mark Number #4
Water Pressure
@ 800 rpm 2-6 psi (14-41 kPa)
@ 6000 rpm (WOT) 12-25 psi (83-172 kPa)
for 5 Minutes
90-883065 APRIL 2001 Page 6B-1

Special Tools
1. Pinion Gear Locating Tool (91-12349A2)
Disc 3 Disc1
Disc 2
55079
2. Bearing Installation Tool (91-13945)
3. Oil Seal Driver (91-13949)
4. Bearing Race Tool (91-14308A1)
5. Bearing Installation (91-14309A1)
6. Wear Sleeve Installation Tool (91-14310A1)
Page 6B-2 90-883065 APRIL 2001

7. Bearing Preload Tool (91-14311A2)
8. Mandrel (91-15755)*
73815
9. Backlash Indicator Tool (91-19660--1) 2.07:1 Gear Ratio (14/29)
19660-1
10. Mandrel (91-31106)
11. Oil Seal Driver (91-31108)
12. Treaded Rod (91-31229) and Nut (91-24156)*
13. Slide Hammer (91-34569A1)
90-883065 APRIL 2001 Page 6B-3

14. Mandrel (91-36569)*
15. Universal Puller Plate (91-37241)
73652
16. Driver Rod (91-37323)*
74184
17. Mandrel (91-37350)
18. Puller Jaws (91-46086A1)
19. Driver Shaft Holding Tool (91-56775, 2-Stroke), (91-56775, 40/50 4-Stroke,
747cc/935cc), (91-877840A1, 40/50/60 4-Stroke, 995cc), (91-804776A1, 75/90
4-Stroke)
20. Dial Indicator (91-58222A1)
Page 6B-4 90-883065 APRIL 2001

21. Backlash Indicator Tool (91-78473) 2.31:1 Gear Ratio (13/30)
22. Puller Bolt (91-85716)
23. Dial Indicator Adaptor Kit (91-83155)
24. Bearing Puller Assembly (91-83165M)
25. Bearing Installation Tool (91-856875A1)
56783
26. Bearing Installation Tool (91-877321A1)
* From Bearing Removal and Installation Kit (91-31229A7)
90-883065 APRIL 2001 Page 6B-5


92-809820 Loctite “271”
92-90113--2 RTV Silicone Sealer
92-850737A1 Premium Blend Gear Lube
92-850736A1 2-4-C w/Teflon
Page 6B-6 90-883065 APRIL 2001


31
32 7
4.25 IN./107.95MM
TORPEDO DIA.
29 21 BIGFOOT
95
22 7
34 95
33
28
30
35 20
24
7
7 40 41
23
26 7
27 38
25 95 39
95
7 95
11
37
10
14 95 36
12
19
95
18
87
8 3
9
6
12
1
13
7 2
17
15
16 5
4
5
7 4
7 Loctite 271 (92-809820)
5
87 Premium Gear Lubricant (92-850737A1) 4
95 2-4-C With Teflon (92-850736A1)
90-883065 APRIL 2001 Page 6B-7


TORQUE
REF.
REF
– 1 GEAR HOUSING
1 1 GEAR HOUSING ASSEMBLY
2 1 DOWEL PIN (FRONT)
3 1 OILER TUBE
4 3 DRAIN SCREW 60 6.8
5 3 WASHER-Sealing
6 1 DOWEL PIN (REAR)
7 1 TRIM TAB
8 1 SCREW (.437-14 x 1.25) 22 29.8
9 1 WASHER
10 1 CARRIER
11 1 NEEDLE BEARING
12 2 ANODE
13 1 NUT
14 1 SCREW (M6 x 40) 60 6.8
15 1 PINION GEAR (13 TEETH)
16 1 NUT 70 95
17 1 SHIFT CAM
19 AR SHIM ASSEMBLY (SIZES 006 THRU 048)
20 1 DRIVE SHAFT ASSEMBLY
21 1 WEAR SLEEVE ASSEMBLY
22 1 RING SEAL
23 1 COVER ASSEMBLY
24 1 GASKET
25 1 GASKET
26 1 OIL SEAL (LOWER)
27 1 OIL SEAL (UPPER)
28 1 GASKET
29 1 WATER PUMP ASSEMBLY
30 1 FACE PLATE
31 4 SCREW (M6x30) 60 6.8
32 1 SEAL
33 1 KEY
34 1 IMPELLER
35 6 SCREW 60 6.8
36 1 SHIFT SHAFT ASSEMBLY
37 1 E-RING
38 1 BUSHING ASSEMBLY
39 1 O-RING
40 1 OIL SEAL
41 2 SCREW (M6 x 1) 60 6.8
Page 6B-8 90-883065 APRIL 2001

95
4.25 IN./107.95MM
70 1
69 TORPEDO DIA.
50
BIGFOOT
44
48
49 47
45
46 42 87
43
67 68
95 75
57 68
95 95 74
55
72
54
73
53
52
51
7 7
65
66
64
95
87
71
60
59
58
56
95
61
95 63
7 Loctite 271 (92-809820)
87 Premium Gear Lubricant (92-850737A1)
95 2-4-C With Teflon (92-850736A1)
90-883065 APRIL 2001 Page 6B-9


TORQUE
REF.
REF
1 1 GEAR HOUSING ASSEMBLY
42 1 TAPERED ROLLER BEARING ASSEMBLY
43 1 CUP
44 1 FORWARD GEAR (30 TEETH)
45 1 ROLLER BEARING
46 1 RETAINING RING
47 1 CAM FOLLOWER ASSEMBLY
48 3 BALL
49 1 SLIDE
50 1 SPRING
51 1 CLUTCH
52 1 CROSS PIN
53 1 SPRING
54 1 PROPELLER SHAFT
55 1 REVERSE GEAR (30 TEETH)
56 1 BEARING CARRIER ASSEMBLY
57 1 O-RING
58 1 ROLLER BEARING
59 1 OIL SEAL (INNER)
60 1 OIL SEAL (OUTER)
61 1 ROLLER BEARING
62 1 THRUST WASHER
63 1 THRUST BEARING
64 2 STUD 100 135
65 2 WASHER
66 2 NUT 22 29.8
67 AR SHIM ASSEMBLY (SIZES 006 THRU 038)
68 2 THREAD INSERT
69 1 DECAL
70 1 DECAL-PROP OPERATION
71 1 THRUST HUB ASSEMBLY
72 1 PROPELLER NUT ASSEMBLY SERVICE ITEMS
73 1 TAB WASHER
74 4 SCREW 40 54.2
75 4 WASHER
Page 6B-10 90-883065 APRIL 2001

General Service Recommendations

There may be more than one way to “disassemble” or “reassemble” a particular part(s),
therefore, it is recommended that the entire procedure be read prior to repair.
IMPORTANT: Read the following before attempting any repairs.
In many cases, disassembly of a sub-assembly may not be necessary until cleaning and
inspection reveals that disassembly is required for replacement of one or more components.
Service procedure order in this section is a normal disassembly-reassembly sequence.
Threaded parts are right hand (RH), unless otherwise indicated.
When holding, pressing or driving is required, use soft metal vise jaw protectors or wood
for protection of parts. Use a suitable mandrel (one that will contact only the bearing race)
when pressing or driving bearings.
When compressed air is used to dry a part, verify that no water is present in air line.
Bearings
All bearings must be cleaned and inspected. Clean bearings with solvent and dry with com-
pressed air. Air should be directed at the bearing so that it passes through the bearing. DO
NOT spin bearing with compressed air, as this may cause bearing to score from lack of lu-
brication. After cleaning, lubricate bearings with Premium Blend Gear Lubricant. DO NOT
lubricate tapered bearing cups until after inspection.
Inspect ball bearings for roughness, catches and bearing race side wear. Work inner bear-
ing race in-and-out, while holding outer race, to check for side wear. When inspecting ta-
pered bearings, determine condition of rollers and inner bearing race by inspecting bearing
cup for pitting, scoring, grooves, uneven wear, imbedded particles and/or discoloration from
over-heating. Always replace tapered bearing and race as a set.
Inspect gear housing for bearing races that have spun in their respective bores. If race(s)
have spun, gear housing must be replaced.
Roller bearing condition is determined by inspecting the surface of the shaft that the roller
bearing supports. Check shaft surface for pitting, scoring, grooving, imbedded particles, un-
even wear and/or discoloration from overheating. The shaft and bearing must be replaced
if such a condition exists.
Seals
As a normal procedure, all O-rings and oil seals should be replaced without regard to ap-
pearance. To prevent leakage around seals, apply Loctite 271 to outer diameter of all metal
case seals. When using Loctite on seals or threads, surfaces must be clean and dry. Apply
2-4-C w/Teflon on all O-rings and on I.D. of oil seals. Apply 2-4-C w/Teflon to external sur-
faces of bearing carrier.
90-883065 APRIL 2001 Page 6B-11

Draining and Inspecting Gear Lubricant

WARNING
1. With gear housing in normal running position, place a clean pan under housing and re-
move the two vent screws and one fill/drain screw (with gaskets).
c b
53922
a - Fill/Drain Screw
b - Oil Level Screw
c - Vent Screw
2. Inspect gear lubricant for metal particles (lubricant will have a “metal flake” appearance).
Drain lube into a clean pan/container. Presence of fine metal particles (resembling pow-
der) in the gear lube indicates normal wear. The presence of metal chips in the gear lube
indicates the need for gear housing disassembly and component inspection.
3. Note color of gear lubricant. White or cream color MAY indicate presence of water in lu-
bricant. Gear lubricant which has been drained from a gear case recently in operation
will have a yellowish color due to lubricant agitation/aeration. Gear lube which is mixed
with assembly lubricant (Special Lube 101 or 2-4-C w/Teflon) will also be creamy white
in color. This is normal and should not be confused with the presence of water. If water
is suspected to be present in gearcase, a pressure check of gearcase should be made
(with no lubricant in gearcase). Gearcase should hold 10 to 12 psi of pressure for 5 min-
utes without leaking down. Pouring a portion of the gear lubricant into a glass jar and
allowing the lubricant to settle will allow any water in the lube to separate and settle to
the bottom of the jar.
4. Presence of water in gear lubricant indicates the need for disassembly and inspection
of oil seals, seal surfaces, O-rings, water pump gaskets as well as gear housing compo-
nents for damage. If gearcase is rebuilt, gearcase should be pressure checked before
filling with lubricant.
Page 6B-12 90-883065 APRIL 2001

Removal
WARNING
To prevent accidental engine starting, remove (and isolate) spark plug leads from
spark plugs before removing gear housing.
IMPORTANT: 90 hp (4-Stroke) models, when removing or installing gearcase care-
fully guide driveshaft through drive shaft bushing to avoid scoring bushing surface.
1. Remove (and isolate) spark plug leads from spark plugs.
2. Shift engine into forward gear.
3. Tilt engine to full “Up” position.
4. Remove 4 fasteners.
5. Remove locknut and washer.
6. Remove gear housing.
a
b
53992
a - Fasteners (2 Each Side)

90-883065 APRIL 2001 Page 6B-13

Disassembly
Water Pump
NOTE: If water tube seal stayed on water tube (inside of drive shaft housing) when gear
housing was removed, pull water tube seal from water tube.
NOTE: Newer models will not have the isolators installed on the water pump.
1. Replace water tube seal, if damaged.
2. Remove 4 screws (2 on each side of water pump housing), washers, and isolators.
3. Remove cover.
a
c
19212
a - Water Tube Seal

b - Screw, Washer, Isolator (4 each)
c - Cover
IMPORTANT: The circular groove formed by the impeller sealing bead should be dis-
regarded when inspecting cover (Step 4) and plate (Step 8), as the depth of the groove
will not affect water pump output.
4. Replace cover if thickness of steel at the discharge slots is 0.060 in. or less, or if
groove(s) (other than impeller sealing bead groove) in cover roof are more than 0.030
in. (0.762 mm) deep.
5. Lift impeller, drive key, and gasket from drive shaft.
c b
19220
a - Impeller
b - Drive Key
c - Gasket
Page 6B-14 90-883065 APRIL 2001

6. Inspect impeller. Replace impeller if any of the following conditions exist:

• Impeller blade(s) are cracked, torn, or worn.
• Impeller is glazed or melted (caused by operation without sufficient water supply).
• Rubber portion of impeller is not bonded to impeller hub.
7. Remove plate and gasket.
8. Replace plate if groove(s) (other than impeller sealing bead groove) in plate are more
than 0.030 in. (0.762 mm) deep.
c
a
19219
a - Plate
b - Gasket
c - Impeller Sealing Groove
9. Remove screws and washers.
19217
a - Screws and Washers (6 each)
90-883065 APRIL 2001 Page 6B-15

10. Remove water pump base using flat screwdrivers to lightly pry up on base.
19226
a - Water Pump Base
11. Remove (and discard) seals (IT MAY BE BENEFICIAL TO CLAMP THE WATER PUMP
BASE IN A VISE WHILE REMOVING SEALS).
19195
a - Seals
12. Remove gasket.
19218
a - Gasket
Page 6B-16 90-883065 APRIL 2001

Bearing Carrier and Propeller Shaft

1. Remove fasteners.
a
51117
a - Fasteners
2. With propeller shaft horizontal, pull carrier (using tool shown) to break seal with gear
housing.
3. Remove bearing carrier/propeller shaft components as an assembly by pulling back on
the propshaft. Take care not to lose cam follower or 3 metal balls in end of propeller shaft.
4. Remove propeller shaft from bearing carrier.
b
e
c a
d 51116
a - Bearing Carrier
b - Puller Jaws (91-46086A1)
c - Puller Bolt (91-85716)
d - Thrust Hub
e - Propeller Shaft
90-883065 APRIL 2001 Page 6B-17

5. Lift reverse gear, thrust bearing and thrust washer from bearing carrier. Replace thrust
bearing and thrust washer if rusted or damaged.
6. Replace reverse gear if gear teeth or clutch teeth on reverse gear are rounded or
chipped. If reverse gear must be replaced, pinion gear and sliding clutch should be in-
spected for damage.
19202
a - Reverse Gear
b - Thrust Bearing
c - Thrust Washer
7. If reverse gear radial bearing is rusted or does not roll freely, replace bearing. If the bear-
ing needs to be replaced remove it using Slide Hammer (91-34569A1).
a
91-34569A1
19205
a - Radial Bearing
Page 6B-18 90-883065 APRIL 2001

8. If bearing is rusted or does not roll freely, replace bearing. If replacement is necessary,
remove bearing and oil seals using Mandrel* (91-36569) and Driver Rod* (91-37323).
Discard oil seals.
NOTE: *From Bearing Removal and Installation Kit (91-31229A7).
c
91-37323
91-36569
58205
a - Bearing
b - Mandrel (91-36569)
c - Driver Rod (91-37323)
9. Remove propeller shaft seals (if not removed with bearing in Step 9) and bearing carrier
O-ring.
51263
a - O-ring
90-883065 APRIL 2001 Page 6B-19

10. Remove spring.
51876
a - Spring
11. Apply constant pressure to cam follower in order to prevent it and internal components
from ejecting out of the propeller shaft during removal of the cross pin from the clutch.
51800
a
a - Cross Pin
b - Cam Follower
Page 6B-20 90-883065 APRIL 2001

12. Remove components from propeller shaft.

13. Replace cam follower if worn or pitted.
14. Replace sliding clutch if jaws are rounded or chipped. Rounded jaws indicate one or
more of the following:
• Improper shift cable adjustment.
• Engine idle speed too high while shifting.
• Shifting from neutral to reverse (or forward) too slowly.
f c
a
b e d 51265
a - Cam Follower
b - Metal Balls (3)
c - Guide Block
d - Spring
e - Sliding Clutch
f - Jaws
15. Replace propeller shaft if any of the following exist:

• Splines are twisted or worn.
• Bearing surfaces of propeller shaft are pitted or worn.
• Oil seal surface is grooved.
• Shaft has a noticeable “wobble” or is bent more than 0.009 in. (0.228 mm). Prop
shaft trueness should be measured with a dial indicator with prop shaft on V-blocks.
c b b
a
51877
a - V-Blocks
b - Bearing Surfaces
c - Measure with Dial Indicator at This Point
90-883065 APRIL 2001 Page 6B-21

Pinion Gear, Drive Shaft, and Forward Gear

1. Hold drive shaft using Drive Shaft Holding Tool; remove (and discard) pinion nut.

40/50 Bigfoot (4-Stroke, 747cc/935cc) 91-56775
40/50/60 Bigfoot (4-Stroke, 995cc) 91-877840A1
75/90/115 EFI (4-Stroke) 91-804776A1
60 Bigfoot (2-Stroke) 91-56775
75/90/100/115/125 (2-Stroke) 91-56775
2. Remove drive shaft, pinion gear, pinion bearing and forward gear.
3. Replace pinion gear if it is chipped or worn.
4. Replace pinion bearing and race if either are rusted, pitted or damaged; or if bearing
does not roll freely. To remove race, refer to “Lower Drive Shaft Bearing Race,” following.
5. Replace forward gear if gear teeth or clutch teeth are chipped or worn.
a
c
d
b
f
19175
a - Drive Shaft Holding Tool
b - Pinion Nut
c - Drive Shaft
d - Pinion Gear
e - Pinion Bearing
f - Forward Gear
Page 6B-22 90-883065 APRIL 2001

6. Replace forward gear needle bearing if it is rusted or does not roll freely.
7. Use suitable tools (screwdriver and awl) to remove retaining ring. Use a punch and ham-
mer to remove bearing.
57905 b 19203
a - Retaining RIng
b - Forward Gear Needle Bearing
8. Replace forward gear bearing and race if either are rusted, pitted or damaged, or if bear-
ing does not roll freely. Remove bearing from gear using Universal Puller Plate
(91-37241) and mandrel. To remove race, refer to “Forward Gear Bearing Race,” follow-
ing.
a c
b 91-37241
51119
a - Forward Gear Bearing

b - Universal Puller Plate (91-37241)
c - Mandrel
90-883065 APRIL 2001 Page 6B-23

9. Replace drive shaft if splines are worn or twisted.

10. If bearing surface is damaged, replace drive shaft and corresponding bearing.
IMPORTANT: Do not tighten vise against drive shaft.
11. If wear sleeve is deeply grooved allowing water to enter gear case, remove (and discard)
sleeve using Universal Puller Plate (91-37241) and mallet.
91-37241
d e
75/90/115
4-stroke
c
a 19710
a - Crankshaft/Driveshaft Splines
b - Oil Pump Drive Splines 75/90 4-Stroke Only
c - Bearing Surface
d - Wear Sleeve
e - Universal Puller Plate (91-37241)
f - Mallet
12. Remove (and discard) rubber ring.

a
19152
a - Rubber Ring
Page 6B-24 90-883065 APRIL 2001

Upper Drive Shaft Bearing

1. Replace upper drive shaft bearing and sleeve if either are rust stained, or if bearing will
not roll freely. Remove bearing and then sleeve using Puller Assembly (91-83165M) with
suitable jaws.
OR
c
91-83165M
a
b 19177
a - Upper Drive Shaft Bearing

b - Sleeve
c - Puller Assembly (91-83165M)
IMPORTANT: Upper drive shaft bearing/sleeve must be removed prior to oil sleeve
removal. Refer to “Upper Drive Shaft Bearing,” preceding.
90-883065 APRIL 2001 Page 6B-25

Oil Sleeve
1. Remove oil sleeve (if necessary) using Puller Assembly (91-83165M) with suitable jaws.
b
a
91-83165M
19222
a - Oil Sleeve
b - Puller Assembly (91-83165M)
Page 6B-26 90-883065 APRIL 2001

Lower Drive Shaft Bearing Race
IMPORTANT: Upper drive shaft bearing/sleeve and oil sleeve do not have to be re-
moved for lower drive shaft bearing race removal.
IMPORTANT: Retain shim(s) for reassembly.
1. Remove bearing race and shim(s) using bearing race tool (91-14308A1).
91-14308A1
19171
a - Bearing Race
b - Shim(s)
c - Bearing Race Tool (91-14308A1)
90-883065 APRIL 2001 Page 6B-27

Shift Shaft
1. Remove shift shaft coupler and nylon spacer.
53925
75 (2-Stroke) Tiller Model Shown

a - Shift Shaft Coupler
b - Spacer
2. Remove bolts.
53926
a - Bolts
NOTE: Remove rough edges from shift shaft splines before removing shift shaft bushing.
3. Remove shift shaft bushing and shift shaft.
a b
53927
a - Bushing
b - Shift Shaft
Page 6B-28 90-883065 APRIL 2001

4. Remove shift cam from housing.

5. Replace shift cam if worn.
a
51117
60 (2-Stroke) Bigfoot Shown

a - Shift Cam
6. Remove shift shaft bushing and clip from shift shaft.

7. Replace shift shaft if splines are worn or shaft is twisted.
8. Remove (and discard) O-ring.
a
d c e d
b
53928
a - Bushing
b - Clip
c - Shift Shaft
d - Splines
e - O-ring
9. Remove (and discard) seal. (Lightly clamp the bushing in a vise when removing seal.)
a
53929
a - Seal
90-883065 APRIL 2001 Page 6B-29


IMPORTANT: Retain shim(s) for reassembly. If shims are damaged, replace with new
shims of equal thickness.
1. Remove race and shim(s) using Slide Hammer (91-34569A1).
91-34569A1
b c
27653
a - Race
b - Shim(s)
c - Slide Hammer (91-34569A1)
Page 6B-30 90-883065 APRIL 2001

Reassembly
NOTE: Propshaft should be vertical when installing bearing race.
1. Place shim(s) (retained from disassembly) into housing. If shim(s) were lost, or a new
gear housing is being assembled, start with 0.010 in. (0.254 mm) shim(s).
2. Assemble components as shown using mandrel (91-31106). Apply 2-4-C w/Teflon to
O.D. of race. Drive race into housing by striking propeller shaft end with lead hammer.
NOTE: Install a nut on the end of the propshaft to prevent damage to the propshaft threads
while performing step 2.
e d
91-31106
95
95 2-4-C w/Teflon (92-850736A1) b

19179
a - Shim(s) d - Disassembled Propeller Shaft
b - Race e - Assembled Bearing Carrier
c - Mandrel (91-31106)
Shift Shaft
1. Apply Loctite 271 on O.D. of new seal.
2. Press seal into shift shaft bushing until seal is seated against shoulder.
3. Install new O-ring.
4. Apply 2-4-C with Teflon on O-ring and I.D. of seal.
c a
7
d b
53930
7 Loctite “271” (92-809820)
95
95 2-4-C w/Teflon (92-850736A1)
a - Seal c - Surface
b - Bushing d - O-ring
90-883065 APRIL 2001 Page 6B-31

5. Assemble components as shown.

a b
c 53928
a - Shift Shaft
b - “E” Clip
c - Shift Shaft Bushing
6. Install shift cam; align hole in shift cam with shift shaft pilot bore in gear housing.
60 Bigfoot, 75/90/100/115/125 (2-Stroke)
51117
a - Shift Cam (marked with “UP” and part number)

b - Shift Shaft Pilot Bore
60 Bigfoot, 75/90/100/115/125 (2-Stroke) & 75/90/115EFI (4-Stroke)
51117
a - Shift Cam (marked with part number only)

Page 6B-32 90-883065 APRIL 2001

40/50 Bigfoot (4-Stroke,747cc/935cc), 40/50/60 Bigfoot (4-Stroke, 995cc)
850307
51117
a - Shift Cam (Numbers Down)

7. Install shift shaft assembly; insert splines into shift cam.
b
53932
a - Shift Shaft Assembly

b - Splines
8. Apply Loctite 271 to bottom half of threads on each screw. Install screws and tighten to
specified torque.
53926
7 Loctite “271” (92-809820)

a - Screw (2)
Screw Torque
60 lb-in. (6.8 Nm)
90-883065 APRIL 2001 Page 6B-33

Bearing Carrier Reassembly

1. Lubricate O.D. of bearing and bearing carrier bore with Quicksilver 2-4-C w/Teflon.
2. Protect lip on forward side of bearing carrier, using bearing installation tool (91-13945).
3. Press propeller shaft needle bearing (number side toward mandrel 91-15755) into carri-
er, until bearing bottoms out.
95
91-15755
91-13945
95 2-4-C w/Teflon (92-850736A1)

21042
a - Bearing Installation Tool (91-13945)

b - Mandrel (91-15755)
c - Suitable Driver Rod
Page 6B-34 90-883065 APRIL 2001

4. Place smaller diameter seal on longer shoulder of Oil Seal Driver (91-31108) with seal
lip away from shoulder.
5. Protect lip on front side of bearing carrier using Bearing Installation Tool (91-13945). Ap-
ply Loctite 271 on O.D. of seal. Press seal into carrier until tool bottoms.
a 7
91-31108
91-13945
7 Loctite “271” (92-809820) 21040
a - Seal
b - Oil Seal Driver (91-31108)
c - Bearing Installation Tool (91-13945)
6. Place larger diameter seal on shorter shoulder of Oil Seal Driver (91-31108) with seal
lip toward shoulder.
7. Protect lip on front side of bearing carrier using Bearing Installation Tool (91-13945). Ap-
ply Loctite 271 on O.D. of new seal. Press seal into carrier until tool bottoms.
a
b
7 7
91-31108
91-13945
21041
7 Loctite “271” (92-809820)
a - Seal
b - Oil Seal Driver (91-31108)
90-883065 APRIL 2001 Page 6B-35

8. Install O-ring. Lubricate O-ring with 2-4-C w/Teflon. Lubricate seal lips with 2-4-C
w/Teflon.
9. Lubricate outside diameter of reverse gear bearing and bearing carrier bore with a light
coating of 2-4-C w/Teflon.
10. Press bearing into carrier until tool bottoms.
95
c
a
91-13945
19163
95 2-4-C w/Teflon (92-850736A1)
a - O-ring
b - Bearing, Numbered Side Toward Tool
11. Install thrust washer. Coat thrust washer with Premium Blend Gear Lubricant.
87
19167
87 Premium Blend Gear Lubricant (92-850737A1)
a - Thrust Washer
Page 6B-36 90-883065 APRIL 2001

12. Install thrust bearing. Coat thrust bearing with Premium Blend Gear Lubricant.
87
19168
a - Thrust Bearing
13. Apply Premium Blend Gear Lubricant to bearing surface of reverse gear and install re-
verse gear.
87
19202

a - Reverse Gear
b - Bearing Surface
90-883065 APRIL 2001 Page 6B-37

Forward Gear Reassembly

1. Apply Quicksilver 2-4-C w/Teflon grease to the I.D. of the bearing. Press bearing onto
gear using suitable mandrel (press only on inner race of bearing). Because the gear hub
is longer than the bearing, a tube type mandrel should be used to install the bearing. This
will allow the bearing to bottom out on the gear.
95
a
51869
95 2-4-C w/Teflon (92-850736A1)
a - Mandrel (91-37350)
b - Bearing; Lubricate I.D. with Quicksilver 2-4-C w/Teflon
2. Inspect reverse gear end of clutch to determine the number of jaws. Refer to chart, fol-
lowing, for tool end selection.
Model Installation End Bearing Position

Tool Stamped
3 Jaw Reverse 91-856875A 1 3 0.155 in. (3.94mm)
Clutch below surface
6 Jaw Reverse 91-856875A 1 6 Flush with surface
Clutch
FORWARD GEAR NEEDLE BEARING INSTALLATION

3 Jaw Reverse Clutch
c b
56783
a - Stamped “3”
b - Numbered end of Needle Bearing
c - 3 Jaw Reverse Clutch
Page 6B-38 90-883065 APRIL 2001

6 Jaw Reverse Clutch
c
a 56784
a - Stamped “6”
b - Numbered end of Needle Bearing
c - 6 Jaw Reverse Clutch
3. Apply Premium Blend Gear Lubricant to I.D. of forward gear, and O.D. of needle bearing.
Press needle bearing into forward gear (using forward gear bearing installer tool) until
tool bottoms out on gear.
a
87
b
91-877321A1

a - Forward Gear Bearing Installer (91-877321A1)
b - Needle Bearing, Numbered Side Toward Installer Tool
4. Install retaining ring into groove of forward gear by starting at one end of retaining ring
and working it around until seated in groove.
a
57905
a - Retaining Ring
b - Groove in Forward Gear
90-883065 APRIL 2001 Page 6B-39

Propeller Shaft Reassembly

1. Install components into propeller shaft in sequence shown.
NOTE: When installing the clutch make sure the ratcheting clutch teeth (angled) are toward
forward gear, and non-ratcheting (square on both sides) are toward reverse gear.
e f g
b
d c a 51265
Assembly Sequence
a - Spring
b - Guide Block
c - Clutch
d - 3 Metal Balls
e - Cam Follower
f - Forward Clutch Teeth
g - Reverse Clutch Teeth
2. Align the hole in the clutch with the hole in the guide block, install cross pin.
b
a
51800
a - Apply Pressure in This Direction
b - Cross Pin
Page 6B-40 90-883065 APRIL 2001

3. Install spring. DO NOT allow spring coils to overlap each other.
51876
a - Spring
Drive Shaft Wear Sleeve Installation

1. Install new rubber ring.
2. Apply a light coat of Loctite 271 on outside diameter of rubber ring.
a
19152
7 Loctite “271” (92-809820)

a - Ring
3. Insert sleeve into holder*.

*Component of Wear Sleeve Installation Tool (91-14310A1).
a
a
91-14310A1
19169
a - Sleeve
b - Holder
90-883065 APRIL 2001 Page 6B-41

4. Press sleeve onto drive shaft using Wear Sleeve Installation Tool (91-14310A1); contin-
ue pressing until the upper and lower part of the tool make surface to surface contact.
91-14310A1
a
b d
19166
a - Drive Shaft
b - Wear Sleeve Installation Tool (91-14310A1)
c - Upper part of tool (Surface C)
d - Lower part of tool (Surface D)
5. Remove excess Loctite from assembled shaft.
Page 6B-42 90-883065 APRIL 2001

Drive Shaft Lower Bearing Race Installation

1. Lubricate O.D. of bearing race with Quicksilver 2-4-C w/Teflon.
2. Install shim(s) and bearing race into housing. If Shim(s) were lost or a new gear housing
is being assembled, start with 0.025 in. (0.635 mm) shim(s).
NOTE: Verify shim(s) are not cocked when drawing up race. Once shims and bearing cup
are in place, position gearcase assembly so the driveshaft is vertical. This will aid in prevent-
ing the bearing cup from becoming cocked in the bore.
f e
a
91-14309A1
b
95
c
95 2-4-C w/Teflon (92-850736A1) 58207
a - Shim(s) (Retained From Disassembly)

b - Bearing Race
c - Mandrel* (13780)
d - Mandrel* (13781)
e - Threaded Rod** (91-31229)
f - Nut** (11-24156)
*From Bearing Installation Tool (91-14309A1)
**From Bearing Removal and Installation Kit (91-31229A7)
90-883065 APRIL 2001 Page 6B-43

Oil Sleeve Installation

1. Install oil sleeve with tab positioned as shown.
53934
a - Oil Sleeve
b - Tab
Drive Shaft Upper Bearing Installation

1. Lubricate I.D. of bearing sleeve and O.D. of bearing with 2-4-C w/Teflon.
2. Press bearing into sleeve using mandrel from bearing installation tool (91-14309A1).
d
95 c 91-13781
a
b
19164
95 2-4-C w/Teflon (92-850736A1)
a - Bearing Sleeve
b - Tapered End
c - Bearing; Numbered Side Toward Mandrel
d - Mandrel* (91-13781)
Page 6B-44 90-883065 APRIL 2001

3. Install bearing/sleeve into housing.

IMPORTANT: Oil sleeve must be installed prior to upper driveshaft bearing installa-
tion.
IMPORTANT: Lower driveshaft bearing cup pilots the mandrel (13780) during installa-
tion of the upper driveshaft bearing/sleeve. Lower bearing cup must be installed prior
to installing upper bearing/sleeve.
f
c
a
e
91-14309A1
58206
a - Bearing/Sleeve
b - Tapered End Of Sleeve
c - Mandrel* (13781)
d - Mandrel* (13780)
e - Threaded Rod** (91-31229)
f - Nut** (11-24156)
**From Bearing Removal and Installation Kit (91-31229A7)
90-883065 APRIL 2001 Page 6B-45

Forward Gear, Drive Shaft Lower Bearing, Pinion Gear, and Drive Shaft
Installation
1. Install components per assembly sequence shown.
e
d
b
87
c
f
a
7
19175
7 Loctite “271” (92-809820)
87 Premium Gear Lubricant (92-850737A1)
Assembly Sequence:
a - Forward Gear/Bearing: Apply Premium Blend gear lube to bearing rollers.
b - Drive Shaft Lower Tapered Roller Bearing: Apply Premium Blend Gear Lube to
bearing rollers.
c - Pinion Gear
d - Drive Shaft
e - Drive Shaft Holding Tool
f - Pinion Nut (New): Clean nut and driveshaft threads with Loctite Primer or suit-
able de-greaser. Apply Loctite 271 to threads (not necessary if using a new
nut with drylock patch on threads) during final assembly (after pinion gear
depth and forward gear backlash have been set), tighten to specified torque.
40/50 Bigfoot (4-Stroke, 747cc/935cc) 91-56775
40/50/60 Bigfoot (4-Stroke, 995cc) 91-877840A1
75/90/115EFI (4-Stroke) 91-804776A1
60 Bigfoot/75/90/100/115/125
91-56775
(2-Stroke)
Pinion Nut Torque

70 lb-ft (95 Nm)
Page 6B-46 90-883065 APRIL 2001

Pinion Gear Depth and Forward Gear Backlash

DETERMINING PINION GEAR DEPTH
IMPORTANT: Forward gear assembly pilots the end of the pinion gauge and must be
installed in gear housing when checking pinion gear depth. Without it an inaccurate
measurement will be obtained.
1. Clean the gear housing bearing carrier shoulder and diameter.
2. With gear housing positioned up right (drive shaft vertical), install Bearing Preload Tool
(91-14311A2) over drive shaft in sequence shown.
g
h h
e c
f b
a
d
a - Adaptor: Bearing surfaces clean and free of nicks

b - Thrust Bearing: Oiled and able to move freely
c - Thrust Washer: Clean and free of nicks and bends
d - Spring
e - Nut: Threaded all-the-way onto bolt
f - Bolt: Held snug against spring
g - Sleeve: Holes in sleeve must align with set screws
h - Set Screw (2): Tightened against drive shaft, bolt should not slide on drive shaft.
3. Measure distance between top of nut and bottom of bolt head.

4. Increase distance by 1 in. (25.4 mm).
5. Rotate drive shaft 5 to 10 revolutions. This should properly seat drive shaft tapered roller
bearing.
a
c
19884
a - 1 in. (25.4 mm) c - Bolt Head
b - Nut
90-883065 APRIL 2001 Page 6B-47

6. Assemble Pinion Gear Locating Tool (91-12349A2) as shown; do not tighten collar retain-
ing screw at this time. Install gauging block with numbers away from split collar.
b d e
f
a c
a - Arbor d - Split Collar

b - Gauging Block e - Collar Retaining Screw
c - Screw (2) f - Snap Ring
7. Insert tool into forward gear assembly; position gauging block under pinion gear as
shown.
22067
a - Gauging Block
8. Remove tool, taking care not to change gauging block position, and tighten collar retain-
ing bolt.
9. Insert tool into forward gear assembly; position proper numbered flat (from chart) of
gauging block – under pinion gear.
MODEL GEAR RATIO (PINION USE LOCATING

GEAR TEETH/REVERSE FLAT NO. DISC NO.
GEAR TEETH)
40/50 Bigfoot (4-stroke, 747cc/935cc) 2.31:1 (13/30) 8 3
40/50/60 Bigfoot (4-stroke, 995cc) 2.31:1 (13/30) 8 3
75/90/115EFI (4-stroke) 2.07:1 (14/29) 2 3
60 Bigfoot/60 Seapro 2.31:1 (13/30) 8 3
60 Marathon
75-thru-90 2.31:1 (13/30) 8 3
(3 Cylinder)
100/115/125 2.07:1 (14/29) 2 3
(4 Cylinder)
Page 6B-48 90-883065 APRIL 2001

10. Install locating disc against bearing carrier shoulder in gear housing.
11. Position access hole as shown.
Disc 3
24643
a - Locating Disc
b - Access Hole
12. Determine pinion gear depth by inserting a feeler gauge thru access hole in locating
disc.
13. The correct clearance between gauging block and pinion gear is 0.025 in. (0.64 mm).
14. If clearance is correct, leave Bearing Preload Tool on drive shaft and proceed to “Deter-
mining Forward Gear Backlash,” following.
15. If clearance is more than 0.025 in. (.064 mm) add shims behind the bearing race. If clear-
ance is less than 0.025 in. (.064 mm) remove shims from behind the bearing race. When
reinstalling pinion nut, apply Loctite 271 on threads of nut.
NOTE: Clean driveshaft and pinion nut threads with Loctite Primer or suitable de-greaser
before applying Loctite.
c
a
7 b
24643
7 Loctite “271” (92-809820)

a - Feeler Gauge
b - Gauging Block
c - Pinion Gear
d - Bearing Race
90-883065 APRIL 2001 Page 6B-49

DETERMINING FORWARD GEAR BACKLASH

1. Obtain correct pinion gear depth; refer to “Determining Pinion Gear Depth,” preceding.
2. Install Bearing Preload Tool (91-14311A2) on drive shaft; refer to “Determining Pinion
Gear Depth,” preceding.
4. While holding the driveshaft (to prevent from turning), torque the puller bolt to 45 lb-in.
5. Rotate driveshaft 5-10 revolutions. This should properly seat the forward gear tapered
roller bearing. Repeat step 4.
a b
d
c
53936
a - Propeller Shaft*
b - Bearing Carrier* (Assembled)
c - Puller Jaws (91-46086A1)
d - Puller Bolt (91-85716)
Puller Bolt Torque
45 lb-in. (5 Nm)
*Refer to “Bearing Carrier and Propeller Shaft Installation,” following.
Page 6B-50 90-883065 APRIL 2001


e f
d c
b c
51117
a - Threaded Rod (Obtain Locally)
b - Washers
c - Nuts
d - Dial Indicator Adaptor Kit (91-83155)
e - Dial Indicator (91-58222A1)
f - Backlash Indicator Tool
7. Position Dial Indicator on appropriate line (from chart below) marked on Backlash Indi-
cator Tool. Make sure the dial indicator is perpendicular (⊥) to the indicator tool or an
inaccurate reading will be obtained.
BACKLASH ALIGN POINTER of DIAL

MODEL INDICATOR TOOL INDICATOR with MARK
40/50 Bigfoot (4-stroke, 747cc/935cc) 91-78473 4
40/50/60 Bigfoot (4-stroke, 995cc) 91-78473 4
75/90/115EFI (4-Stroke) 91-19660--1 1
60 Seapro/60 Marathon
60 Bigfoot 91-78473 4
75-thru-90
(3 Cylinder) 91-78473 4
100/115/125
(4 Cylinder) 91-19660--1 1
90-883065 APRIL 2001 Page 6B-51

8. Grasp the driveshaft pre-load tool bolt head and lightly turn drive shaft back-and-forth
(no movement should be noticed at propeller shaft).
9. Dial Indicator registers amount of backlash, which must be between specification shown
in chart.
DIAL INDICATOR READING
MODEL MINIMUM MAXIMUM
0.012 in. 0.019 in.
40/50 Bigfoot (4-Stroke, 747cc/935cc) (0.30 mm) (.48 mm)
0.012 in. 0.019 in.
40/50/60 Bigfoot (4-Stroke, 995cc) (0.30 mm) (.48 mm)
0.013 in. 0.019 in.
75/90/115EFI (4-Stroke)
(0.38 mm) (.55 mm)
0.012 in. 0.019 in.
60 Bigfoot
(0.30 mm) (.48 mm)
75-thru-90 0.012 in. 0.019 in.
(3 Cylinder) (0.30 mm) (.48 mm)
100/115/125 0.013 in. 0.019 in.
(4 Cylinder) (0.38 mm) (0.55 mm)
10. If backlash is less than the minimum specification, remove shim(s) from in front of for-
ward gear bearing race. If backlash is more than the maximum specification, add
shim(s) in front of forward gear bearing race. When reinstalling pinion nut, apply Loctite
271 on threads of nut.
NOTE: By adding or subtracting 0.001 in. (0.025 mm) shim, the backlash will change
approximately 0.001 in.
Bearing Carrier and Propeller Shaft Installation

1. Insert propeller shaft assembly into bearing carrier.
2. Before installing bearing carrier assembly into gear housing, obtain locally a 6 in. (152.4
mm) long by 1-1/4 in. – 1-1/2 in. (31.7 – 38.1 mm) diameter piece of PVC pipe. Install
the PVC pipe over the prop shaft and secure the pipe against the bearing carrier assem-
bly with the propeller nut and tab washer. This holds the reverse gear and thrust bearing
tight against the bearing carrier preventing possible bearing damage during installation.
a b
c
d
e 21043
a - Bearing Carrier Assembly
b - PVC Pipe
c - Propeller Nut
d - Prop Shaft
e - Tab Washer
Page 6B-52 90-883065 APRIL 2001

3. Generously lubricate O-ring, bearing carrier, and gear housing mating surfaces with
2-4-C w/Teflon.
4. Install bearing carrier and propeller shaft into housing with the word “TOP” (located on
flange) toward top of housing.
a
b
95
21044
95 2-4-C w/Teflon (92-850736A1)
a - O-ring b - TOP
NOTE: Use thick 0.090 in. (2.29mm) washers (12-855941) under fasteners if not previously
installed.
Washer Thickness Fastener Torque

0.090 in. (2.29mm) 22 lb-ft (29.8 Nm)
0.060 in. (1.53mm) 25 lb-ft (33.9 Nm)
b
a
a - Washers
b - Fasteners (If using Screws Apply Loctite 271 on Threads)
90-883065 APRIL 2001 Page 6B-53

Water Pump Reassembly and Installation

1. Place water pump base upper seal on longer shoulder side of Oil Seal Driver (91-13949)
with seal lip away from shoulder.
2. Apply Loctite 271 on O.D. of seal; press seal into water pump base until tool bottoms.
91-13949
7
b
7 Loctite “271” (92-809820) 51553

a - Seal - Lip Faces UP (when water pump base is installed on gearcase)
b - Spring - Faces UP (when water pump base is installed on gearcase)
c - Oil Seal Driver (91-13949)
d - Longer Shoulder Side of Oil Seal Driver
e - Shorter Shoulder Side of Oil Seal Driver
Page 6B-54 90-883065 APRIL 2001

3. Place water pump base lower seal on shorter shoulder side of Oil Seal Driver (91-13949)
with seal lip toward shoulder.
4. Apply Loctite 271 on O.D. of seal; press seal into water pump base until tool bottoms.
5. Lubricate lip of each seal with Quicksilver 2-4-C w/Teflon (92-850736A1).
91-13949
95
7
b
7 Loctite “271” (92-809820)
95 2-4-C w/Teflon (92-850736A1) 51553
a - Seal - Lip Faces DOWN (when water pump base is installed on gearcase)
b - Spring - Faces DOWN (when water pump base is installed on gearcase)
c - Oil Seal Driver (91-13949)
d - Longer Shoulder Side of Oil Seal Driver
e - Shorter Shoulder Side of Oil Seal Driver
6. Install gasket.
19218
a - Gasket
90-883065 APRIL 2001 Page 6B-55

IMPORTANT: To prevent cutting the seal lips remove any burrs or sharp edges from the dri-
veshaft splines before installing water pump base assembly.
7. Install components as shown. Apply Loctite 271 on bottom half of screw threads and
tighten to specified torque (in sequence shown).
a 3 1 5
b
2
6
4
7 Loctite “271” (92-809820) 19217
a - Water Pump Base

b - Screw (6) M6 x 1 and Washers(6)
Screw Torque
60 lb-in. (6.8 Nm)
8. Install gasket and plate.
19219
a - Gasket
b - Plate
IMPORTANT: If the old impeller is re-used it must be installed in original (clockwise)

direction of rotation.
9. Install gasket, drive key and impeller.
b
a
19220
a - Gasket
b - Drive Key
c - Impeller
Page 6B-56 90-883065 APRIL 2001

10. Lubricate I.D. of cover with Quicksilver 2-4-C w/Teflon.

11. Rotate drive shaft clockwise and push impeller housing down (over impeller) until it con-
tacts water pump base.
12. Apply Loctite 271 to bottom threads of cover screws. Install cover screws and tighten
to specified torque.
95 a b
95 2-4-C w/Teflon (92-850736A1) 19212
a - Impeller Housing
b - Screw (4) M 6 x 30
Screw Torque
60 lb-in. (6.8 Nm)
NOTE: It is recommended that the gearcase be pressure tested for leaks after reassembly
and BEFORE gear lube is added. Gearcase should hold 10-12 psi (69-83 kPa) for 5 min-
utes.
90-883065 APRIL 2001 Page 6B-57

Gear Housing Pressure Test

1. Remove vent plug and install pressure test gauge.
2. Pressurize housing to 10-12 psi (69-83 kPa) and observe gauge for 5 minutes.
3. Rotate drive shaft, prop shaft and shift shaft while housing is pressurized to check for
leaks.
4. If pressure drop is noted, immerse housing in water.

5. Re-pressurize to 10-12 psi (69-83 kPa) and check for air bubbles.
6. Replace leaking seals as necessary. Retest housing.
NOTE: Gearcase should hold 10-12 psi (69-83 kPa) for 5 minutes.
7. Remove tester from housing and install vent plug and sealing washer.
Page 6B-58 90-883065 APRIL 2001

Filling Gear Housing With Lubricant

NOTE: Gear housing lubricant capacity is 24 fl oz (710 mL).
WARNING
CAUTION
Do not use automotive grease in the gear housing. Use only Quicksilver Premium
Blend Gear Lube.
1. Remove any gasket material from “Fill/Drain” and “Vent” screws and gear housing.
2. Install new sealing washer on “Fill/Drain” and “Vent” screws.
IMPORTANT: Never apply lubricant to gear housing without first removing “Vent”
screws or gear housing cannot be filled because of trapped air. Fill gear housing only
when driveshaft is in a vertical position.
3. Remove lubricant “Fill/Drain” screw and sealing washer from gear housing.
4. Insert lubricant tube into “Fill” hole, then remove “Vent” screws and sealing washer.
5. Fill gear housing with lubricant until excess starts to flow out of one (first) “Vent” screw
hole.
6. Install this “Vent” screw and sealing washer only and continue filling until excess starts
to flow out of second “Vent” screw hole.
7. Rotate driveshaft clockwise approximately 10 revolutions. Let gearcase sit for at least
one minute to allow any trapped air to settle out, then top off lubricant level.
a c
b
53922
a - Vent Screw - Torque to 60 lb-in. (6.8 Nm)

b - Fill/Drain Screw - Torque to 60 lb-in. (6.8 Nm)
c - Oil Level Vent Screw - Torque to 60 lb-in. (6.8 Nm)
8. Replace second lubricant “Vent” screw and sealing washer.

IMPORTANT: Do not lose more than one fluid ounce (30cc) of gear lubricant while re-
installing “FILL/DRAIN” screw.
9. Remove lubricant tube from Fill/Drain hole; install Fill/Drain screw and sealing washer.
90-883065 APRIL 2001 Page 6B-59

Gearcase Installation
WARNING
Disconnect (and isolate) spark plug leads from spark plugs before installing gear
housing onto drive shaft housing. Failure to follow this warning could result in acci-
dental engine starting and possible injury.
1. Position outboard shift linkage into forward gear position.
Models 40-60 Bigfoot (4-Stroke EFI)
a
a - Shift Lever
Models 40-60 Bigfoot (4-Stroke Carb)

a - Shift Lever
Page 6B-60 90-883065 APRIL 2001

Models 60 Bigfoot (2-Stroke)
a
a - Shift Block
Models 75/90/100/115/125 (2-Stroke)

a b
19879
a - Shift Block; Front of Block MUST Extend 1/8 in. (3.2 mm) Past Front of Rail.
b - Rail
90-883065 APRIL 2001 Page 6B-61

Models 75/90/115EFI (4-Stroke)
F N R
a
a - Shift Block
2. Tilt engine to full up position and engage tilt lock lever.

3. Shift gear housing into neutral position. Propeller shaft will rotate freely in either direc-
tion.
4. Install water tube seal; apply 2-4-C w/Teflon to I.D. of seal.
5. Apply a bead of RTV Sealer as shown.
NOTE: For ease of gear housing installation, install water tube seal (labyrinth end) onto
water tube in drive shaft housing. Tapered end of water tube seal goes onto water pump.
95
78
b
53938
78 G. E. RTV Sealant 92-90113--2
95 2-4-C w/Teflon (92-850736A1)
a - Water Tube Seal
b - RTV Sealer
Page 6B-62 90-883065 APRIL 2001

CAUTION
Do not use lubricant on top of drive shaft. Excess lubricant, that is trapped in clear-
ance space, will not allow drive shaft to fully engage with crankshaft. Subsequently,
tightening the gear housing fasteners (while lubricant is on top of drive shaft) will
load the drive shaft/crankshaft and damage either or both the power head and gear
housing. Top of drive shaft is to be wiped free of lubricant.
6. Apply a light coat of Quicksilver 2-4-C w/Teflon onto drive shaft splines.
7. Apply a light coat of Quicksilver 2-4-C w/Teflon on gear case shift shaft splines and upper
shift shaft splines. Do not use lubricant on ends of shift shafts.
8. Install components as shown in appropriate photo.
ALL MODELS EXCEPT 75 (2-STROKE) W/MECHANICAL REVERSE LOCK
a - Nylon Spacer
b - Shift Shaft Coupler
c - Bushing 40-60 Bigfoot 4–Stroke Only
75 (2-STROKE) W/MECHANICAL REVERSE LOCK
a b
53925
a - Nylon Spacer
b - Shift Shaft Coupler
c - Flat; MUST BE Positioned Toward Front of Gear Housing
90-883065 APRIL 2001 Page 6B-63

9. Shift gear housing into forward gear position. In forward gear the gear housing will ratch-
et when propeller shaft is turned clockwise. Resistance will be felt when propeller shaft
is rotated counterclockwise.
10. Apply Loctite Grade 271 on threads of gear housing retaining bolts.
NOTE: During installation of gear housing, it may be necessary to move the shift block (lo-
cated under cowl) slightly to align upper shift shaft splines with shift shaft coupler splines.
NOTE: On 75/90 hp (4-Stroke) models. If, while performing Step 11, the drive shaft splines
will not align with the oil pump splines, place a propeller onto propeller shaft and turn it coun-
terclockwise as the gear housing is being pushed toward drive shaft housing. Continue ro-
tating the propshaft until the driveshaft splines align with the crankshaft splines.
IMPORTANT: 75/90 hp (4-Stroke) models, when removing or installing gearcase,
carefully guide driveshaft through driveshaft bushing to avoid scoring bushing sur-
face.
11. Position gear housing so that the driveshaft is protruding into driveshaft housing.
12. Move gear housing up toward driveshaft housing, while aligning upper shift shaft splines
with shift shaft coupler splines, water tube with water tube seal, and crankshaft splines
with driveshaft splines.
13. Install 4 fasteners and washers (two each side). Install locknut and washer.
14. Torque bolts and locknut (or nuts only if applicable) to specified torque.
7
b a
53922
7 Loctite “271” (92-809820)
a - Fasteners and Washers (2 Each Side)
Bolt or Nut Torque
40 lb-ft (54 Nm)
15. Check shift operation as follows:

• Place shift lever in forward gear. Gear housing should ratchet when propeller shaft is
turned clockwise. Resistance should be felt when propeller shaft is turned counter-
clockwise.
• Place shift lever in neutral. Propeller shaft should rotate freely in either direction.
• While rotating propeller shaft, place shift lever in reverse gear. Resistance should be
felt when propeller shaft is rotated in either direction.
IMPORTANT: If shift operation is not as described above, the gear housing must be
removed and the cause of the problem corrected.
Page 6B-64 90-883065 APRIL 2001

Trim Tab Adjustment and Replacement

IMPORTANT: The trim tab is now painted and does NOT aid in protecting the drive
shaft housing and gear housing from galvanic corrosion (corrosion and pitting of
metal surfaces). Side anodes now provide protection. Do not paint or place protec-
tive coating on the side anodes, or corrosion protection function will be lost.
TRIM TAB REPLACEMENT
1. Replace trim tab if damaged. Mark location of old trim tab on anti-ventilation plate before
removal; install new trim tab in same location.
TRIM TAB ADJUSTMENT
NOTE: The trim tab provides a means to offset (balance) some of the steering load that is
caused by propeller torque at higher operating speeds.
NOTE: Loosen trim tab bolt sufficiently to allow trim tab to disengage from locking ridges
in gear case before attempting to move tab. DO NOT strike trim tab with a hard object to
make adjustments.
1. Shift engine control into NEUTRAL and turn ignition key to OFF position.
2. If at higher speeds the boat turns more easily to the left, loosen screw, move the trim
tab (trailing edge) to the left (when viewed from behind). Tighten retaining screw to spe-
cified torque.
3. If the boat turns more easily to the right, loosen screw, move the trim tab (trailing edge)
to the right (when viewed from behind) turn trim tab (trailing edge) to the right . Tighten
retaining screw to specified torque.
c
b a 53931
a - Trim Tab
b - Anti-Ventilation Plate
c - Retaining Screw and Washer
Retaining Screw Torque
22 lb-ft (29.8 Nm)
90-883065 APRIL 2001 Page 6B-65

THROTTLE/SHIFT LINKAGE
ATTACHMENTS/CONTROL LINKAGE
Section 7A - Throttle/Shift Linkage
Table of Contents
Linkage (Remote) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7A-2 Throttle Link Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7A-6
Linkage (Handle) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7A-4 Maximum Throttle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7A-7
7
A
90-883065 APRIL 2001 Page 7A-1

LINKAGE (REMOTE)
7 20
9 15 18
19
27 10
12 16 18
5
8 13
2
66 11 95
1 17
12 95
3
29 28 26 95
21
4 14
17
6 23
25
30
22
24
66 Loctite 242 (92-809821)
95 2-4-C With Teflon (92-850736A1)
Page 7A-2 90-883065 APRIL 2001

LINKAGE (REMOTE)
TORQUE
REF.
REF
1 1 SCREW (M8 X 70) 100 11.3
2 1 SCREW (M6 X 55)
3 1 NUT
4 1 CAP
5 1 THROTTLE LEVER
6 1 RETAINER
7 1 BUSHING
8 1 RETAINER
9 1 SHIFT LEVER
10 1 BRACKET
11 1 LATCH
12 2 SCREW (M6 X 16) 75 8.5
13 2 SLEEVE
14 1 SHIFT ROD
15 1 GUIDE - SHIFT ROD
16 1 SHIFT LINK
17 2 NYLINER
18 2 WASHER
19 1 NUT 75 8.5
20 1 COTTER PIN
21 1 SHIFT SHAFT LEVER
22 1 BUSHING
23 1 LINK
24 1 SOCKET 75 8.5
25 1 BUSHING
26 1 THROTTLE CAM
27 2 SCREW (M6 X 40) 75 8.5
28 1 THROTTLE ARM
29 1 BUSHING
90-883065 APRIL 2001 Page 7A-3

LINKAGE (HANDLE)
30 5
2
29
6
1
7
3
31 4
32
8 95
23
28
33
13
14 17
24
10 12 15
18
18 16
17
95
18
95
9 19
20
11
22
27
26
25
95 21
95 2-4-C With Teflon (92-850736A1)
Page 7A-4 90-883065 APRIL 2001

LINKAGE (HANDLE)
TORQUE
REF.
REF
1 1 SCREW (M8 X 70) 100 11.3
2 1 SCREW (M6 X 55)
3 1 NUT
4 1 CAP
5 1 THROTTLE LEVER
6 1 BRACKET (HANDLE)
7 2 SCREW (M6 X 20) 75 8.5
8 1 BUSHING
9 2 SCREW (M6 X 25) 75 8.5
10 1 SHIFT GUIDE
11 1 SCREW (M5 X 12) 45 5.1
12 1 SHIFT SLIDE
13 1 SHIFT DETENT
14 1 SPRING
15 1 SHIFT ROD
16 1 COTTER PIN
17 2 NUT 75 8.5
18 3 WASHER
19 1 SHIFT LINK
20 1 NYLINER
21 1 SHIFT SHAFT LEVER
22 1 BUSHING
23 1 THROTTLE LINK
24 1 SOCKET 75 8.5
25 1 SWITCH
26 1 PLATE-SWITCH
27 2 SCREW (M3 X 20) 20 2.3
28 1 BUSHING
29 1 THROTTLE CAM
30 2 SCREW (M6 X 40) 75 8.5
31 1 THROTTLE ARM
32 1 BUSHING
90-883065 APRIL 2001 Page 7A-5

Throttle Link Adjustment

Adjustment
NOTE: For remote control models, remove remote control throttle cable during throttle link
adjustment. For tiller handle models, throttle cables remain attached and throttle twist grip
should be used to advance throttle during throttle link adjustment.
1. Lightly hold throttle body arm against idle stop.
2. Slowly push throttle lever forward until you feel the throttle body start to move. The cen-
ter of throttle arm roller should line up with the throttle cam alignment mark. If adjustment
is needed proceed to next step. Tolerance may range from mark to 1/8 inch (3.2 mm)
after mark.
3. Remove lower cowl. Refer to Cowl Removal section 5A.
4. Disconnect the throttle link rod from the throttle arm and throttle body arm.
5. If the throttle body arm engages (throttle shutter opens) before the center of the roller
aligns with the throttle cam alignment mark, shorten the link rod by turning the socket
clockwise. If the throttle body arm engages after the roller aligns with the throttle cam
alignment mark, lengthen the link rod by turning the socket counterclockwise.
6. Snap socket onto throttle body arm and push rod end into throttle arm.
7. Repeat steps 1 & 2. Adjust if necessary.
c e
f g
h
d
a
b
g
a - Throttle Body Arm e - Correct

b - Throttle Lever f - Shorten Link Rod
c - Throttle Arm Roller g - Lengthen Link Rod
d - Throttle Cam Alignment Mark h - Alignment Tolerance - 1/8 inch (3.2mm)
Page 7A-6 90-883065 APRIL 2001

Maximum Throttle
1. With throttle cable(s) attached, advance throttle (remote control handle or throttle twist
grip) to wide open throttle position.
2. Throttle stop should lightly contact adjoining surface. To ensure the throttle shutter is
fully open, back the throttle stop screw out until there is a gap between the throttle stop
screw and adjoining surface (at WOT position). Keep turning the throttle stop screw “in”
until the throttle stop lightly contacts the adjoining surface.
a - Throttle Lever
b - Throttle Stop Screw
c - Throttle Stop
90-883065 APRIL 2001 Page 7A-7

TILLER HANDLE
ATTACHMENTS/CONTROL LINKAGE
Section 7B - Tiller Handle
Table of Contents
Tiller Handle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7B-2 Cleaning/Inspection/Repair . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7B-8
Tiller Handle Assembly Removal . . . . . . . . . . 7B-4 Tiller Handle Reassembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7B-9
Tiller Handle Disassembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7B-6 Tiller Handle Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7B-14
7
B
90-883065 APRIL 2001 Page 7B-1

TILLER HANDLE
TILLER HANDLE
1
2
3
6
4
5 8
95
7
9
10
95
31 11
30
29
26 28
35 27 12
13
14
24
15
16
25 33 17
36 32
34
37
38
95 23
18 19
22
20
21
95 2-4-C With Teflon (92-825407A12)
Page 7B-2 90-883065 APRIL 2001

TILLER HANDLE
TILLER HANDLE
TORQUE
REF.
REF
1 1 COVER KIT
2 1 PULLEY
3 1 CASE
4 1 SCREW (10-16 x 1/2 IN. Self Tapping) 20 2.3
5 1 THROTTLE CABLE (30-1/2 IN.)
6 1 THROTTLE CABLE (41-1/2 IN.)
7 1 SLEEVE
8 2 SCREW (M8 x 25) 135 15.3
9 1 COVER
10 1 BUSHING
11 1 ARM–Steering Handle
12 1 RETAINER
13 1 SCREW (M5 x 16) 35 3.9
14 1 SCREW (M6 x 25)
15 1 LOCK–Throttle
16 1 SPRING
17 1 KNOB–Throttle
18 1 TILLER TUBE
19 1 DECAL
20 1 HANDLE–Throttle
21 1 GRIP
22 1 SWITCH (STOP)
23 2 CLIP
24 1 SWITCH (STOP)
25 1 RETAINER
26 1 BRACKET–Tiller
27 1 WAVE WASHER
28 1 BUSHING
29 1 WASHER
30 1 CONDUIT
31 1 CABLE TIE
32 1 DECAL-Shift (F-N-R)
33 1 LANYARD SWITCH
34 1 SCREW (M8 x 35) 100 11.3
35 1 SHIFT HANDLE
36 1 BUSHING
37 1 TAB WASHER
38 2 SCREW (M10 x 90) 35 47.5
90-883065 APRIL 2001 Page 7B-3

TILLER HANDLE
Tiller Handle Assembly Removal

1. Remove lower cowl.
a - Screws-M6x30 (6)
b - Screw-M6x60
2. Remove shift handle.
a - Shift Handle
b - Bushing
c - Screw-M8x35
Page 7B-4 90-883065 APRIL 2001

TILLER HANDLE
3. Loosen the jam nuts and disconnect the throttle cables from the throttle lever.
b
58829
a - Throttle Cable (Long)
b - Throttle Cable (Short)
4. Disconnect the tiller handle wiring.

5. Remove two screws (b) securing the tiller handle. Remove the tiller handle assembly
from the outboard.
a
BLK BLK
BLK/YEL
BLK/YEL BLK/YEL
BLK BLK
b
54272
a - Disconnect Tiller Handle Wires
b - Screws-M10x90 (2)
c - Tab Washer
90-883065 APRIL 2001 Page 7B-5

TILLER HANDLE
Tiller Handle Disassembly

1. Pry the two clips out of the hand grip.
2. Remove the side cover.
a - Clips (2)
b - Side Cover
3. Pull the tiller arm, along with the throttle cables and wiring, from the tiller bracket.
a - Tiller Arm
b - Throttle Cables/Wiring
c - Tiller Bracket
Page 7B-6 90-883065 APRIL 2001

TILLER HANDLE
4. Remove retainer and slide out the tiller tube assembly.

5. Remove the throttle friction knob assembly.
a
b
a - Retainer
b - Throttle Friction Knob Assembly
c - Tiller Tube Assembly
6. Use a flat tip screwdriver to pry/push the rubber grip off the handle.
7. Pull out the stop switch harness.

a
a - Stop Switch Harness

8. Push the tiller tube out of the handle.
b c
b - Tiller Tube
c - Handle
90-883065 APRIL 2001 Page 7B-7

TILLER HANDLE
9. Remove cover and disconnect throttle cables from pulley.

b
a
a - Cover
b - Throttle Cables
c - Pulley
1. Inspect throttle cables for bending/damage and replace if necessary.
2. Inspect steering handle arm for cracks/damage and replace if necessary.
Page 7B-8 90-883065 APRIL 2001

TILLER HANDLE
Tiller Handle Reassembly

1. Wrap cables around pulley as shown.
b
a
a - Short Throttle Cable (30-1/2 in.) Place in Top Groove
b - Long Throttle Cable (40-1/2 in.) Place in Bottom Groove
c - Pulley
2. Place pulley and cables into case.
3. Install cover with screw.
c
b
a - Pulley c - Screw 10-16x1/2 in.

b - Cover
Pulley Cover Screw Torque

20 lb. in. (2.3 N·m)
4. Match tiller tube end with slots in the handle. Pull the tube end into the handle until it
bottoms out.
5. Install the throttle friction knob components on tiller tube.
b
a
g c
f
e
d
c
a - Tiller Tube e - Lock
b - Handle f - Spring
c - Slots In Handle g - Knob
d - Screw M6x25
90-883065 APRIL 2001 Page 7B-9

TILLER HANDLE
6. Check to make sure tiller tube is recessed in the end of the handle 7/8 in. (22.2mm).
7/8 in. (22.2mm) a

a - 7/8 in. (22.2 mm)
7. Insert the engine stop switch harness through the tiller tube.
a - Engine Stop Switch Harness

8. Place the stop switch into end on handle.
a
a - Stop Switch
9. Align the grooves inside the rubber grip with the ridges on the handle. Push the rubber
grip onto the handle.
NOTE: Applying a soap/water solution to the inside of the rubber grip will ease installation.
a b
a - Rubber Grip
b - Handle
Page 7B-10 90-883065 APRIL 2001

TILLER HANDLE
10. Place pulley assembly into arm.

11. Slide the tiller tube into the arm. Position the throttle friction knob into its slot.
12. Match the end of the tiller tube with the slots in the pulley assembly. Insert the tiller tube
end into the pulley assembly.
13. Secure tiller tube with retainer.
14. Snap the engine start switch on the tiller tube.
c
d
b
a - Pulley Assembly
b - Throttle Lock Knob
c - Retainer
d - Screw-M5x16
Tiller Tube Retainer Screw Torque

35 lb. in. (3.9 N·m)
15. Place bushing components on the arm mounts.
95
c
b
a
d
95
95 2-4-C w/Teflon (92-850736A1)

a - Flat Washer
b - Bushing
c - Wave Washer (1)
d - Bushing
90-883065 APRIL 2001 Page 7B-11

TILLER HANDLE
16. Pull the throttle cables and wiring into the bracket.
a - Tiller Bracket
17. Push the arm into the tiller bracket. Secure the arm by installing the cover and screws.
Tighten screws to specified torque.
c b a
a - Arm
b - Cover
c - Screw (2) M8 x 25
Arm Cover Screw Torque

135 lb. in. (15.3 N·m)
Page 7B-12 90-883065 APRIL 2001

TILLER HANDLE
CAUTION
Wiring passing through the hand grip opening must be protected from chaffing or
being cut, by using the wiring conduit described in the following steps. Failure to
protect wiring as described could result in electrical system failure.
18. Place the throttle cables through the hand grip opening as shown.
19. Place all wiring inside the wiring conduit.
20. Route the wiring through the hand grip opening and position the wiring conduit inside
the opening so that at least 1/2 in. (12.7mm) extends past each end of the opening.
21. Push the wiring and throttle cables down into the handle grip and hold in place with two
clips.
c 1/2 in. (12mm)
b a
e
d
1/2 in. (12mm) c
a - Hand Grip Opening

b - Wiring Conduit (Place all Wiring Inside – See CAUTION above)
c - Wiring Conduit 1/2 in extending past opening
d - Throttle Cables (Position toward outer side)
e - Clips (2)
90-883065 APRIL 2001 Page 7B-13

TILLER HANDLE
Tiller Handle Installation

1. Install tiller handle, new tab washer, and screws. Tighten screws to specified torque.
2. Bend tabs onto flats of screws.
c
a - Tiller Handle
b - Tab Washer
c - Screw (2) M10 x 90
Tiller Handle Mounting Screw Torque
35 lb. ft. (47.5 N·m)
3. Connect wires as shown in wiring diagram (on next page).

4. Secure wires at connectors with cable tie as shown.
a - Cable Tie
Page 7B-14 90-883065 APRIL 2001

TILLER HANDLE
ELECTRIC START TILLER HANDLE WIRING DIAGRAM-40/50/60 (4-STROKE)
BLK
BLK
j
BLK
BLK
l
BLK
BLK BLK
BRN
BLK_YEL RED
GRY
o
+ –
TAN_LTBLU
PPL
YEL_RED
BLK i
m
n YEL_RED
BLK
TAN_LTBLU
YEL_RED
BLK_YEL
BLK_YEL
BLK
GRY
PPL
BLK_YEL
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 c BLK = Black
d BLU = Blue
BLK_YEL
YEL_BLK
PPL
BLK
YEL_RED
TAN
RED
BRN = Brown
GRY = Gray
GRN = Green
PPL
ORN = Orange
BLK_YEL
BLK_YEL
PPL
BLK PNK = Pink
YEL_RED PUR = Purple
BLK_YEL
RED RED = Red
TAN = Tan
b YEL_BLK
PPL + e WHT = White
–
TAN
YEL = Yellow
LIT = Light
BLK
BLK_YEL
BLK f DRK = Dark
BLK_YEL
BLK_YEL BLK_YEL
BLK BLK g
h
a
a - Ground Harness below Starter Motor M6x16 h - Push Button Stop Switch
screw i - Battery
b - Harness Extension j - Starter Motor
c - Harness Connection k - Voltage Regulator/Rectifier
d - Key Switch Assembly Transom Mount l - Start Solenoid
e - Key Switch m - Neutral Start Switch
f - Horn n - ECM
g - Lanyard Stop Switch o - In-line Diode
90-883065 APRIL 2001 Page 7B-15

TILLER HANDLE
5. Rotate throttle grip to idle position.

6. Insert the anchor on the shorter throttle cable into the anchor slot on the throttle lever.
7. Secure cable in position by tightening jam nuts onto bracket (finger tighten only).
8. Insert anchor on remaining cable into the anchor slot on the throttle lever.
9. Secure cable in position by tightening jam nuts onto bracket (finger tighten only).
e
b
58829
a - Throttle Lever
b - Anchor of Shorter Throttle Cable
c - Jam Nut
d - Anchor of Longer Throttle Cable
e - Jam Nut
Page 7B-16 90-883065 APRIL 2001

TILLER HANDLE
10. Rotate throttle grip to the wide open throttle position. The throttle stop screw should be
contacting the plate. If there is a gap between the throttle stop screw and plate, loosen
the jam nut on the shorter throttle cable, turn the adjustment nut clockwise. Tighten the
jam nut finger tight, rotate the throttle grip to full throttle. Keep adjusting until the throttle
stop screw lightly contacts the plate.
NOTE: No free-play should exist in throttle grip handle once the throttle stop screw has hit
the plate. If this condition exists, re-adjust jam nuts on appropriate throttle cable.
a
b
58830
a - Throttle Stop Screw Hitting Plate
b - No Free play should exist in throttle grip handle past full throttle once throttle
stop screw has hit plate. If this condition exists re-adjust jam nuts.
IMPORTANT: After installation, cycle the throttle grip a few times from the idle posi-
tion to the wide-open-throttle position. Make sure the throttle stop is still contacting
the plate. If it is not, re-adjust the jam nuts.
11. Install lower cowl.
a
b

b - Lower Cowl
Bottom Cowl Bolt Torque

60 lb. in. (6.8 N·m)
90-883065 APRIL 2001 Page 7B-17

TILLER HANDLE
12. Cables, wires, and shift rod should be routed through grommet as shown. Seat grommet
between cowl halves.
f
d a
c b
e
a - Fuel Connector d - Shift Rod
b - Battery Cables e - Tiller Handle Harness Wires
c - Throttle Cables f - Remote Key Harness
13. Assemble the shift rod into the shift handle by sliding the rod into the hole.
a
a - Shift Rod
b - Shift Handle
14. Install shift handle assembly, bushing, and screw. Tighten screw to specified torque.
95
c
b
95 2-4-C w/Teflon (92-850736A1)
a - Handle Assembly
b - Screw M8 x 35
c - Bushing
Shift Handle Screw Torque

100 lb. in. (11.3 N·m)
Page 7B-18 90-883065 APRIL 2001

COLOR DIAGRAMS
COLOR DIAGRAMS
Table of Contents
40/50/60 EFI (4-Stroke) Tiller Handle Electric 40/50/60 EFI (4-Stroke)
Wiring Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 8-3 Fuel Flow Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 8-9
40/50/60 EFI (4-Stroke) Remote Control Electric 40/50/60 EFI (4-Stroke)
Wiring Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 8-5 Oil Flow Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 8-11
40/50/60 EFI (4-Stroke) Typical SmartCraft 40/50/60 EFI (4-Stroke)
(CAN) Installation Wiring Diagram . . . . . . . . Page 8-7 Water Flow Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 8-13
90-883065 APRIL 2001 Page 8-1

COLOR DIAGRAMS
Notes:
Page 8-2 90-883065 APRIL 2001

COLOR DIAGRAMS
40/50/60 EFI (4-STROKE)

TILLER HANDLE ELECTRIC
COLOR WIRING DIAGRAM
2002 MODELS
90-883065 APRIL 2001 Page 8-3

40/50/60 EFI (4-Stroke) Tiller Handle Electric 2002 Models
1. ECM 37. Fuel Injector #4
2. Starboard ECM Connector 38. Port ECM Connector
3. Manifold Air Temperature (MAT) Sensor 39. Neutral Start Switch
4. Manifold Absolute Pressure (MAP) Sensor 40. 12 Volt Switched Auxiliary Power Source
5. Throttle Position Sensor (TPS) 41. Key Switch
6. Engine Coolant Temperature (ECT) Sensor 42. Warning Horn
7. Crank Position Sensor (CPS) 43. Push Button Stop Switch
8. Oil Pressure Switch 44. Lanyard Stop Switch
9. Idle Air Control (IAC) Valve 45. Tachometer Signal
10. Ignition Coil (EST) #1 46. Tiller Handle Harness Connection
11. Ignition Coil (EST) #2
14. Main Power Relay
15. SmartCraft Data Bus Circuit - 15 amp. fuse
16. Fuel Pump/IAC/Injector Circuit - 20 amp. fuse
17. Main Power Relay/Accessory Circuit - 20 amp.
fuse
18. Ignition Coil Circuit - 2 amp. fuse
19. Voltage Regulator/Rectifier
20. Stator
21. Start Solenoid
22. Starter
23. To Trim Motor
24. Trim Down Relay
25. Trim Up Relay
26. To 12 Volt Battery
27. Cowl Mounted Trim Switch
28. To Trim Connections on Remote Control Harness
29. Suppression Diode
30. Vapor Separator Tank
31. Engine Harness Connection
32. Data Bus (10 pin) Control Area Network (CAN)
33. DDT Connection
34. Fuel Injector #1
10 11 12 13
24 25
3 22
5
20
9
6 7
15 17
8 14
23 23
4 21
16 18
19
1 2 3 4
1 26
1 9 17 1
2
3
4
5
2 6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
27
16 30
17
18
19
20
21
22
29 28
23
8 16 24 24
1 9 17 1
2
3
4
5
6
7 39
8
9
10
11
12
40
13
14
15
16
17
38 18
19
41
20
21
22
23 31 46
8 16 24 24
32
1 2 3 4 43 42
45
33
44 59080
34 35 36 37
COLOR DIAGRAMS
40/50/60 EFI (4-STROKE)

REMOTE CONTROL ELECTRIC
COLOR WIRING DIAGRAM
2002 MODELS
90-883065 APRIL 2001 Page 8-5

40/50/60 EFI (4-Stroke) Remote Control Electric 2002 Models
1. ECM 37. Fuel Injector #4
2. Starboard ECM Connector 38. Port ECM Connector
3. Manifold Air Temperature (MAT) Sensor
4. Manifold Absolute Pressure (MAP) Sensor
5. Throttle Position Sensor (TPS)
6. Engine Coolant Temperature (ECT) Sensor
7. Crank Position Sensor (CPS)
8. Oil Pressure Switch
9. Idle Air Control (IAC) Valve
14. Main Power Relay
15. SmartCraft Data Bus Circuit - 15 amp. fuse
16. Fuel Pump/IAC/Injector Circuit - 20 amp. fuse
17. Main Power Relay/Accessory Circuit - 20 amp.
fuse
18. Ignition Coil Circuit - 2 amp. fuse
19. Voltage Regulator/Rectifier
20. Stator
21. Start Solenoid
22. Starter
23. To Trim Motor
24. Trim Down Relay
25. Trim Up Relay
26. To 12 Volt Battery
27. Cowl Mounted Trim Switch
28. To Trim Connections on Remote Control Harness
29. Suppression Diode
30. Vapor Separator Tank
31. Engine Harness Connection
32. Data Bus (10 pin) Control Area Network (CAN)
33. DDT Connection
10 11 12 13
24 25
3 22
5
20
9
6 7
15 17
8 14
23 23
4 21
16 18
19
1 2 3 4
1 26
1 9 17 1
2
3
4
5
2 6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
27
16
17
18
19
20
21 29 28
22
23
30
8 16 24 24
1 9 17 1
2
3
4
5
38 6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19 31
20
21
22
23
8 16 24 24
1 2 3 4
32
33
34 59079
35 36 37
COLOR DIAGRAMS
40/50/60 EFI (4-STROKE)

TYPICAL SMARTCRAFT (CAN) INSTALLATION
2002 MODEL YEAR
90-883065 APRIL 2001 Page 8-7

40/50/60 EFI (4-Stroke) Typical SmartCraft (CAN) Installation
2002 Models
1. System Tachometer (can be used in place of System Monitor and System Link Tachometer
2. System Monitor
3. System Link Tachometer
4. System Link Series Connections
5. 2-1/4 in. System Link Gauges (Engine Temperature and Battery)
6. Series Connection for Additional System Link Gauges
7. 4000 Series Mechanical Panel Control (MPC 4000)
8. Connections for Lanyard Stop Switch
9. Connections for Power Trim Switch
10. Connections for Neutral Start Safety Switch
11. Ignition Key Switch
12. Analog Tachometer Harness (Not Used on CAN Installation)
13. Warning Horn
14. Analog Temperature Gauge Connection
15. Connection for Analog Temperature Sender
16. Connections to Trim Relays
17. Connection for Analog Trim Sender
18. Remote Control Harness Connects to Engine Harness
19. 10-Pin Control Area Network (CAN) Harness, Connect to Data Bus 10-Pin CAN Harness on Engine
20. Resistors within CAN Harness (120 1/4W 5%)
21. Connections for Auxiliary Warning Horn for Depth Sensor
22. 10-Pin Control Area Network (CAN) Connection to System Monitor or System Tachometer
2 3
5 5
1
4 4
22
4
20
21
19 10
9
8
20 11
18 17
16
15 14 C B
12
D E A
13
59083
COLOR DIAGRAMS
40/50/60 EFI (4-STROKE)

FUEL FLOW DIAGRAM
90-883065 APRIL 2001 Page 8-9

40/50/60 EFI (4-Stroke) Fuel Flow Diagram
1. From Boat Fuel Tank
2. Fuel Filter Assembly
3. Low Pressure Mechanical Fuel Pump
4. Vapor Separator Tank (VST) “Low-Pressure In”
5. Float Valve
6. High-Pressure Electric Fuel Pump
7. Schrader Valve for Testing Fuel Pressure
8. Fuel Cooler
9. Pressure Regulator
10. Vapor Separator Tank (VST) “High-Pressure Out”
11. High Pressure Fuel Filter
12. Fuel Distribution Manifold
13. Fuel Injectors
9 4
7
9
6
10
4
1 2
10
12
11
13
59082
COLOR DIAGRAMS
40/50/60 EFI (4-STROKE)

OIL FLOW DIAGRAM
90-883065 APRIL 2001 Page 8-11

40/50/60 EFI (4-Stroke) Oil Flow Diagram
1. Sump
2. Oil Pick-up
3. Oil Passages in Adapter Plate
4. Oil Passages in Cylinder Block
5. Oil Passages In Cylinder Head
6. Oil Pump
7. Oil Pressure Regulator
8. Oil Filter
9. Crankshaft
10. Piston, Rod, Wrist-Pin
11. Rocker Arm Shaft
12. Rocker Arms
13. Camshaft
14. Return to Sump
3 2 1
4
7
14
5
6
13
11
9
12
14
9
14
10
59081
COLOR DIAGRAMS
40/50/60 EFI (4-STROKE)

WATER FLOW DIAGRAM
90-883065 APRIL 2001 Page 8-13

40/50/60 EFI (4-Stroke) Water Flow Diagram
1. Water Inlet
2. Water Pump
3. Driveshaft Housing
4. Water Tube
5. Adapter Plate
6. Cylinder Block
7. Cylinder Head
8. Water Jacket Cover
9. Thermostat
10. Fuel Cooler
11. Fuel Pump
12. Tell-Tale
13. Water Discharged with Exhaust
7
13
6 3
2
1
5
11
58906
10
12

MERCURY Outboard 40-50-60 4 Stroke Service Manual

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

MERCURY Outboard 40-50-60 4 Stroke Service Manual

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Description:

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

MERCURY Outboard 40-50-60 4 Stroke Service Manual

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Service Manual Outline

Section 1 - Important Information

90-883065 APRIL 2001 Page iii

Notice to Users of This Manual

90-883065 APRIL 2001 Page i

Cleanliness and Care of Outboard Motor

90-826148R1 JANUARY 1996 PAGE 6A-7

Month of Printing Section Number

Year of Printing Part of Section Letter

Models 40/50/60 EFI (4-Stroke)

+100 +38 Use Quicksilver 4-Cycle Marine Oil with

90-883065 APRIL 2001 Page 1A-1

Type Capacitor Discharge Ignition

Page 1A-2 90-883065 APRIL 2001

90-883065 APRIL 2001 Page 1A-3

Main Bearing Clearance 0.0005 - 0.0017 in. (0.012 - 0.044 mm)

Run-out Limit B 0.0039 in. (0.1 mm)

Free Length “a” 1.491-1.569 in. (37.85-39.85 mm)

Compressed Pressure (Installed)

Page 1A-4 90-883065 APRIL 2001

Warp Limit 0.004 in. (0.1 mm)

* Lines indicate straight edge measurement

Valve/Valve Seat/Valve Guides:

90-883065 APRIL 2001 Page 1A-5

Outside Diameter 0.6288 - 0.6296 in.

Page 1A-6 90-883065 APRIL 2001

Gear Ratio 1.83:1

90-883065 APRIL 2001 Page 1A-7

Propeller Information Charts

Mercury/Mariner 40 EFI (4-Stroke) 1.83:1 Non-Bigfoot

Approx. Approx. Speed

Page 1A-8 90-883065 APRIL 2001

Mercury/Mariner 50 EFI (4-Stroke) 1.83:1 Non-Bigfoot

Approx. Approx. Speed

90-883065 APRIL 2001 Page 1A-9

Mercury/Mariner 60 EFI (4-Stroke) 1.83:1 Non-Bigfoot

Page 1A-10 90-883065 APRIL 2001

Mercury/Mariner 40 EFI (4-Stroke) 2.3:1 Bigfoot

Approx. Approx. Speed

Mercury/Mariner 50 EFI (4-Stroke) 2.3:1 Bigfoot

Approx. Approx. Speed

90-883065 APRIL 2001 Page 1A-11

Mercury/Mariner 60 EFI (4-Stroke) 2.3:1 Bigfoot

Approx. Approx. Speed

Page 1A-12 90-883065 APRIL 2001

2. Oil Filter Wrench P/N 91-802653Q1

90-883065 APRIL 2001 Page 1B-1

3. Flushing Attachment P/N 44357A2

2. 2-4-C Marine Lubricant with Teflon P/N 92-850736A1

3. Special Lubricant 101 P/N 92-13872A1

Page 1B-2 90-883065 APRIL 2001

4. Quicksilver Power Trim and Steering Fluid P/N 92-90100A12

5. Quicksilver 4-Stroke Outboard Oil P/N 92-828000A12

6. Gear Lube-Premium Blend P/N 92-850737A1

7. Quicksilver 4-Cycle Marine Engine Oil P/N 92-832111A1

NET 32 OZ (1 QT) 946 ml

90-883065 APRIL 2001 Page 1B-3

Inspection And Maintenance Schedule

Page 1B-4 90-883065 APRIL 2001